This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
REGULATIONS
F O R T H E >7

PRUSSIAN

C AVA L RY.
TRANSLATED FROM

The GERMAN ORIGINAL.

Miles ab exercitiis armorum, vel novellus, vel jam vetuftus

ceflare non debet, cui pugnandum eft pro falute propria, &
libertate communi ; pnefertim cum antiquafir, prudenfque
fententia, omnes artes in meditatione confiftere.
Vegetius.

LONDON:
Printed by J. Haberkorn,
for the TRANSLATOR,
And Sold by
R. and J. DoJJley, Pail-Mall— W. Shropjhire, New Bond-Street.
— J. Millan, Charing-Crofs. — P. Vaillant, J. Nourfe,
D. Wilfon and Durham, Strand. —T. OJbornt, and J. Sbipton,
Gray's-Inn.—J. Riwington and J. Fletcher, Pater nofter-
Row— J- Brackfione, Cornhill.—G. Faulkner, Dublin.—
Kincaid and Donald/on, Edinburgh.

MDCCLVJI. v
THENEWYORK
PUBLIC LIBRARY
70250
I ASTOR, LENOX AND
1 TILDEN FOUNDATIONS.

L - 1897-
 To the Right Honourable

The earl of ALBEMARLE,

Major-General of His Majesty's Forces,

Colonel of the KING'S own Regiment of Dragoons,

AND '

Lord of the Bed-Chamber, to His Royal Highness

the DUKE, &c.

. MT LORD,
THE military Difcipline of fo great a
Monarch, and fo accomplished a Gene
ral, as the KING OF PRUSSIA, can be
addreffed to no Patron with more Propriety,
than to Your Lor d s h i p. 1 here judge for
my Readers, fecure of an univerfal Concur
rence ; and efteem myfelf highly honoured in
this Opportunity afforded me, of afluring You,
that I am, with the utmoft Refpedt,

Tour Lordship's
much obliged,
London, and obedient Servant,
May 14, 1757.
Wm. FAUOttT.
A Lift of SUBSCRIBERS.
His Royal Highnefs the Duke of
Cumberland.
a.
EARL of Albemarle,
for himfelf and Regi
ment.
Earl of Ancram, for him
felf and Regiment.
Lieut. Gen. Anftruther.
Col. Anftruther.
Lieut. Col. Armftrong, 1 8th
Regimt.
Capt. Alfton i ft Regimt. of
Foot-guards.
Capt. Ackland, i2thRegt.
Sir Robt. Arnott, 26th.
Capt. Agnew, 58th.
Lord Allen.
William Adair Efq;
Samuel Armitage Efq;
Lieut. George Ainflie, 2d
Troop of Horfe Grena
dier-Guards.
Lieut. P. Anflie, Ditto.
Lieut. Anderfon, Royal Re
gimt. of artillery.
Lieut. Arblafter, 6th Regt.
of Dragoons.
Cornet Abercombie, 3d Reg.
of Dragoons.
Enfign Amherft, ift Regimt
of Foot-guards.
Enfign Auguftus Alt, 8th
Regimt. of Foot.
Mr. Akcd.
B.
The Duke of Bedford.
Lord Geo. Beauclerk.
Col. Belford.
Marquis of Blandford.
Lieut. Col. Burges, 3d Re
gimt. of Foot- guards.
Lieut. Col. Blomer, Ditto.
Lieut. Col. Boden, Cold-
ftream Regimt.
Major N.Bateman, 1 ft troop
of Horfe-guards.
Major D. Berkeley.
Major Beckwith , 20th
Regimt.
Major
 A Lift of Subscribers.'
Major Bradfliaigh, of the ift
troop of Horfe-Grenadier-
Guards.
Capt. Brown, royal Regimt.
of Horfe- Guards.
Capt. Burton, of the ift
Regimt. of Dragoons.
Capt. Bowles, 2d troop of
Horfe-guards.
Capt. Brace, ift Regt. of
Dragoon-guards.
Capt. Barber ift Regt. of
Dragoons.
Hon. Capt. R.Brudenell, ift
Regt. of Foot-guards.
Capt. Baugh, Ditto.
Capt. Brereton, Ditto.
Capt. Boifragon, 8th Regt.
of Foot.
Capt. Backhoufe, Ditto.
Capt. Binden, 33d Regt.
Capt. G. Banks.
Capt. Bingham, 23d Regt.
Capt. Barnes.
-Capt. Brereton, 12th Regt.
Lieut. Beckwith, 2d Regt.
of Dragoon -Guards.
Lieut. Borradale, King's
own Regt.
Lieut. Borrowes, 3d Regt.
of Dragoons.
Lieut. Brittan, Ditto.
Lieut. Brown.
Cornet Brudenell, 2d Regt.
of Dragoon- Guards.
Cornet Ball, 3d Regt. of
Dragoons.
Enfign Bifhopp, Coldftream
Regt.
Enfign Baynton, 3d Regt.
of Foot- guards.
Enfign Blomberg 33d Regt.
Enfign Brown, Ditto.
Walter Borlace, Efq;
Geo. Buck, Efq;
Wm. Brooke, Efq;
Mr. Boyd.
Mr. Bullock.
Mr. Byron, NaJJau-Jlreet.
Mr. Geo. Barton, Louth.
Mr. Aris, Birmingham.
The Earl of Cholmondeley.
Lord Cadogan.
Lord Cathcart.
Lieut Gen. Campbell.
Lieut. Gen. Cholmondeley.
Major Gen. Conway.
Col. Casfar.
Lord Frederick Cavendifli,
ift Regt. of Foot-guards.
Lieut. Col. Carey> Ditto.
Lieut. Col. Clavering, Ditto.
Lieut. Col. J. Crauford, 1 3th
Regt.
Lieut Col. M. Campbell, 2d
Regt. of Dragoon-guards.
Lieut. Col. R. Campbell,
3d Regt. of Foot-guards.
Lieut. Col. Cunningham,
Ditto.
Lieut. Col. Crump, 58th
Regt.
Major Cook, 8th Regt. of
Foot.
Major Carpenter.
J. Calcrafr, Efq;
Capt. Callis, ift Regt. of
Dragoon-guards.
Capt.
 A Lift of Subscribers,'
Capt. Chauncy, 3d Regt. of
Dragoon-guards.
Capt. Carleton, ift. Regt.
of Foot- guards.
Capt. Cowper, Ditto.
Capt. Cafile, Ditto.
Capt. Cafwall, Coldftream
Regt.
Capt. Cox.
Capt. Chabbert, 12th Regt.
Capt. Corrance, 8 th Regt.
of Foot.
Capt. Cleiland, Ditto.
Capt. Corneille, 1 8th Regt.
Capt. Cope, 33d.
Lieut. Cox, 2d Regt. of
Dragoon -guards.
Lieut. Crofbie, 33d Regt.
Lieut. Cotton, Ditto.
Lieut. Creed, Ditto.
Lieut. Charlton, 20th Regt.
Brigadier Crafter, 2d troop
of Horfe-guards.
Cornet Caulfield, 3d Regt.
of Dragoon guards.
Cornet Colhoun, 2d Regt.
of Dragoons.
Enfign Cathcart, 3d Regt,
of Foot- guards.
Enfign Campbell Ditto.
Enfign Culliford, 8th Regt.
Foot.
Enfign Coxeter, 33d Regt.
Mr. Cock, Colchefter.
D.
Lord Delawarr.
Major Gen. Dury.
Major Gen. Dilkes.
Col. Durand.
Lieut. Col. Deane.
Lieut. Col. DeCofne, Cold
ftream Regt.
Lieut. Col. Defaguliers, Ro
yal artillery.
Major Donnelan, 8th Regt.
of Foot.
Major Daulhat, 33d Regt.
Major Defbrifay, 50th.
Capt. Draper, ift Regt. of
Foot-guards.
The Earl of Dunmore, 3d
Regt. of Foot-guards.
Capt. Geo. Davis.
Capt. Darby, of Major Gen.
Richbell's Foot.
Capt. Delgarno, 12th Regt.
Capt. Delaune, 20th.
Capt. Drummond, 33d.
Capt. Dundas, 34th.
Tho. Darby, E(q;
Hugh Dubbieg, Efq; Engi
neer.
Lieut. Dickens, 6th Regt.
of Dragoons.
Lieut. Duckenfield, 10th
Ditto.
Lieut. Dudgeon, 8th Regt.
of Foot.
Enfign De Salis, ift Regt.
of Foot-guards.
Enfign David, Ditto.
Enfign Deering,. Ditto.
Enfign Delaval, Coldftream
Ditto.
Enfign Denter.
Enfign Downes, 8th Regt.
of Foot.
Enfign Duke, 33d. Ditto.
Mr.
 A. Lift of Subscribers.
Mr. Dunwoody, 2d Rcgt. James Foreman, Efq;
of Dragoon guards. Lieut. Folliott, 18th Regt.
Mr. Robert Doubleday. Enfign Fauquier, ift Regt.
of Foot- guards.
Enfign Fitz-Patrick, 33d
Regt.
Gen, Elliot. Mr. Fordyce.
Major Gen. Ellifon. Mr. Duncan Forbes.
Col. Elliot. Mr. Geo. Faulkner, Dublin.
Major Eaft, 2d Regt. of
Dragoon-guards.
Major Eccles.
Major Eiflcine, 26th Regt. Col. Griffin, 3d Regt. of
Capt. Edmonfioune, 33d. Foot-guards.
Capt. Edwards. Lieut. Col. Gore, Ditto.
Capt. J. Ellis. Lieut. Col. Ganfell, Cold-
Brigadier Egerton, 2d Troop ftream Regt.
of Horfe-guards. Capt. Gould, 3d Regt. of
- Foot-guards.
Capt. Gould, 23d Regt.
Capt. Gilman, 8th Regt. of
Col. Fitzwilliams. Foot.
Lieut. Col. Forrefter, 3d Capt. Graydon, 58th.
Regt. of Foot-guards. Sir Alex. Guilmore.
Lieut. Col. Furbar, Ditto. Robert Gardiner, Efq; Com-
Lieut. Col. Fredrick, Ditto. miflary.
Major Forbes, royal Regt. Lieut. Gore, 33d Regt.
of Horfe-guards. Lieut. Gordon, Ditto.
Major Fitz- Thomas, 3d Lieut. Gardner, 12th Regt.
Regt. of Dragoon -guards. Lieut. Grey, independent
Major Flight, royal Artillery. Companies in Soutb-Ca-
Major Furye, 51ft Regt. rolina.
Capt. Fergufon, 2d. Regt. Cornet Guiott, 3d Regt. of
of Dragoon- guards. Dragoon- guards.
Honble. Capt. Fitz- Roy, ift Enfign Gorry, 33d Regt.
Regt. of Foot-guards. Mr. Garth.
Capt. Fearfon, 20th Regt. Mr. Gunfon.
Capt. jofeph Fifli. Mr. Grammar.
Wm. Fellows, Efq;

H.
 A Lift of Subscribers.
H.
Lieut. Gen. Hawlcy.
Earl of Home.
Gen. Hopfon.
Lord Charles Hay.
Col. Howard.
Col. Hodgfon.
Lord Howe.
Lieut. Col. Harvey, 6th
Regt. of Dragoons.
Lieut. Col. Haldane, 3d
Regt. of Foot- guards.
Major Hepburn, 6th Regt.
of Dragoons.
Honble Major Howe, 58th
Regt.
Major Shucburgh Hewett.
Capt. Harrington, 2d troop
of Horfe-grenadiers.
Capt. Hotham, ift Regt. of
Foot-guards.
Capt. HaL, 3d Ditto.
Capt. Hudfon, Ditto.
Capt. Hamilton, Ditto.
Capt. Hufley, Coldftream
Regt.
Capt. Heflie.
Capt. Hargreaves, Brigade
Major, in North-Brittain.
Capt. C. Hamilton, 8th
Regt. of Foot.
Capt. D. Hamilton, 31ft.
Capt. Harvey, 33d.
Matthew Henderfon, Efq;
Lieut. Hartnell, 6th Regt.
of Dragoons.
Lieut. Hamilton, 3 rth Regt.
Lieut. Hayes, 58th.
Cornet Hope, ift Regt. of
Dragoon- guards.
Enfign Howard, ift Regt.
of Foot-guards.
Enfign Hart.
Mr. Hefle.
Col. JefFeryes.
Lieut. Col. Johnfton, Royal
Regt. of Horfe- guards.
Capt. J: Jones, 3dRegt. of
Foot-guards.
Capt. D. Jones, Ditto.
Capt. Jones, ift Ditto.
Capt. Wm. Adolphus John-
fon.
Lieut. Jones, 33d Regt.
Enfign Johnfon, 3d Regt. of
Foot- guards.
Cornet Jones, 10th Regt.
of Dragoons.
Doftor Jackfon, Halifax,
Torkjbire.
Mr. R. Jack.
K.
Col. Kingfley.
Honble. Lieut. Col. Keppel.
Capt. Kellaway, 26th Regt.
Honble. Lieut. Keppel.
Lieut. Kemptie, 58th.
Cornet Knight, 3d Regt. of
Dragoon-guards.
Enfign Kingfley, 3d Regt.
of Foot guards.
Enfign
 A Lift of Subscribers.
Enfign Mitchelburn Knox. Col. Montgomery.
Meflrs. Kincaid and Do- Lieut. Col. Maitland, ift
naldfon, Edinburgh. Regt. of Foot guards.
Lieut. Col. MoncriefF, 26th
L. Regt.
Lieut. Col. Mompeflbn,50th.
Sir John Ligonier. Major Mocher, 2d Troop
Lieut. Col. La-faufille, 8th. of Horfe-grenadiers.
Regt. of Foot. Major Mackay, 5th Regt. of
Lieut. Col. Lambert, ift Foot.
Regt. of Foot-guards. MajorMorgan, ^d.
Lord Geo. Lenox. Major Marriot, 6th Regt.
Capt. Lawley, 3d Regt. of of Dragoons.
Dragoon-guards. Major Marlay.
Capt. Lifter, Coldftream Major Montolieu, 2d Troop
Regt. of Horfe-guards.
Capt. Lee, 12th Regt. MajorM'Dowall, 32d Regt.
Capt. Leland, 58th. Wm. Mills Efq;
Honble. Tho. Leflie. Capt. Milbanke, 3d Regt..
The Revd. Dr.. Lee, of Ha of Dragoon-guards.
lifax, Torkjhire. Capt. M'Donald, Ditto.
The Revd. Mr. Lifter, of Capt. Mordaunt, 10th Regt.
Ditto. of Dragoons.
The Revd. Mr. Lamplugh, Capt. Manlove, ift Regt.
of Cottingley. Foot- guards.
——Le-grand Efq; Capt. Monfon, Ditto.
Samuel Lifter Efq; of Hor- Capt. Mathew, Coldftream
ton. Regt.
—Lifter Efq; of Skipton. Capt. Martin, Ditto.
Lieut. Lane, 18th Regt. Capt. Mollineaux, 3d Regt.
Cornet Legard, 2d. Regt. of of Foot-guards.
Dragoon guards. Capt. Marriot, Marines.
Cornet Lovel, 6th Regt. of Capt. Maxwell, 20th Regt.
Dragoons. Capt. M'Dowall, Ditto.
Sir Kenith Mackenzie, 26th.
M. Capt, Mony- penny, 33d.
Capt. Morris, Ditto.
Duke of Marlborough. Capt. Morris, 55th Regt.
Sir John Mordaunt. Lieut. Manfell, 3d Regt. of
Lord Malpas. Dragoon-guards.
Capt.
 A Lift of Subscribers.
Lieut. Matters, 8th Regt. of Lieut. Col. Geo. Lane Parker
Foot., Ditto.
Lieut. Mar/hall, Ditto. Lieut. Col. Prefton, 20th
Enfign Morrii'on, Ditto. Regt.
Enfign Hugh Mackay. Lieut. Col. Pole, 23d.
Lieut. Col. Pitt, 59th.
N. Major Phillips, 13th.
Major Prefcott, 33d.
Major Gen. Napier. Capt. Pechell, 2d Troop of
Col. Noel, Coldftream Regt. Horfe-grenadiers.
Major Napier. Capt. Pownall, ift Regt. of
Capt. J. Neale, 3d Regt. of Foot- guards.
Foot- guards. Capt. Parr, 20th.
Capt. Wm. Napier, 23d Capt. Prefton, 26th.
Regt. Capt. Pollock, 33d.
Capt. Nuttal, 58th. Capt. Pool, Ditto.
Lord Newbattle. Capt. Phillips, royal artillery.
Enfign Needham, 3d Regt. Jonathan Pytts, Efq;
of Foot-guards. Charles Philli| s Efq;
Enfign Richard Nefbitt. Gilbert Pilkington Efq;
Enfign James Nefbitt. Abraham Prado Efq;
Lieut. Penter, BufFs.
O. Brigadier Pocock, 2d Troop
of Horfe-guards.
Capt. Ogilvie, 3d Regt. of Enfign Pounce,tt, 33d Regt.
Foot-guards.
Capt. Oakes, 51ft Regt.
Capt. Richard Onflow.
Capt. Cooke Otway. Earl of Rothes.
Capt. Jofeph Otway. Col. Rofs.
Enfign Owen, 3d Regt. ©f Col. Robinfon, 3d Regt. of
Foot-guards. Foot-guards.
Mr. Ogilvie. Lieut. Col. Rufane, 24th
Regt.
P. Sir Wm. Ruffcl, ift Regt".
Foot-guards.
Earl of Pembroke. Sir Cecil Ray.
Lieut. Col. Prideaux, 3d Capt. Ramfden, royal Regt.
Regt. of Foot- guards. of Horfe-guards.
Lieur. Col. Pearfon, ift Lord Rutherfoord, Ditto.
Ditto. Cant.
 A Lift of Subscribers.
Capt. Richardfon, ift Regt. Honble. Capt. Hugh Somer-
of Dragoon-guards. ville, Ditto.
Capt. Reynolds, 3d Regt. Capt. Suttee, 6th Regt. of
of Ditto. ' Dragoons.
Capt. Robins , 6th Regt. Capt. Style, ift Regt. of
of Dragoons. Foot-guards.
Capt. Rickfon, 19th Regt. Capt. J. Smith, 3d Ditto.
Capt. Henry Rogers. Capt. F. Smith, Ditto.
Capt. Ridley, 23d Regt. Capt. James Stewart, Secre
Capt. Rayner, 33d. tary to the Commander
Capt. Reynolds, 58th. in chief, in Scotland.
Geo. Rofs Efq; Capt. St. Clair.
Samuel Reynardfon Efq;Or- Capt. Skene, 26th Regt.
mond Street. Brigadier Stephens, 2d troop
Lieut. Tho. Riggs, 26th of Horfe-guards.
Regt. Lieut. Smallman, 2d Regt.
Lieut. James Rolt. of Dragoon -guards.
Enfign Rolt, ift Regt. of Lieut. Thomas Stewart.
Foot-guards. Lieut. Scott, 8 th Regt. of
Enfign Rtade, 8th Regt. of Foot.
Foot. Lieut. Spong, 20th.
Enfign Ruthven, 33d. Cornet Sanger, 3d.
Enfign Roberts, Ditto. Regt. of Dragoon-guards.
Mr. James Rivington. Honble. Cornet Sandys, 6th
Regt. of Dragoons.
Honble. Enfign St. John,
Lord Geo. Sackville. Coldftream Regt.
Lord Stanhope. EnfignStainforth, i8thRegt.
Gen. Stuart. Enfign Strong, 26th.
Lieut. Col. Sandford, ift
Regt. of Foot-guards.
Lieut. Col Sebright, Ditto. Capt. Tryon, ift Regt. of
Honblc. Lieut. Col. Sandys, Foot-guards.
Coldftream Regt. Capt. Thornton, Ditto.
Lieut. Col.. Scott, 3d Regt. Capt.Thornton, Coldftream
of Foot- guards. Regt.
Capt. Sloughter, 2d Troop Capt. Ta(h, 3d Regt. of
of Horfe- guards. Foot-guards.
Honble. Capt. James Somer- Capt. Trollope, 8th Regt.
ville, 2d Regt. of Dra of Foot.
goon-guards. Capt.
 A Lift of Subscribers.
Capt. Templer, 26th. Capt. Wickham, Ditto.
Lieut. Turton, Royal Regt. Capt. Whitfhed, 3d Regt.
of Horfe-guards. of Foot-guards.
Lieut. Tufnall, Ditto. Capt. Wynward, Ditto.
Lieut. Tench, nth Regt. Capt. Wilkinfon, 8th Regt.
of Foot. of Foot.
Mr. Taylor, Agent. Hon. Capt.Weft,58thRegt.
Cornet Travell, 2d Regt. of Capt. James Webb.
Dragoon-guards. Capt. White, 34th Regt.
EnfignTownfliend, iftRegt. Capt. Wheatland, ad troop
of Foot-guards. of Horfe-guards.
Enfign F. Twifleton, 3d Capt. John Walker.
Regt.r Ditto. Lieut. Warrender , Roval
Enfign F. Twifleton, Ditto. Regt. of Horfe-guards.
Lieut. Waller, 3d Regt. of
u. Dragoon guards.
Lieut. Col. Urmflon, ifl Lieut. Wade, Ditto.
Regt. of Foot-guards. Lieut. Warren, 8th Regt. of
Lieut. Veffeil, 3d Regt. of Foot.
Dragoon-guards. Lieut. Webb, 33d.
Cornet Wogan, 3d Regt. of
W. Dragoon guards.
Lord Weymouth Adjutant Webfter, 6th Regt.
, Lieut. Gea. Wolfe. of Dragoons.
Col. Whitmore. Cornet Walpole, Ditto.
Col. Watfon. Enfign Wollafton, ift Regt.
Col. Wolfe. of Foot-guards.
Honble. Lieut. Col. Weft, Enfign Walker, Ditto.
ift troop of Horfe-guards.Enfign Warburton.
Lieut. Col. Wade, 3d Regt. Enfign Wyatt, 8th Regt. of
' of Dragoon-guards. Foot.
Lieut. Col. Winn, 1 ft Regt. Wm. Windham, Efq;
of Foot- guards. Richd. Whitworth Efq;
Lieut. Col. Wilkinfon, 57th Mr. Walker, Crovj-neJi%
Regt. Halifax.
Capt. Winde, ift Regt. of Mr.- Winn, Ditto.
Dragoons.
Capt. Whitmore, 6th Ditto. Y.
Capt. Wilfon, ift Regt. of Hon. Col. York.
Foot-guards.
THE
 THE

CONTENTS.
Regulations for the Horfe.
PART I.
CH A P I. Of the jirength of a regiment
of Horfe. ... pagc x
Chap II. The manner of forming and fizing a
regiment of Horfe, and of pofting the Of
ficers, and non-commiffioned Officers. 3
Chap III. In what order a regiment of horfe
is to march off its ground at a review 9
Chap IV. Of marching and wheeling by divi-
Jions, or fquadrons. 13
Chap V. Offaffing in review. * ♦ 15

PART II.
The exercife on Horfeback. - » 20

PART III.
Chap. I. Ofperforming the exercife on foot. 32
Chap. II. Of the manual exercife of the
Horfe. - 41
PART IV.
Chap. I. Regiments of horfe at a review, or
at the opening of a campaign, to be always
complete. •» - - 49
b Chap. II.
 The Contents.
Chap. II. The form of lodging the kettle drums,
andjlandards. - - - gz
Chap. III. Containing direclions for teaching
the exercife on horfeback, and on foot, in
the mofl eafy and expeditious method, £s?
bringing a regiment into order, without any
unneceffary fatigue. - - 55

Regulations for the Dragoons.

PART I.
Chap. I. Of the firength of a regiment of
Dragoons. - - - 61

PART III.
Chap. I. How the Officers are to take their
pofts in the rear of the regiment, when the
manual exercife is to be performed. - 64
Chap. II. General obfervations concerning the
manual exercife. - - - 67
Chap. III. The manual exercife of the Dra
goons, with an explanation. 71
Chap. IV. How the Officers are to take their
pqfis again, in the front of the regiments 84

PART IV.
Chap. I. General obfervations concerning the
firings of the Dragoons. - - - 86
Chap. 11. The manner of forming a regiment
of Dragoons for firing. - - 93
Chap. 111. The manner of performing the
firings Handing, advancing, and re
treating. - - - $5
Chap. IV
 The Contents;
C h a p v I V . Of Parapet firing. - ioi
Chap. V. Of faffing in review. - 104.
Chap. VI. How the Officers are to give the
word of command through the firings - 107

P A R T V.
Ch a p I. Regiments of Dragoons at a reviewy
or at the opening of a campaign, to be al
ways complete. - - - 112

Regulations for the Huffars.

PARTI.
Chap. I. Of the flrength of a regiment of
Huffars. - - - 113
Chap. II. 'The manner of performing, and
ftzing a regiment of Huffars in fquadrons. 1 17
Chap. III. Concerning the review of a regi
ment of Huffars, and their exercife on horfe-
back. - - - - 121
Chap. IV. The exercife on foot at a review 131
Chap. V. Manner of performing the firings. 132
Chap. VI. Of paffing in review - 136
Ch a p . VII. Of the particular duties on which
Huffars are to be employed. - - . 1 38
Chap. VIII. Of marching and wheeling. 139
Chap. IX. Of Aclion. 141

b 2 Regu-
 The • - Contents.
* . *

Regulations for the Cavalry in general.

PART V.
Of Field-Daty.
Chap. I. Of the decampment and march of
an army. - 144.
Ch a p. II. Of an army's march into a new en
campment. - - - 153
Chap. III. Of the encampment of an army. 158
Chap. IV. Of fiandard and rear guards. 163
Chap. V. Of pojling and relieving fentries. 169
Chap. VI. What compliments are due from
guards to General ana Field Officers. - 175
Chap. VII. Of Gener aU Officer's guards, and
orderly duties. - - - 179
Chap VIII. Method ofgiving out the Parole. 1 8 2
Chap. IX. Of the Picquet guard, together
with fome direiiions, to be obferved after the
retreat - - - - 185
Chap. X. Duty of the Generals of the day-
ar.d of Brigade Generals, and the method of
giving in the returns. - 188
Chap. XI. Of the performance of divine fervice
in the army - - - 192
Chap. XII. General directions to be obferved,
when the line turns out. - - 194
Chap. XIII. Of exercifing the troops. - 195
Chap. XlV. How Officers, and foldiers are to
apply for leave of abfence - 196
Chap. XV. Of foraging parties. - - 198
Chap. XVI. Of grand-guards, outpqfls, and
parties. - - - 201
Chap.
 The Contents.
Chap. XVII. Directions for the conducl of
Officers on grand guards, outpofts, and
parties, in cafe of an attack. - 207
Chap. XVIil. 'The manner of cantoning a re-
giment on a march, and of pofiing the ne-
ceffary guards for its fecurity. - 214
Chap. XIX. Orders relating to ailion. - 219
Chap. XX. Direclions for the care, and pre -
fervation of the horfes, in time of war. 223
Chap. XXI. InftruSlions concerning the bag
gage on a march. - - 225
Chap. XXII. Of Field Equipages. - 227
Chap. XXIII. Direclions to General Officers,
for the keeping of their tables in camp. 229
Chap. XXIV. Containing infirutlions for the
management of the baggage in general, as
well on a march, as on all other occafions. 230
Chap. XXV. Of Sutlers. - - 236
Chap. XXVI. Ihe number of fervants al
lowed by the King in time of war. - 237
Cpap. XXVII. 0) camp-utenfils. - 238
Chap. XXVIII. Confifiing of direclions for
the care of thefick, and the prefervation of
the foldiery in general. - - 239
Chap. XXIX. Concerning the march of an
army. ... _ 242
Chap. XXX. Further obfervations, & inf-
truclions, concerning foraging-parties. 243
Chap. XXXI. Further direclions to be ob-
ferved by the grand guard. - - 244
Chap. XXXII. Of Convoys. - 246
Chap. XXXIII. Of Pamies. - 250
Chap. XXXI V. Of Ambufcades. - 252
Chap. XXXV. Of out-parties. .- t 254
Chap.
 The C.ON TENT s.
Chap. XXXVI. Of night marches. 256
Chap. XXXVII. Of making a retreat. 258
Chap. XXXVIII. Of faffing a bridge, or
fhort defile, in the prefence of an enemy. 259
Chap. XXXIX. Of paffing caufe ways, or
large defiles, where there is any danger of
being obflrucled by an Enemy. - ditto

PART VI.
Of Garrifon-Duty.
Chap. I. Of divine worfhip in Garrifon. 261
Chap. II. General rules for the conducl of
Commandants in garrifons. - - 263
Chap. HI. Of the authority of Governors,
and Commandants. : - 264
Chap. IV. The ufual guards in garrifons, and
their manner of mounting. - 26 J
Chap. V. Of the difmounting of guards. 274
Chap. VI. Of relieving (entries, with direc
tions how they are to behave on their pofis. 277
Chap. VII. Inftruclions to officers on guard. 284
Chap. VIII. Of giving out the Parole. 288
Chap. IX. Of opening andJhutting the gates. 290
Chap. X. Of rounds and patroles. - 292
Chap. XI. Direclions to be obferved in a
Garrifon, in cafe offire. - - 300
Chap. XII. Of military honours. - 303
Chap. XIII. Of punifhments and executions. 307
Chap. XIV. of ^e burial of Officers, non-
commiffioned Officers, &? private men. - 313
Chap. XV. Regiments to be always in readi-
nefs to take the field at 1 2 days notice. - 317
Chap.
 The Contents.
Chap. XVI. The ceremony of nailing on, and
/wearing to the new flandards. - 318
Chap. XVII. Of the choke of Surgeons, the
care of the fuk in garrifon, and the prejer-
vation of the Soldiery in general. - 321
Chap XVIII. Infiruclions concerning the care
and management of the Horfes. - 325

PART VII.
Chap. I. Of the march of a troop, fquadron,
or regiment. - - - 332
Chap. II. Of the march-routes of troops, fqua-
drons, or regiments. - - 334
Chap. III. Of'fubfifting horfe, or dragoons on
a march. - - - 335
Chap. IV. Of preventing irregularities in
night- quarters, and on a martb. - 33%

PART VIII.
Chap. I. Of Subordination - 341
Chap. II. Of examinations, and Courts-martial. 346
Chap. III. Directions for preferving good difci-
pline amcngft the Soldiers. - - 350
Chap. IV. How the vacancies of Officers are
to be fupplied. - - - '355
Chap. V. Of Recruiting. - - 358
Chap. VI. Of Defertion. - - - 363
Chap. VII. Of Returns, and Reports. - 366
Chap. VIII. Of Duelling. - - 369
Chap. IX. Of Difcharges. - - 372
Chap. X. Of leave of abfence, and Furloughs. 373
Chap.
 The Contents.
Chap. XI. Of the marriage of Officers, non-
commiffioned Officers, and private Soldiers. 376
Chap. Xu Of reviewing troops, or fquadrons 378
Chap. XIII. Ofthe regulation of prices, weights
and meafures. - - - 379
Chap. XIV. Of Ammunition. - - 381

PART IX.
'the monthly pay of a regiment of horfe, dra-
„ goons, and Hujfars. - - - 382
Chap. I. Of fmall mounting. - * 385
Chap. II. Of paying the private Men. - 387
Chap. III. Of the Arms. - - - 388
Chap. IV. Of the Officers Clothing. - 391
Chap. V. Of the clothing of non-commiffioned
Officers, Trumpeters, Hautboys, Drummers,
and private-men - - 393
Chap. VI. Of cajiing and recruiting Horfes. 401
Chap. VII. Of preferving ckanlinefs and de
cency amongfl Soldiers. - - 403
Chap. VII. Of preferving thefe regulations
with care and fecrecy. - - 406
Conclufion. - - - 407

<g

REGU-
 (I)

REG ULATIONS
FOR THE

HORSE
PART I.

CHAP. I.
EV E RY Regiment is compofed of five Squa
drons, divided into ten Troops, and con
tains the following numbers of commiflioned
Officers, non -commiflioned Officers, inferior StafF-
Officers, and private Men.

A Prin-
2 Regulations
General, or Colonel
Principal \
Staff-Officers! j
Lieutenant- Colonel
Major . . . . .
•Yi 3

2 Adjutants . .
i Quarter- matter ,
i Chaplain • .
i Solicitor . .
i Surgeon . .
Inferior 5 Mates . . . 26
Staff-Officers i Riding-mafler
i Trumpet- major
i Kettle-drummer
io Farriers . .
I Sadler . . .
i Provoft

9 Captains , including two

Captain- Lieutenants
Commiffibn'd io Lieutenants, including the 1 29
Officers Adjutants, who rank as I
fuch
•io Cornets

Non-commd r 6 Non-commiffioned Offi- "%

Officers and 3 cers pr. Troop . . 6o > 70
Trumpeters \ i Trumpeter pr. Troop ioj

66 Men pr. Troop . . 66o

Private 6 Supernumeraries pr. 720
Troop . . . 6o
Effectives Total 8+8
The eldeft Adjutant, the Trumpet-major, the
Kettle drummer, and all belonging to the inferior
Staff, are appointed to the Colonel's Troop : the
youngeft Adjutant to the Major's Troop.
The
 for the H o R s e. 3
The fix Supernumeraries to every Troop, be
ing only defigned to keep the Regiment com
plete, are never to march under arms, but when
any of the men fall fick, in which cafe they muft
fupply their places.

CHAP. II.

The manner of forming, and fizing

a Regiment, and of pofting the Of
ficers and Non-commifTioned Offi
cers.
Article 1.
WHENa Troop is to affemble at the Cap
tain's quarters, and the horfes are quar
tered feparately about amongft the burghers, the
men whofe horfes lie in the fame ftable, are to
march thither together : but if the whole ftand in
one ftable, the non-commiflioned Officers are to
march from thence in the front by twos, and the
men to follow in the fame order, till they arrive
at the Captain's quarters, where the Quartermafter
calls over the Roll ; after which the Captain rides
along the ranks, completes the files, tells off the
Troop in four divifions, and pofts the Officers
and non-commiflioned Officers.
N. B. Proper intervals muft be always left for the
non-commiflioned Officers ; and the Captains muft
take particular care that the ranks are very well dref-
fed, and that the men cover exactly their File-,
A % leaders,
4 Regulations
leaders , on which account they are required to
know , in what manner to give the aid to their
horfes, in order to clofe occafionally either to the
right or left.

Art. 2. As foon as the Colonel's Squadron is

formed at his quarters, a Cornet and four non-
commiflioned Officers are to difmount, and fetch
the Kettle-drums and Standards ; the Standard-
bearers muft therefore affemble early at the head
quarters, in order to be at hand in proper time
upon this occafion : When the Kertle-drums and
Standards are brought to the Troop, the com
manding Officer gives the word to the men to
draw their fwords, and the Trumpets found a
march ; all the Standards belonging to the Regi
ment march in the front of the firft divifion of
the Colonel's Troop.
* N. B. After the- Troops are formed before their re-
fpeftive Captains' quarters, they march always to the
Officer's quarters, who is to command the Squadron,
there to form in Squadron.
In a Garrifon, in which there is one," or more Squa
drons, they muft always march out to exercife,. by
Squadrons.

Art. 3. The Troops are to draw up according

to the feveral ranks of their refpective Captains,
and every Squadron muft be commanded by a
Field Officer, if the number of Field- Officers in
the Regiment be fufficient ; if not, the eldefl Cap
tain takes the command of the fifth Squadron.
0
* As the Dragoon-Regiments are never divided intoTroops,.
but always formed in Squadrons, this N.B.. is therefore
omitted in their Regulations.
N. B. The
 for the H o R s e. . 5
; B. The eldeft Troop in every Squadron takes
upon the right, and the youngeft upon the left,
bepting the Squadron upon the left flank of the
teg iment, in which the eldeft Troop takes poft upon
Be left, and the youngeft upon the right.

4. Squadrons always form three deep

the taileft men and horfes are ported in the fro/
rankj, the next in fize in the center, and
fhorteft in the rear ; and, as it is his Majejp's
plcafure that, for the future, the horfes fhalJjShoc
be exchanged, but that every man fhall keep' that
which he is accuftomed to, and can manage, fo
he will not require the ranks to be very exactly
fized, nor even mind although a fmall horfe
fhould happen to ftand in the front rank, becaufe
the men are to take poft on horfeback, where
they fize on foot; the commanding Officers muft
therefore diftribute the recruit-horles, where they
will fize as well as poflible, talcing care never
theless to difpofe of the bell to thofe who take the
moft care of them.
Art. 5. Every Field-Officer, both at Reviews,
and other publick occafions.is to remain with his
own Squadron : On field-days the Commandant
of the Regiment muft be attentive to the be
haviour of the whole, and the commanding Offi
cers of Squadrons to. that of their feveral Squa
drons, and fee that every, thing is performed with
the greateft exactnefs : The Officers, who lead
Divifions, are, in like manner, to take care that
they march in regular order, and are frequently
•f This N. B. is alfo omitted in the Dragaon-Rfgulationi ,
for the fame realbn as the preceding.
A 3 to

V
\ f
\
6 Regulations
to call out to them to keep their files clofed, and
to preferve their proper diftances $ they muft be
alfo careful that they caft their eyes conftantly to
the right, fit erect in their faddles, don't talk, or
make the leaft noife, and that the rear-ranks al
ways keep up, and cover well.
Art. 6. When a Regiment is formed in Squa
drons, the diftance* of twelve paces, as a common
interval, is to be always left between them ; but
at a Review, his Majefty will determine that by
order: The Officers commanding Squadrons muft,
above all things, be careful to form with great
celerity, and, during the courfe of the whole Exer-
cife, to preferve their given diftances : On field-
days, Regiments may allow themfelves intervals of
twenty paces, on account of performing the evo
lution of difperfing, but at a Review, they are
always limited by , a particular order from his
Majefty.
N. B. The commanding Officers muft take care, that
their front-rank keeps boot-top to boot-top, and that
the rear-ranks cover well their file-leaders.

Art. 7. The Officers pofted in the front, are

to keep clofe before the horfes, excepting thofe
who command Squadrons, who are to be a horfe's
length advanced before the center. The Officers
are pofted in the following manner :
The commanding Officer of the Squadron, to
gether with the youngeft Cornet, at the head
of the firft Divifion ;
The Captain at the head of the third, and the
eldeft Lieutenant in the rear ;
The
 for ^Horse. 7
The fecond Lieutenant at the head of the fe-
cond, and
The eldeft Cornet at the head of the fourth. %
Art. 8. The twelve non-commiflioned Officers
belonging to every Squadron are polled as fol
lows :
One non-commiffioned Officer upon the right of
the firft Divifion, and he a Quarter-mafter.
One upon the right of the fecond.
One upon the right of the third, and he a
Quarter-mafter.
One upon the right of the fourth;
One upon the left flank in the front-rank.
Two in the rear of the firft Divifion.
One in the rear of the fecond.
One in the rear of the third.
Two in the rear of the fourth.
The twelfth non-commiflioned Officer is the
Standard-bearer.
N. B. The non-commiflioned Officers in the rear of
the Squadron, muft take poft oppofite to the center
of their refpeclive Divifions, a horfe's length from
the rear rank, and drefs to the right.

Art. 9. A Squadron marches in four Divifions,

and every Divifion in eleven files : when a Squa
dron is drawn up on parade, the Standard-bearer
J In a Regiment of Dragoons, the commanding Officer,
together with the Cornet, takes poft at the head of the
firft Divifion ;
the eldeft Lieutenant at the head of the third, and the
fecond Lieutenant in the rear ;
the third Lieutenant at the head of the fecond, and
the fourth Lieutenant at the head of the fourth.
A 4 is
8 Regulations
is to be pofted between the non-commiflioned Of
ficer, and the right-hand Man upon the right
flank of the third Divifion. The interval between
the ranks muft be twelve feet, and large enough
for two men abreaft to ride through : In march
ing off, the Standard-bearer pofts himfelf between
the fifth and fixth man in the front-rank of the
third Divifion, and the center and rear-rank clofe
to the croop.
Art. 10. The * two Trumpeters belonging to
every Squadron take poft on the right of the non-
commiffioned Officer upon the right flank of their
refpective Squadrons, and the Kettle-drummer on
the right of the Trumpeters belonging to the Co
lonel's Squadron, where they are conftantly to re
main on horfeback, during the Exercife, and
muft take care to drefs well with the front-rank.
N. B. The Trumpeters are to perform the wheelings
by Divisions, and Squadrons, together with their
refpedtive Squadrons.■

Art. ii. The three ranks of every Squadron

muft drefs well to the right, and all the Squa
drons in an exact line with the Colonel's Squa
dron.
Art. 12. The Men, when they are on horfe
back, are always to caft their eyes immoveably
to the right over their right fhoulders ; are not to
talk, but to keep a profound filence, and to fit
* In the Dragoons, the three Drummers In every Squadron,
are to take poft, and to perform the wheelings, in the
manner directed for the trumpeters in the horie.
upon
 for the H o r I s. 9
upon their borfes in an upright and graceful pof-
ture, of which the Officers are required to take
particular care.

CHAP. III.

In what order a Regiment of Horfe is

to march off its ground at a Re
view.
Articlt i.
WHEN his Majefty is to fee a Regiment of
Horfe pafs by Him in Review, or other-
wife, at his arrival the Colonel gives the following
word of command to his Squadron :
Draw your Swords! ... 3 motions.
1. Seize the handle of the fword nimbly with
your right hand over your left arm.
2. Draw the fword with a quick motion out
of the fcabbard, and hold it with an outftretched
arm in a perpendicular line before you, and dref-
fed along the rank, with the thumb of your right
hand in a line with your mouth, and the flat of
the blade towards you.
3. Bring the fword brifkly down, placing the
pommel of the hilt upon the right ho'fter, and
hold it dreffed in a ftraight line along the rank,
with the edge of the blade towards your body.
N. B. As foon as the Colonel gives the word to his
Squadron, Draw your /words / the other commanding
Officers of Squadrons are immediately to do the fame,
upon
io Regulations
upon which the Kettle-drummer beats, and all fhc
Trumpeters found.

Art. 2. When the Regiment is to march off,

the Colonel gives the word to the firft Squadron :
Center and rear ranks, move forward to clofe
order !
March !
The commanding Officers of the other Squadrons
muft be attentive to the Colonel , and every one
take care to give the word of command at the
fame time.
N. 6. The Major is not to march in the front of the
firft Squadron, behind the General or Colonel, but
muft remain at the head of his own.

Art. 3. The Squadrons march in the following

fucceffive order :
At the head of the Colonel's Squadron,
the Adjutant ;
the Kettle-drummer ;
* the three Trumpeters ;
the
* In the Dragoons, the Kettle-drummer is followed, in fuc
ceffive order, by
. the Hautboys ;
the Drummers ;
the General, or Colonel, and behind him the Cornet ;
the firft divifion , with one non-commiflioned Officer,
on the right flank, and two in the rear ;
the third Lieutenant at the head of thefecond, with one
non-commiflioned Officer on the right flank , and
one in the rear ;
the firft or Captain-Lieutenant at the head of the third,
with one non-commiflioned Officer on jhe flank, the
Standard-
 for the H o r s e. ii
the General or Colonel, and behind him
the youngeft Cornet \
the firft Divifion, with one Quarter- mafter on
the right flank, and two non-com miflioned
Officers in the rear ;
the fecond Lieutenant, at the head of
the fecond Divifion, with one non-commiflioned
Officer on the right flank, and one in the rear ;
the Captain, at the head of
the third Divifion, with one Quarter-maftcr on
the right flank, the Standard-bearer in the
center of the front-rank, and one non-com
miflioned Officer in the rear ;
the eldeft Cornet, at the head of
the fourth Divifion, with one non-com miflioned
Officer on the right flank, and two in the
rear;
the eldeft Lieutenant in the rear of all.
N. B. In marching by Divifions the leading Officers
muft keep clofe up after one another, and take care
always to preferve their proper intervals, fo as to be
able, whenever the word of command is given, To
the left wheel by Divifions ! to form in Squadron
without lofing ground.
t While the Regiment is on horfeback, the fix Super
numeraries to every Troop, remain on foot in the

Standard-bearer in the center of the front-rank, and

one non-commiflioned Officer in the rear ;
the fourth Lieutenant at the head of the fourth, with
one non-commiflioned Officer on the flank, and two
In the rear;
the fecond Lieutenant in the rear of all.
f In the Dragoons, the twelve Supernumeraries to every'
Squadron, remain on foot in the rear, during the time
the Regiment is on horfeback, and don't make their ap
pearance till it pafles in review by lquadrons on foot.
rear,
12 Regulations
rear, and are not to appear till the Regiment pafles
in Review by Troops on foot.

Art. 4. When there is a defile to pafs, or the

ground becomes fo narrow, that the Squadrons
can't march more than two abreaft, great care
muft be taken that the men move clofe after one
another, that as foon as they have pafled it, they
may inftantly rank up, and recover their former
order.
Art. 5. When a Regiment is marching either
by Divifions, or whole Squadrons, the Squadrons
muft always keep clofe up after one another, and
obferve their diftances, fo as to be able, when the
word of command, To the left wheel by Divifions!
is given, to form the Regiment without lofing
any ground.
N. B. When a Regiment forms in the foregoing man
ner, the commanding Officers of Squadrons muft
take care that, as foon as they have wheeled, they
clofe from the right and left flank to the center.

Art. 6. It is his Majefty's exprefs command,

that all evolutions and movements of the Cavalry
fhall be performed with the utmoft celerity : In
all wheelings, the flank which wheels, muft come
about in full gallop ; and the commanding Offi
cers of Squadrons or Divifions, when they are to
wheel, muft always give the word, Halt ! To the
right (or left) wheel ! the word Halt ! relates only
to the flank which is to ftand faft, and not to
that which is to wheel : When the Squadron or
Divifion is come about, the word- is- given', Halt!
Drefs ! upon which it is once for all to be ob-
ferved,
 for the Horse. 13
ferved, that they are to clofe from right and left
to the center ; as foon as the commanding Officer
fees that his men are drefied, he gives the word,
■March ! and if, during this time , he has loft
his proper diftance, he muft trot brifkly on, till
he has recovered it.

CHAP. IV.
Directions to be obferved in marching
and wheeling by Divisions or Squa
drons.
Article 1.
THE Officers are always to march before the
center of their Divifions, and frequently to
look behind them, in order to prevent the men
from growing carelefs, to keep them filent, and
fee that they march in a regular manner.

Art. 2. The men muft keep a fteady feat upon

their horfes, and have their ftirrups fo fhort, that
when they raife themfelves from the faddle, they
may have their full fift between it and their body,
the reafon thereof being, that they may be able,
when they ftand up in their ftirrups, to make a
larger ftroke : A Trooper on horfeback is always
to project his belly a little, and keep the reft of
his body back ; to hold his bridle fhort, and in a
ftraight line before him ; to caft his eyes conftant-
ly to the right, in order to preferve his rank dref
fed ; to keep his elbows clofe to his body, and not to
move
14 Regulations
move his arms when his horfe trots : In wheeling,
the men are always to caft their eyes to the flank
which wheels, and the Officers muft take care to
make them carry their fwords firm in their hands,
and to keep their files clofed.
Art. 3. When the Squadrons are marching by
Divifions, and have a gate or defile to pafs, they
are to rank off, to march clofe and quick through
it, to rank up nimbly as foon as they have pafled
it, and afterwards to trot brifkly on, and recover
their diftances.
Art. 4. When the Squadrons have marched by
Divifions, and the word of command, Form Squa
drons ! is given, the firft Divifion of every Squa
dron is to incline , upon a trot, fo far to the
right, that the fecond can march up in a direct
line ; but the third and fourth are to incline to
the left, and march up in full gallop.
Art. 5. When the Regiment has marched by
in Squadrons, and the word, Form Divifions ! is
given, the firft and fecond Divifion are to gallop
fo far forwards as to allow room for the third to
draw up in the rear of the fecond, and the fourth
in the rear of the third ; the firft is, at the fame
time, to advance itfelf into the front of the fecond
again ; as foon as the Squadrons are reduced, and
the Divifions have got their proper intervals, they
are to fall into their ordinary pace.

CHAP.
 for the H o R s e. 15

CHAP. V.
Of pafling in Review.
Article 1.
AFTER the Squadrons have marched up to
their ground again, they are to form by
Troops * in the following manner : The com
manding
* As the Dragoons are always formed in Squadrons, it ap
pears neceflary to make the following repetition of a
large part of this Article, in order to render their me
thod of performing the evolution contained in it, dear
to the reader.
The Officers , rion-commiflioned Officers , Kettle-drum
mer, Hautboys, and Drummers having pofted them-
felves in marching order at the head of the firft divi-
' fion of their refpeftive fquadrons, according to Ar
ticle 2. in this Chapter ; the Colonel, or Officer com
manding his fquadron, gives the word,
To Ihe right wheel, and march off byfives f
upon which the front-rank wheels to the right by fives,
or X half-quarter-ranks, excepting the firft half-quar
ter-rank, which is to confift of fix men, and marches
directly forwards ; and as, by its being told off in this
manner, there muft remain three odd men, fo the two
left-hand men of the center-rank are to move up to
their right ; then the next five upon the left of the cen
ter-rank are to follow, and fo on that whole rank ;
and to the two odd men remainining in it, the four on
the right of the rear-rank are to move up ; after which
the reft of that rank are to wheel to the right by fives,
and follow the center-rank.——The other four Squa-
J They ire properly quarter-ranks in the Htrft ; but here, half-quarter-
ranks, becaufe a rank of Dragoons thus formed in fquadrons, confifta
of double the number of one of Horft, in troops.
drons
 16 Regulations
manding Officers of Squadrons give the word of
command,
Form by Troops !
upon which the Officers, non-commiffioned Offi
cers, and Trumpeters poft themfelves at the head
of the firft Divifion of their refpeclive Troops :
The Troops clofe brifkly from the right and left
to their center, every man taking care to cover
his File-leader. *
The marching off" by fives is afterwards per
formed as follows : The Colonel, or Officer com
manding his Troop, gives the word,
To the right wheel, and march off by fives !
upon which the front-rank wheels to the right by
fives, excepting the firft quarter-rank, which is
to confift of fix men, and marches directly for
wards ; and as, by its being told off in this man
ner, there muft remain an odd man, fo the four
left-hand men of the center rank are to move up
to his right ; then the next five upon the left of
the center- rank are to follow, and fo on that
whole rank ; and to the three odd men remaining
in it, the two on the right of the rear- rank are to
move up ; after which, the reft of that rank are
drons are to wheel to the right by fives, when the Co
lonel's fquadron wheels, and to march to the ground
on which it flood, where every Captain gives the word,
Halt ! Front!
upon which the rear-ranks face to the front, but the
front-rank keeps marching on ; He then gives the
word,
To the right 'wheel, and march off by fives!
upon which the fquadron wheels, and marches off in the
manner above directed for die Colonel's.
to
 for the H o R s E. 17
to move up ; after which, the reft of that rank
are to wheel to the right by fives, and follow the
center rank. The other nine Troops are to
wheel to the right by fives, when the Colonel's
Troop wheels, and to march to the ground on
which it flood , where every Captain gives the
word of command,
Halt! Front!
Upon which the rear-ranks face to the front, but
the front-rank keeps marching on : He is then to
give the word,
To the right wheel, and march off by fives !
upon which the Troop wheels, and marches off
in the manner above dire&ed for the Colonel's
Troop.
N. B. Particular care muft be taken, that the quarter-
ranks keep exaftly the diftance of a horfe's length
from each other, that if, during the march, they
fhould be ordered to form, the front-rank may be
able to do it inftantly : The flank-men muft be alfo
careful to cover well their leaders, and not to march
at one time fafter or flower than at another, which
unequal movement would unavoidably produce open
ings or crowdings, but conftantly to keep a fteady,
even pace.

As it is his Majefty's pleafure that the men fhall

take poft on horleback where they fize on foot,
without paying regard to the fizing of the horfes ;
fo is it in like manner unneceflary, that thofe
Troops which compofe the left of every Squadron,
fhould be exactly fized to the left , for which
reafon the Counter-march becomes altogether ule-
B lefs,
18 Regulations
lefs, when the Regiment is to form by Troops,
and march off by fives, becaufe every Troop is
to pars in review before his Majefty on horfeback,
in the order in which they draw up in the Squa
dron on foot.
Art. 2. The Troops f march in the following
order :
i. The Kettle-drummer,
2. The Trumpeter,
3. The Colonel,
4. The Officers in a fingle rank, excepting the
Captain, who is to be half a horfe's length
advanced ,
5. The non-commiflioned Officers in a fingle
rank, with the Standard bearer in the center,
to fuch Troops as have Standards ;
6. The Troop in the order already defcribed.
X N. B. The Colonel's Troop marches with two
Trumpeters, the Trumpet-major being polled to it.

f In the Dragoons, the Squadrons march in the follpwing

order,
1. The Kettle-drummer,
2. The Hautboys,
3. The Drummers,
4. The Colonel, &c. as in the Hor/e.
J This N. B. omitted in the Dragoon-Regulations ; and as
the term, Troop, occurs frequently in this Chapter, it
muft, in general, be underftood to mean, Squadron, as
it relates to the Dragoons.

In
 for the H o r s e. 19
In time of peace the Farriers fhall have no horfes, and
at a Review are to march by on foot in the rear of
the Supernumeraries.

Art. 3. After the Troops have marched by in

this order, and have taken up their former ground,
they muft form in Squadron again, at which time
the Officers and non-commiflioned Officers are to
move into their former pofts.

B2 PART
ao Regulations

PART II.
THE

EXERCISE
on Horfeback.

Article i.
THE front- and center-rank of all Squadrons,
when they are to pafs in Review, are to
fling their Carbines, and to loofen their fword-
knots ; and when they draw their fwords upon the
place of Exercile, or elfewhere, muft faften them
about their wrifts ; on field-days, the Carbines
may remain in the buckets, till they are to be
ufed.

Art. 2. The commanding Officer of the Regi

ment mall always exercile it himfelf, and it is his
Majefty's pofitive order, that the Exercife shall
not be performed by beat of drum.
When
 for the H o r s e. 21
When the commanding Officer has taken his
poft oppofite to the center of the Regiment, he
gives the word,
Take care !
at which f the Officers who command Squadrons,
together with one Lieutenant and one Cornet, poft
themfelves upon the right flank of their refpective
Squadrons ; the Captain together with the other
Lieutenant and Cornet upon the left flank, di
viding themfelves, fo that every one may cover
a rank ; after which the commanding Officer
gives the word,
1 . To the right-about wheel by fours !
The wheeling muft be performed as quick as pof-
fible, after which,
2. As you were 1
upon which the Squadrons come to the right
about as they were by fours.
N. B. The practice of this evolution is kept up, that
the men may know how they are to march into an
Encampment.

The commanding Officer then gives the word,

3. Third andfourth Divi/ion, to the right double
your files !
■f- In the Dragoon- Regulations, at the preceding word of
command, fake care! the Officers who command Squa
drons, together with two Lieutenants, take poft upon
the right flank of their relpe&ive Squadrons ; two Lieu
tenants , and the Cornet alfo take poft upon the left
flank, dividing themfelves, fo as every one to cover
a rank.
B 3 at
22 Regulations
at which the two Divifions rein back to the center
of the interval between the ranks of the firft and
fecond Divifion, and then paflage to the right,
till every man has covered his file-leader, forming
by this movement fix deep.
N. B. In the paflage the men muff, caft their eyes to
the right, keep their files clofed, and double as quick
as poffible.

4. As you were !
at this word of command the two Divifions caft
their eyes to the left, and paflage to the left as
quick as poffible, till they come oppofite to their
former ground, then move up into it, and drefs
in a line again wich the firft and fecond Di
vifion.
5. Firft and fecond Divifion, to the left double
your files !
this is performed as is defcribed in Explanation 4,
the. Divifions taking great care to keep their files
clofed, and to double quick.
6. As you were !
this is performed according to Explanation 3.
N. B. The Standard-bearers clofe always to the Divi
fions which fland fait.
7. Center- and Rear .ranks, move forward t$
clofe order i
8. March !
at this word of command, the Commanders of
Squadrons with three Officers take poft before the
center ; the other two Officers poft themfelves,
one upon the right, and the other upon the left
flank
 for the Horse. 23
flank in the front-rank ; the Standard-bearer reins
back into the center of the center-rank, to cover
the Serjeant on the right of the third Divifion.
After the rear-ranks have clofed, and the Offi
cers taken poft as above, the commanding Offi
cer orders the whole to march forwards ; every
Commander of a Squadron then gives the word,
1 . Whole Squadrony march !
upon which the Squadrons march off their ground
on an eafy trot ; at the diftance of about fifteen
paces, they are to fall into a ftrong trot ; after
wards into a gallop, taking care to keep in clofe
order, and continuing that pace as far as from
ninety to hundred and twenty paces, where they
attack the Enemy.
N. B. The non - commiffioned Officer on the right
flank, muft look well to the four Officers in the
front of the Standard, fo as not to advance too fall,
and every Squadron call their eyes to the right.
When one , or more entire Regiments are marching
together on a trot, the Officers before the Standards
muft alfo take care that their refpeflive Squadrons
are never further advanced in front, than thofe upon
their right.

a. Halt! Brefs!
upon which the whole halt at once , lift them-
felves off the faddle, and, raifing their fwords
high above their heads, make a ftroke, finking
down again at the fame time to their feat.
3. March !
at this word of command, the whole Squadron
difperfes to the front in full gallop, excepting
B 4 the
24 Regulations
the commanding Officer, who, together with the
Standard-bearer and + Trumpeter, ftands fall upon
the right of the ground from which the Squadron
difperfed , and after a few minutes orders the
Trumpeter to found the call, upon which the
men rally inftantly, and draw up in their re-
fpecHve ranks to the left of their Standard, but
are not to regard either their proper Divifions, or
right-hand men, that they may be able to form
the fooner : the Standard-bearer then marches into
the center- rank again, and the Officers take their
former pofts, after which the commanding Offi
cers of Squadrons give the word,
4. Whole Squadron, march !
the Squadrons march forwards, as in Explanation 1,
from fixty to eighty paces, till the following word
of command is given,
5. Halt! Drefs!.
upon which they halt, and perform the fame which
is above direfled in Explanation 2 : after they have
made their ftroke, three files from the right and
left of every Squadron, are to gallop into the
front, and difperfe ; to fire off their piftols ; after
that to retreat, and fall into their ranks upon the
right and left flanks again: The Squadrons, during
the time the flank -files are difperfed in the front,
are to march after them with an even pace, keep
ing their ranks and files well clofed ; and when
they have joined their Squadrons again, the word

+ Drummer, (in the Dragoons) who, after a few mi

nutes, is ordered by the commanding Officer of the
Squadron to bear to-arvis upon which the men rally
initandy, £?V.
Halt !
 for the Horse. 25
Haiti is given, after which the front-rank drop
ping their fwords, advance their Carbines (with
out word of command) make ready, prefent and
fire, making it a running fire, to do which pro
perly, the commanding Officer muft give a fignal
to the flank-man, when to fire ; and every man
after him, is to take it from the right, and as
foon as he has fired, drop his Carbine.
N. B. This is performed ftanding ; the center- and
rear - rank have their fwords drawn, and the four
men in the rear of the Officers in the center are not
to fire. t

6. March!
upon which the Squadrons trot forwards again,
the front-rank, with their fwords hanging over
their wrifts, draw their right piftols, (without
word of command) make ready, prefent with an
outftretched arm, and wait for the fire from the
flank-man, as before in the Carbine-firing : Af
terwards, they draw their left piftols, performing
the fame as before with the right ; after they have
difcharged their piftols, they recover their fwords,
and trot forwards from thirty to fifty paces, till
the following word of command is given.
N. B. All this is to be performed on a trot, never-
thelefs the ranks and files muft keep clofed and dref-
fed in a ftraight line.

7. Halt! Drefs!
upon which the directions given in Explanation 2
are to be obferved.

8. Rank
26 Regulations
S. Rank and fizel
the Men take their pofts in their proper Divifions
and Files, and the Officers and Standard-bearers
march alfo to theirs.
After the attack is thus over, and the Squa
drons are formed according to the foregoing Ex
planation, the Colonel, or commanding Officer of
the Regiment gives the word,
8. Return your Swords !
10. Difmount !
the rear- rank rein brifkly back to former diftance,
and the whole return their Carbines, difmount
as quick as poflible, link their horfes without
waiting perceptibly for one another, unftrap their
Carbines, and, mouldering them, march into the
front together.
The horfes are not to be linked as formerly
from both flanks to the center, but every man ties
the reins of his bridle to thofe of his right hand
man by a running knot, about a fpan's length
from the bit.
•f- When the Men are difmounted, the horfes
linked, and the Carbines fhouldered, the firft and
fecond Squadron are to incline to the left, the
fourth and fifch to the right from their horfes, and
march (without word of command) with a brifk
pace towards the center of the Regiment, where
they are to join the third ; the firft and fecond
Divifion from the third Squadron march out,
f In the Regulations for the Dragoons, the remainder of
this Article is omitted in this place, and as much of it
as relates to them hereafter inlerted, in the firil Article
of Part III.
from
 for the Horse. 27
from the right flank, the third and fourth from
the left, and form as quick as poflible in the front
of their own horfes ; and the whole Regiment
muft clofe fo as to leave no intervals between the
Squadrons : Double diftance is to be left between
the files, and the Squadrons told off in two Di
visions : The non - commiffioned Officers who
took poft upon the flanks of Troops, fall into
the Divifions, and the fupernumerary ones into the
rear of thofe Divifions to which they had been
appointed on horfeback.
N. B. When the Squadrons difmount , their 'horfes
muft be taken care of by Burghers, or Country
men. \

Art. 3. His' Majefty ftriftly charges all Offi

cers commanding Regiments of Horfe, to employ
themfelves totally in the training up, and forming
of their men, who are required to be as experc
and agile on horfeback as the Huflars, to be com
plete mafters of their horfes, and able to manage
their fwords with great dexterity : they muft like-
wife be taught to underftand, that- the firings
which are performed at Exercife, are not to be
made ufe of in fervice, till after they have cut
off" the firft and.fecond line of their Enemy fword
in hand, in order to add ftill more by that re-
ferve to their confufion and diforder : They are
alio to be informed , that the reafon why they
practife the evolution of difperjing at their exer-
cifes, is, becaufe that it is almoft impoffible for a
Squadron, which charges the Enemy, to force its
way through them fo effe&ually in an entire body,
but that fome part of it will be always broken ;
whenever therefore chat Ihall happen , and the
Trum
28 Regulations
Trumpeter founds the call, they will be more ready
from the force of cuftom to join their Standard,
and recover their order.
N. B. Every commanding Officer of a Squadron, as
foon as he has made his attack, mud:, if neceflary,
order his Trumpeter to found the call, in order to
collect his Squadron, and put himfelf in a condition
to fall upon the fecond line of the Enemy, or other-
wife to adt, as opportunity may offer, and circum-
ftances require.

Art. 4. His Majefty does not doubt, but that

every Officer who commands a Squadron, as his
honour, reputation and life are dependant there
upon, has it in the beft order ; and , what is
moreover effentially necefTary, can rely upon his
men ; that he likewife does every thing becoming
an ambitious and brave Officer, to keep his infe
rior Officers, as well as the non commiffioned Of
ficers and Private Men, to their duty ; and takes
care, that fubordination be ftrictly complied with ;
that no man prefumes to open his mouth, while
the commanding Officer is fpeaking ; and, in ge
neral , that every thing pertaining to his Squa
dron , is preferved in fuch condition , that the
commanding Officer may reft allured, that an en
tire fubmiffion and obedience will be paid to him,
as well in the face of an Enemy, as at the place
of Exercife : in (hort, that his men are conftantly
kept in as good order, as it is poffible for the belt
Cavalry in the world to be.

AN
 for the Horse. 29

A N

APPENDIX
TO THE

Exercise on Horfeback.
WH E.N Regiments exercife on field-days,
they mull perform the wheelings by
whole Squadrons ; muft -alfo march off
their ground to the left, and from three ranks
form two, for which the following word of com
mand is given :
From three ranks form two !
to perform this, the rear-rank muft firft be told
off in four quarter ranks ; at the foregoing word
of command, the two quarter - ranks upon the
right flank wheel to the right, and the two quar
ter-ranks upon the left flank to the left ; after
which the right quarter- rank of the right flank
wheels to the left, and the left quarter- rank of
the left flank, to the right ; as foon as thefe two
quarter-ranks have paffed the flank- men of the
center rank, the other two quarter-ranks wheel
in the fame manner, and all the four quarter-
ranks doling up thus to the right and left flanks
of the front and center-rank, confequently form
two
30 Regulations
two deep : The whole is to be performed on a
trot, and care taken that all the quarter-ranks take
up their ground on the right and left of their
proper ranks together.
N. B. If the interval between the ranks is not fuffi-
cient for the rear rank to wheel up, it muft fall back
a little.

Rear-rank, as you were !

upon which the two quarter-ranks upon the right
wheel to the right-about, and the two upon the
left, to the left about, and march to the line on
which they before flood, where the two quarter-
ranks from the right wheel to the right, and the
two quarter- ranks from the left, to the left, and
march towards each other till they come to their
ground, where they wheel up to the right and left
with an even front, and form the rear-rank ; all
which muft be performed together, and on a
trot.
Every commanding Officer is at liberty, to
pra&ife any other ufeful Manoeuvres, in order
to improve his Regiment as much as poflible ;
amongft others, when the Regiment is marching
in full trot, he can make them, on that pace,
wheel to the right and left-about a few times by
whole Squadrons ; in doing which, great care muft
be taken, that the ranks and files keep clofed ;
that they wheel about with great exactnefs and
celerity, and yet preferve their order: After every
wheel, the Squadrons fhould trot forwards a little,
before they wheel again.
The following Evolution may be alfo practifed,
for which the word of command is given,
Second
 for the H o R s e." 31
Second Troop, march !
upon which the fecond Troop, namely the third
and fourth Divifion of a Squadron, marches twen
ty paces forwards, and at that diftance wheels to
the right-about to face directly the firft Troop ;
after which the two Troops difcharge firft their
piftols,at each other, and then their Carbines ;
when the firft Troop fires their Carbines, the fe
cond , which is advanced in the front, having
their fwords already drawn, muft in full troc
march by the right of the firft into the rear, there
wheel to the right, move up to their former
ground, and form in Squadron again.
N. B. The Officers, as well as the Men , muft be
well informed, that thefe firings on horfeback are not
pradtifed, in order to be ufed againft an Enemy, but
only to teach the horfes to Hand fire.

PART
32 Regulations

PART III.

CHAP. I.
The manner of performing the Exer-
cife on foot.
Article i.
WHEN the Squadrons, with their Carbines
mouldered, have clofed from right and
left to the Center-Squadron , the com
manding Officer gives the following words of
command,
i . 'Take care !
2. Prefent your arms !
. 3. Level your Carbines !
4. Prime and load!
N. B. Particular care muft be take'n, that the men
are firft taught, and afterwards, upon all occafions,
accuftomed to 'load quick.

5. The Regiment is to charge two deep ! Rear-

rank double your ranks !
6. March!
7. Center-rank clofe to the front !
8. March!
N.B. At
 A

■ lu

I
INGS b
 for the H o r s e. 33
N. B. At the word March ! the Captains fall in upon
the flanks of their Troops, and the fupernumerary
Officers into the rear of their Squadrons : The Field-
Officers ftand fail upon the flanks of their Squadrons :
The Standard-bearers march into the center-rank,
and cover the Officer who commands the third Divi-
fion of their refpedtive Squadrons : The commanding
Officer remains on horfeback, oppofite to the cen
ter of the Regiment, and gives the word :

9. Prepare to charge by half-fquadrons ftanding ;

the right flank begins !
N. B. At this word of command, the Officers who
command half-lquadrons ftep out two paces, and
face to the left, excepting the Captain upon the left
flank, who faces to the right.

10. Charge !
upon which the Captain upon the right of the Ge
neral's Squadron begins the fire ; and when he
gives the word,
Prejent !
The Captain commanding the tenth Troop gives
the word,
Make ready !
When the firft Troop fires, the tenth prefents and
fires.
When the tenth Troop prefents, the fecond makes
ready.
When the tenth Troop fires, the fecond prefents
and fires.
When the fecond Troop prefents, the ninth makes
ready.
C When
34 Regulations
When the fecond Troop fires, the ninth prefents
and fires , and fo on , continuing the fire from
right and left to the center, till the whole have fired
two rounds : The Officers commanding Troops
taking great care that they fire in fucceffive and
regular order, and without any longer interval of
time between each fire, than while they can give
the two words of command, Prefent ! Fire ! ne-
verthelefs in fuch a manner as to avoid all confu-
fion, and fo that five Troops may always ftand
loaded, which can be done with more cafe, in
firing thus by ten Troops, than by eight Platoons,
as performed by the Infantry.
N. B. The front-rank is not to come down.

Art. 2. After the firings by half-fquadrons

are finifhed , the commanding Officer gives the,
word,
1 1 . Prepare to charge by whole Squadrons ftand
ing, the right flank begins !
upon which the Captains who command Squa
drons, and the Officer who leads the fifth Squa
dron ftep out again two paces forwards.
12. Charge!
The Captain commanding the General's Squadron
then gives the word,
Squadron !
Make ready !
Prefent !
Fire !
When the firfi: Squadron prefents, the Captain
commanding the fifth gives the word, Squadron !
When
 [To face p. 34./]

THE FIRINGS
B Y

WHOLE SQ.UADRONS, Standing.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Squadron ! |
Make ready! |
Prefent ! 1 Squadron !
Fire 1 | | | | Make ready!
| Squadron ! | Prefent !
| Make ready! | | Fire !
| Prefent ! | Squadron !
| Fire ! I Make ready! |
| Squadron ! | Prefent !
| | Make ready! | Fire !
Squadron ! ) 1 Prefent ! 1
Make ready! | | Fire !
Prefent ! | Squadron !
Fire ! | | Make ready!
| Squadron ! | | Prefent !
| Make ready! | | Fire !
| Prefent ! | Squadron ! |
| Fire ! | Make ready! |
| Squadron ! | Prefent !
| Make ready! | Fire !
I | Prefent ! | |
| Fire ! | t

,
y
 Jor the H o r s e. 35
When the firft Squadron fires, the fifth makes
ready, prefents and fires.
When the fifth Squadron prefents, the Captain
commanding the fecond gives the word, Squadron !
When the fifth Squadron fires, the fecond makes
ready, prefents and fires ; and fo on, the fourth
and laftly the third Squadron.
When the third Squadron prefents, the firft be-'
gins again, and the firings are continued in the
manner they were before by half-fquadrons, ex
cepting that, as there are now only five fires,
the Officers are to take longer time between each
word of command, fo that three, or at leaft two
Squadrons may always ftand fhouldered.

Art. 3. After the Regiment has fired two rounds

by whole Squadrons, the commanding Officer
gives the word,
13. Prepare to perform the Parapet-firing !
14. Charge !
N. B. At the thirteenth word of command, the Of
ficers, who command in the Parapet-firing, fall into
the ranks , and at the word, Charge ! they fpring
two paces forwards, and make three files always ad
vance and fire, in the manner it is performed by the
Infantry, till they have fired two rounds.

Art. 4. After the parapet-firing is over, the

commanding Officer gives the word,
15. Center-rank open backwards to former
difiance !
1 6. March !
N. B. At this word of command, the Officers and
Standard-bearers ftep out into the front again.
C 2 1 j. Rear
36 Regulations
17. Rear-rank to the right-about !
18. March!
19. Halt!
20. Front!
21. Brefs!
When the whole ftand drefled and fteady, the
commanding Officer gives the word,
22. Take care !
23. To the right form by Troops !
24. March!
upon which the Officers, non-commiffioned Offi
cers and Trumpeters poll themfelves in the front of
the firft Divifion of their refpective Troops, and
the Standard-bearers in the center of the non-
commiffioned Officers : The Troops muft be al
ways fized to the right, with the talleft men in
the front-rank, the next in fize in the center, and
the fhorteft in the rear.

Art. 5. "When the whole is in proper order, the

commanding Officer gives the word,
45. Halt!
26. Front ! '
after which He marches to the head of his own
Troop.
When his Majefty has reviewed the Troops»
•and they are to march off, the General or Colonel
gives the word to his Troop :
1. Take care !
2. Reft your Carbines !
3. Shoulder your Carbines I
4. Cert
 for the Horse. 37
4. Center- and rear-rank clofe to the front.!
5. March!
6. To the right wheel by Divifions!
7. March !
The Officers commanding the other Troops, muft
be attentive to the General, or Colonel, and take
care to give the word of command at the fame
time : The Trumpeters found a March.
N. B. At the word of command, to wheel to the right
by Divifions , the firft Divifion of the General's
Troop fiands faft : The rear-ranks of the other Di
vifions clofe to the front in their wheeling, and are
to perform it with as much exadtnefs and regularity
as the Infantry poflibly can.

When a Divifion is to wheel in marching, the

Officer gives the word, Halt! upon which the
rear-ranks clofe up brifkly to the front, and the
front-rank keeps moving their feet only ; He
then gives the word, Wheel! upon which the
three ranks wheel together, taking care to keep
an even ftep, to march flow, and carry their arms
well ; as foon as the Divifion has wheeled, He
gives the word, Halt! Drefs ! upon which all
the three ranks ftand faft at once, and drefs them-
felves ; the Officer then gives the word, March !
and lifts up his left foot, the front-rank ftepping
off with the fame, at the fame time.
When the Officer, in wheeling to the right by
Divifions, gives the word of command , Halt !
To the right wheel ! the three ranks muft caft their
eyes to the left ; and after they have wheeled, and
the word, Halt! is given, immediately to the
right again.
i'C 3 Art. 6.
38 Regulations
Art. 6. The Regiment marches in the following
order ; in the front of all
the inferior Staff- Officers ;
the Surgeons ;
the Kettle- drummer on horfeback ;
the Trumpet-major, together with the Trum
peter belonging to the Troop ;
the General, or Colonel, and behind Him
the Captain ; behind the Captain
the Cornet ;
the non - commiffioned Officers , with the
Standard-bearer, in a fingle rank ;
the General's Troop, in four Divifions, all fized
to the right ;
.the fix Supernumeraries, and behind them
the Farrier.
N. B. The firft and fourth Divifion march off by
fixes, and the fecond and third by fives : All the other
Troops march in the rear of the General's ; and the
Recruits are to have green branches ftuck in their
hats, to diftinguiih them.

Art. 7. The Officers, when they are on foot,

are to hold their fwords in both hands, clofe againft
their body, keeping the point in a line with their
left fhoulder , and ftretching their right arm as
low down as they can without conftraint ; when
on horfeback^ they are to carry their fwords in
the manner before defcribed for the men.
N. B. The non-commiffioned Officers are to carry
their fwords , on horfeback and on foot , like the
Officers.

Art. 8.
 for the H o r s e. 39
Art. 8, The Officers perform their falute at
four motions : . '
1. Bring the fword with an outftretched arm
juft below the breaft in a perpendicular line.
2. Drop the point with a very quick motion.
3. Bring back the fword to the pofition N°. 1.
4. Bring the fword down upon the holfter
again, if on horfeback ; if on foot, bring it to
the pofition above defcribed in Art. 7.
N. B. The Officers are not to begin faluting, till they
come within three paces of the perfon they are to
falute, counting four between each motion, excepting
the fecond and third, between which they are to take
double time.
The Standard-bearers on foot, are to perform the fame
motions with the Standards, and to falute, as the
Colour- bearers do in the Infantry.

Art. 9. The Officers, when they are at their

pofts on foot in the front of their Squadron, or
Regiment, muft keep their eyes conftantly caft
to the right, their feet in a line, with the interval
of a fmall pace only between them, their knees
ftiff, and their front even ; muft ftand quite fteady,
drefs in a ftraight rank to the right, and divide
equally their diftances.
N. B. Thefe directions are alfo to be obferved by the
non-commiffioned Officers and private men.

Art. 10. When the Troops have paffed by in

Review, they are to march up to their former
gtound again in regular order, taking care ne-
verthelefs to leave greater intervals between the
C 4 Squa
4» Regulations
Squadrons, fo that every Squadron may come
exactly oppofite to their own horfes.

Art. 1 1. Every Troop, as foon as it has taken

up its ground, draws out and forms the Recruits,
together with the Trumpeter, and fuch new non-
commiflioned Officers as have not yet pafled in
Review : Afterwards, when the laft Troop has
pafled by, the General, or Colonel, pofts himfelf
at the head of the Recruits, and leads them on ;
behind him marches the Captain, followed by the
new non commiffioned Officers, the Trumpeter,
and the Recruits in one Divifion, fized in their
ranks, as they ftand in the Troop.
N. B. The Recruits belonging to the laft Troops, as
foon as they have paffed by in Review, are ordered,
during their marching up to their ground, to fall
out, and join thofe of the General's Troop , that
the whple may follow in • regular and fucceflive
order.

Art. 12. After the Recruits have been reviewed,

the Captains march to their Troops, make them
fhoulder theirCarbines, and the Recruits and non-
commiffioned Officers fall into their ranks again.

CHAP.
 for the H o r s e. 41

CHAP. II.

w HEN a Regiment exercifes on foot on a

field-day, the following part of the Ma
nual Exercife is to be performed.

1 . Reft your Carbines ! . . 3 motions.

1. Seize the Carbine with the right hand under
the cock, and turn the lock outwards.
2. BringuptheCarbinewith a very quick motion
from your moulder with the right hand, and feize
it with the left juft above the lock, fo that the
little finger may reft upon the fpring , and the
thumb lie upon the ftock oppofite to your eyes.
3. Keep the right footfaft,and let the Carbine fall
•with a ftrong motion on the left arm, which mult
be raifed a little from the body, that the Carbine
may lie Hoping over the elbow ; the right arm
muft hang in a ftraight line down the body, and
the right hand grafp the Carbine behind the cock;
the left, with outftretched fingers, muft lie clofe
to the fpring, fo that the Carbine may reft between
the thumb and the fore-finger.

2. Shoulder your Carbines / . . 2 motions.

1. Bring up the Carbine to a perpendicular line
before the left fhoulder with your right hand, and
feize it at the butt-end with your left, placing
the thumb and two fore-fingers above the butt,
and the two laft fingers under it.
1. Bring
42 Regulations
2. Bring the Carbine with a brifk motion upon
your left fhoulder, preffing the guard againft the
cuirafs, at the fame time throw back your right
hand, and let it hang with outftretched fingers
down the right fide ; the left arm muft be a little
bent, to raife the Carbine fo high that the laft loop
may but juft appear above the fhoulder ' from
behind.
3. Order your Carbines! . . 6 motions.
1. Seize the Carbine under the cock with your
right hand, turning the lock outwards.
2. Come to your poife, in the manner directed
in the fecond motion of Explanation 1.
3. Reft the Carbine, as in the third motion of
Explanation 1.
4. Bring the Carbine brifkly to your right
fhoulder, with the right arm ftretched out, and
keeping your right hand with clofed fingers under
the cock, at the fame time grafp the Carbine
againft the hollow of your right fhoulder with
your left.
5. Keep your left hand faft , and with your
right feize the Carbine near the muzzle, with the
thumb running along the barrel.
6. Plant the butt-end with a quick and ftrong
motion upon the ground clofe by your right foot
with your right hand, and at the fame time throw
back your left.
4. Ground your Carbines ! . . 4 motions.
1 . Face to the right upon your heels , and at
the fame time turn the Carbine fo that the cock
may
 for the Horse. 43
may point to the rear, and the flat of the butt-
end lie againft the infide of your foot.
2. Step directly forward with your left foot,
and lay the Carbine upon the ground, your left
hand hanging down by your lett foot, and your
right foot kept faft with the butt- end againft it.
3. Raife yourfelf up again nimbly, bringing
back your left foot to its former pofition, and
keep your body faced to the right.
4. Face again to the left upon your heels, and
come to your proper front, letting your hands
hang down without motion.
5. Take up your Carbines ! . . 4 motions. •
1. Face to the right upon your heels.
2. Sink your body down, and come to the
pofition defcribed in grounding.
3. Raife up yourfelf and Carbine, and at the
fame time flip up your right hand as high as the
muzzle.
4. Face to the left, and come to your proper
front, holding your Carbine in the fame pofition
as is dire&ed in Explanation 3.

6. Shoulder your Carbines ! . . 5 motions.

1. Slip your right hand as far down the barret
as you can without conftraint.
2. Raife the Carbine high up in a perpendicular
line from the ground wich your right hand, and
feize it with your left above the fpring.
3. Bring the Carbine down to your Reft.
4. Bring the Carbine before your left fhoulder
to the pofition defcribed in the firft motion of Ex
planation 2.
5. Place
44 Regulations
5. Place the Carbine on your flioulder in the
manner directed in the fecond motion of Expla-
notion 2.
7. Secure your Carbines ! . . 5 motions.
The three firft motions bring you to your Reft
as in Explanation 1.
4. Bring the Carbine oppofite to your left fide,
turning the guard towards your body, with your
right hand kept under the cock, and your left
over the fpring.
5. Bring down the Carbine with a brifk mo
tion under your left arm, and, throwing back
your right hand, let it hang down your right fide ;
taking care to drefs in the rank with the Carbine,
and to hold the muzzle at an equal diftance from
the ground.
8. Shoulder your Carbines ! . . 4 motions.
1. Seize the Carbine with your right hand, in
the manner before explained.
2. Come to your Reft at one motion, according
to-Explanation 1.
At the two remaining motions come to your
moulder, as is directed in Expl. 2.
9. Tour Carbines high in your right arms !
5 motions.
The three firft motions bring you to your Reft,
as defcribed in Expl. 1.
4. Shift your right hand untier the cock in fuch
a manner , that the four fingers may lie under
the cock, and the thumb over the guard ; at the
fame time flip up your left hand as high as the
fwivel
 for the H o r s e. 45
fwivel of your fling, and bring the Carbine with
a ftrong motion againft your right fhoulder.
5. Throw back your left hand, letting it hang
down by your fword, and hold the Carbine right
up and down in your right hand.
10. Shoulder your Carbines ! . . 4 motions.
1. Clap your left hand ftrong upon the fling-
fwivel againft the hollow of your right flioulder.
?.. Bring the Carbine at one motion on your
left arm, placing your right hand with clofed fin
gers behind the cock, and the little finger of your
left againft the fpring, as in your Reft.
4 and 5. Come to your flioulder in the man
ner directed in Expl. 2.
11. Club your Carbines 1 . . 6 motions.
1, 2 and 3. Reft your Carbine in the manner
before directed.
4. Caft about the Carbine with a brifk motion, fo
that the butt-end may be upwards, the guard even,
with your eyes, and the lock outwards ; the left
hand remaining, as before, againft the fpring,
only turned , but the right placed below it, with
the thumb lying on the ftock.
5. Keep your right hand in the fame pofition,
and raife the Carbine till the lock comes in a line
with your hat, at the fame time feize it with your
left near the muzzle, letting your left arm hang
as low down as you can reach without conftraint,
and keeping your right, with a fquared elbow, a
fpan's diftance from your breaft.
6. Bringdown the Carbine with a quick motion on
your flioulder, and throw back your right hand.
12. Shoulder
46 Regulations
12. Shoulder your Carbines ! . . 5 motions."
1. Place your right hand in its former pofi-
tion on the Carbine, and raife it from your moul
der, holding it in a perpendicular line at a fpan's
diftance from you, and the lock even with your
hat.
2. Sink the Carbine with your right hand till the
guard comes oppofite to your mouth, at the fame
time quitting your left, place it above your right,
with the little finger refting againft the fpring.
3. Turn the Carbine at one motion, bringing
down the butt-end, and come to your Reft.
4 and 5. Thefe two motions are performed in
the manner before explained.
13. Face to the right! . . 2 motions.
1. Face to the right upon both heels, keeping
the right foot faft before the left, after you have
faced.
2. Raife your right foot, and fet it down with
a ftrong motion, by your left.
14. As you were ! . . . 2 motions.
1. Face to the left again on both heels, keep
ing the right foot faft behind the left, after you
have faced.
2 Lift up the right foot, and plant it ftrong
by the left.
15. Face to the left! ... 2 motions.
This is performed at two motions as in the
foregoing Explanation.
16. As
 for the H o r s s. 47
1 6. As you were t • . .2 motions.
Thefe two motions are performed according to
Explanation 13.
17. Face to the right-about1. . 3 motions.
1. Step back with the right Foot, placing the
hollow of it in a ftraight line behind the left
heel.
2. Face to the right-about on both heels.
3. Raife the right foot, and plant it with a
ftrong motion by your left.
18. To the left-about as you were ! 3 motions.
1. Step out a little with your right foot, placing
the heel in a direct line before the hollow of
your left.
2. Face to the left-about on both heels.
3. Raife your right foot, and plant it ftrong
by your left again.
19. Face to the left about ! . . 3 motions.
Thefe three motions are performed, as directed
in the foregoing Explanation.

20. To the right-about as you were! 3 motions.

This is performed at three motions, according
to Explanation 1 7.

It
48 Regulations

JT is his Majefty's ftrict command, that the

Cavalry fhall perform every part of their foot-
exercife with the utmoft exa&nefs , and above
all things care mull be taken, that they are
taught to load quick ; yet the Officers, as well
as the non - commiffioned Officers and private
Soldiers, are at the fame time to underlland, that
the firings, which they perform on foot, are never
intended to be made ufe of in real fervice, other-
wife than when they are in cantonments, or on
out-pofts, and happen to be attacked in fuch fi-
tuations by a fmall body of the Enemy, that the
Guard may be able to keep them off by their
fire, till the whole have gained time to faddle,
and to march out on horfeback to difperfe them.

PART

1
 for the Hors e. 49

PART IV.

CHAP. I.
Regiments at a Review, and in the
beginning of a Campaign to be al
ways complete.
Article 1.
AT Reviews in time of Peace, and in the
beginning of a Campaign . in time of war,
every Regiment, and confequently every
Troop, fhall be always complete under arms, in
Officers, non-commiffioned Officers, and private
Men, nor fhall any Colonel fuffer a deficiency in
his Regiment of either man or horfe on pain of
being cafhiered.
N. B. During the months of Exercife, Regiments are
always to march out complete to the Rendezvous ; if
any Troop therefore mould have more than fix men
fick, it muli borrow as many as are wanting from the
Supernumeraries belonging to another ; and the Ge
nerals, or commanding Officers of Regiments, fhall
be aniwerable that their reipeiSHve Troops and Re
giments, when they exercife alone, are always com
plete under arms. ,

D Art. 2.
co Regulations
Art. 2. At a Review, and in the beginning of
a Campaign, every Troop muft be compofed of
the following Numbers :
3 Commiffioned Officers ;
6 Non- commiffioned Officers ;
i Trumpeter ;
66 Private Men ;
i Farrier ;
74 Horfes.
Thus every Regiment under arms will con£e«
quently have,
32 Commiffioned Officers, including the two
Adjutants, one of which is appointed to
the General's Troop, and the other to the
Major's ;
60 Non-commiffioned Officers ;
10 Trumpeters ;
660 Private Men ;
10 Farriers ;
740 Horfes.
N. B. The Trumpet- major and Kettle-drammer are
alfo appointed to the General's Troop.

'Art. 3. The Men are required to be in perfect

health, and in the beft order, nor muft any In
valids, or fuch as become incapable of doing their
duty, be fuffered to continue in a Regiment, for
which the Colonel mall be anfwerable ; neither
fhall
 Jor the H o R s f. W
/hall any be entertained under the age of 25 yean,
but fuch only as are grown to maturity, and of
robuft and vigorous conftitutions.

The Horfes are alfo to be conftantly preferved

in fit condition for fervice ; and the Colonei shall
be, in like manner, refponfible , that he keeps
none in the Regiment, which are any ways dis
tempered.

Art. 4. The fick men, and fuch as are wounded,

or otherwife incapable of performing their exer-
cife , fhall , provided they are able , march out
without arms with the Supernumeraries ; but thofc
who are too fick to go abroad, muft be left be
hind in their quarters.
N. B. If a Regiment ftiould happen to be fickly at
the time of a Review, it is his Majefly's will, not-
withftanding, that it fhall be complete in m.n and
horfes, becaufe in time of peace men can never be
wanting to fupply any fuch deficiency.

Art. 5. When one Troop has more fick men

than another, and, although it marches out to the
place of Exercife complete, neverthelefs has not
66 who are able to perform their Exercife , be
caufe the fick muft be excufed ; in that cafe, the
Regiment muft be completed from all the fuper
numeraries, and it is not very material, although
a Troop fhould even have none, provided the
Regiment is formed, and 60 men appear without
arms in their ftead : But as foon as the Regiment
has marched by in review, and is formed again,
every Troop muft have its own men, both under
D 2 arms,
$2 Regulations
arms , and without arms , becaufe the fick are
then to fall into their refpective Troops.

Art. 6. No new non-com miffioned Officer mall

be appointed in the room of any other who is
fick , unlefs he fhould not recover before the
Review.

CHAP. II.
The form of lodging the Kettle-drums,
and Standards.
Article i.
AFTER the Recruits have paffed in review,
the Colonel gives the word of command to
the whole Regiment :
To the right-about !
and after the Regiment has faced about,
March !
upon which the whole ftep off together, and march
with a brifk pace to their horfes, the firft and fe-
cond Squadron inclining to the left, and the fourth
and fifth to the right : When the third Squadron
comes within about fix paces off the front rank
of horfes , the center- and rear- rank break, the
firft and fecond Divifion of which marches in by
the
 for the Horse. . 53
the right flank of the Squadron, and the third and
fourth by the left : When the whole have marched
to their horfes, they are to ftand faft, facing to
wards them , till the Colonel, gives the following
word of command :
Mount !
at which the men unlink their horfes as quick as
polfible , return their Carbines , mount nimbly
without waiting perceptibly for one another, and
drefs their ranks ; after which they are to put on
their gloves : The Colonel then gives the word of
command,
Draw your Swords/
after which a Cornet from every Squadron brings
his Standard to the head of the General's Squa
dron, and then returns to his refpective poll
again.
N. B. The Trumpeters belonging to every Squadron
are to march with the Standards to the General's
Squadron.

Art. 2. The form of march to be obferved in

lodging the Standards, is as follows :
1. The Kettle-drummer.
a. The eleven Trumpeters in two ranks.
3. The Captain, and behind him one Cornet.
4. The Standard-bearers with the Standards in
a Angle rank.
D 3 5. The
54 Regulations
£. The General's Squadron told off in four Di-
vifions, as ufual.
"When the Standards march by the King, they are
to falute.
N. B. If the place of Exercife is not far diftant from the
Colonel's quarteis, the Trumpets are to continue
founding till the Standards arrive there, after which
the Captain orders the men to return their fwords,
and march to their ftables : The other Squadrons,
after the Standards are brought to the General's Squa
dron, return their fwords, and march in regular or
der in the rear of the General's Squadron into quar
ters, when they are difmifled in order to put their
horfes into the ftables, and take off the faddles, after
which the proper Guard is to affemble at the com
manding Officer's quarters.

A Sentry muft be immediately pofted over the Stan

dards by the General's Squadron , till the Guard
mounts.

CHAP.
 for ^Horse. SS

CHAP. III.
Containing directions for teaching the
Exercife on horfeback, and on foot,
in the moft eafy and expeditious
method, and bringing a Regiment
into order without any unnecefTary
fatigue.
Article I.
IT is his Majefty's drict command, that all
Regiments fhall be kept in good order, not
only during the time of Exercife , but through
out the whole year; and that they remain always
quite complete, and in proper condition to march,
whenfoever they fhall receive fuch orders.
Art. 2. The Field - Officers muft oblige the
Captains and Subalterns to attend their Troops
diligently, and above all things to keep them un
der the ftricteft fubordination, taking care that
all orders are executed with the utmoft punctuali
ty ; and likewife that the men make themfelves
mailers of their horfes, ride in an upright and
graceful pofition, fix their ftirrups according to^
the directions before given, and hold their bridles
fhort.
N. B. Every man (hall be at liberty to break his own
horfe, and to exercife him as he pleafes.
D 4 Art. 3.
$6 Regulations
Art. 3. Great care muft be taken, as well on
horfeback as on foot, that the men don't talk, or
make the leaft noiie ; and on horfeback particu
larly, that they don't play with their bridles, or
kick one another with their ftirrups, but always
keep a profound filence, and ride in a regular and
foldier-like manner.

Art. 4. Men who have been long abfent from

their Troops, either on furloughs, or on account
of ficknefs , muft be again regularly inftructed
from the beginning in every part of their Exercife.

Art. 5. When a fubaltern Officer neglects his

duty, or the care of his Troop, his Captain muft
report him to the head-quarters, and the com
manding Officer is to give him a fevere repri
mand ; neverthelefs the Captains, and commanding
Officers are themfelves to take all poffible pains
in keeping their refpective Squadrons in proper
order, and their Subalterns are only required to
be affifting to them.

Art. 6. When Officers become incorrigible,

they muft be reported to his Majefty : When non-
commiffioned Officers likewife, who are Gentle
men, don't attend fufficiently to their duty, they
mall forfeit all future pretenfions to a commif-
iion ; and all other non-commiffioned Officers
ihall in like manner be kept with the utmoft fe-
verity to an exact and diligent performance of
their duty.

Art. 7. Officers and non-commiflioned Officers

muft always be alert on their guards, muft keep
their
 for AHorse. 57
their men in good order, make them perform
every thing in a regular manner at the reliefs, and
inftruit their fentries how they are to behave on
their pofts : When any Officer or non-commif-
fioned Officer is negligent herein, he muft be fe-
verely puniihed.

Art. 8. Recruits, after they are appointed to

Troops, are in the firft place to be exercifed on
foot, and taught how to march, to carry the head
and body gracefully, to caft their eyes always to
the right in marching ftraight forwards, but in
wheeling, to the flank which wheels, in order to
fee that their ranks keep quite even and drefTed :
After they are perfected in marching on foot, they
muft be taught to ride, and particular care taken
that they acquire a good feat, arid hold their
bridles in fuch a manner as to have the entire
command of their horfes ; that they keep their
arms clofe to their bodies , and fit firm in the
faddle, fo as not to gall the backs of their horfes
by too much motion : When the Recruits have
rid for fome time with ftirrups, and are able to
manage their horfes at pleafure, either upon a
trot or gallop, they muft be brought to ride with
out faddle, in order to gain a ftill fteadier feat,
and to become as complete horfemen without it,
as the beft riding mafter upon a demi-peak :
When the Recruits are brought to this degree of
skill, they muft be taught to fire on horfeback with
their Carbines, in doing which it muft be obferved,
that they are to prefent over the left ear of the
horfe, and to level rather too low than too high,
left their charge fhould be thrown away in the
air ;
58 Regulations
air ; they muft be likewife taught to fire after the
fame method with their piftols.

Art. 9. The Recruits are further to be in-

ftructed, in what manner to draw their fwords, in
what pofition to hold them, and how to return
them ; and muft be taught to underftand, as is
before expreffed in the beginning of thefe Regula
tions, that the principal advantage of the Cavalry
confifts in charging fword in hand ; and alfo that
when a man raii'es himfelf up in his faddle, and
makes a full ftroke from above, it falls with double
the force of one, which is made fitting ftill : More
over they muft be inftrufted to hold their fwords
conftantly in fuch a pofition, as to be able toftrike
with the edge, and never with the flat.
N. B. In order to bring the Recruits to a fkilful life
of their fwords , the Officers muft have paft-board
images made, and erected to reprefent an enemy,
which they are at full fpeed to cut at ; whereby it
is once more to be obferved, that they are always to
raife themfelves in their ftirrups, when they make
their ftroke : Afterwards, when a Recruit is rendered
perfect in this part of the Exercife, he muft be taken
into the ranks, and learn the evolutions, as above
explained, from fome of the oM foldiers.

Art. 10. The men muft be exercifed in riding

every day in the week, during both the fummer
and winter, unlefs when the ground is fo flippery
in the latter feafon, that riding would be dan
gerous. '
Art. 11. During the time of exercifing in the
fpring of the year, the exercife fhall be performed
five times on horfeback every week, and once on
foot :
 for the H o r s x. 59
foot: On Sunday-evenings likewife, and on the
foot-exercife-day, the horfes are to be rid out
once.
Art. 12. It is his Majefty's principal intention,
that the men fhould imbibe a ftrong affection for
their horfes, the Officers muft therefore fee, that
they take great care of them, and are inftrucled in
the knowledge of every thing, which may tend to
their prefervation : They muft be alfo taught by
the Regimental Saddler, how to ftuff their faddles,
and to fit them properly to their horfes backs, that
whenfoever any alterations become neceflary on a
tnarch , they may be able themfelves to make
them , and their horfes not be expofed to any
injury.
Art. 13. His Majefty ftriclly orders the com
manding Officers of Regiments to take care, that
their men are taught to faddle their horfes quick :
When a Regiment lies in a town, or in canton
ments, and to-arms is founded, the whole Regi
ment, without a fingle perfon wanting, muft be
affembled, and formed before the gate in the fpace
of twenty minutes.
When a Regiment is encamped, and to boot and
faddy is founded, or orders are given to mount, the
whole Regiment muft be formed in Squadron on
the parade in 12 minutes.
■ N. B. The horfes are not, either at their Review, or
on any other occafion, to have their manes platted,
or their tails bound up.

Art. 14. Recruits muft be always quartered

with good veteran foldiers, in order to learn from
them
to Regulations
them how to faddle their horfes, to curry and rub
them down , and every thing elfe relating to the
care of them : The old men mull alfo teach them
to be ceconomifts , and contribute as much as
poffible to make them complete foldiers.
N. B. Recruits muft be alfo. taught how to link their
horfes when they difmount, which is to be done
according to the directions above given ; namely,
every man links his horfe with his reins to the reins
of his right-hand man , without waiting one for
mother.
Art. 15. The Officers themfelves muft teach
the Recruits their foot-exercife, taking particular
care that they load quick and level well , that
whenfoever they fhall happen to be attacked in
cantonments, they may be able to make a good
defence.

REGU-
 (6i )

REGULATIONS
FOR THE

DRAGOONS.

PART I.

CHAP. I.
A Regiment of Dragoons confifting of * five
Squadrons, contains the following num
bers of Officers , non-commiflioned Offi
cers, and private Men.
■ * A Regiment of ten Squadrons contains double the
number of Officers, non-commiflioned Officers, Drum
mers, and private Men, which are fpecified in the
following detail.
Princi
 62 Regulations
N'.of
. . .
Princi
fiGeneral, or Colonel JPerfons.

-Officers.
Staff 1 x Lieutenant-Colonel
Major .... 3

Adjutants . .
Quarter-mafter
Chaplain .' .
Solicitor . .
Surgeon
Inferior Mates . . ..
StaffOfficers. Riding-mafter 2+
i Kettle-drummer
4* Hautboys . .
i Saddler
5 Farriers
I Provoft •/

4 Captains, including two

Captain- Lieutenants
Commiffioned 20 Lieutenants , including
Officers. the two Adjutants, who 29
rank as fuch . . .
5 Cornets ....

12 Non-commtffioned Offi-"
Non-commif-
fleers pr. Squadron 6o|
floned Officers,
and Drummers.
I 3 Drummers pr. Squa
dron .... 15
132 Dragoons pr. Squa
75

dron .... 660 1

12 Supernumeraries pr. 720
Squadron . . . 60.
Effectives Total 851
The
 for the D r a g o o n si 63
The eldeft Adjutant, the Kettle-drummer, the
four Hautboys, and all belonging to the inferior
Staff, are appointed to the Colonel's Squadron 5
the youngeft Adjutant to the Major's Squadron.
The twelve Supernumeraries per Squadron, be
ing only defigned to keep the Regiment complete,
are never to march under arms, but when any of
the men fall fick, in which cafe they muft fupply
their places.
* rl *
*

^3? The remainder of this Part, and Part

the fecond of the Dragoon- Regulations, being
literally the fame as Part the firft and fe
cond of the Horfe, exclufive of thofe few va
riations, which have been taken notice of in
their proper places, I fhall therefore, in or
der to avoid repetition, beg leave to refer the
Reader to them, and proceed to Part the
third.

PART
 64 Regulations

PART III.
THE

Manual Exercife.
-T

CHAP. I.
How the Officers are to take their
. Pofts in the rear of the Regiment,
when the Manual Exercife is to be
performed.
Article i.
AS foon as the Dragoons are difmounted,the
horfes linked , the bayonets fixed , and
firelocks fhouldered , the firft and fecond
Squadron are to incline to the left, the fourth and
fifth to the right from their horfes , and march
(without word of command) with a brilk pace
towards the center of the Regiment, where they
are to join the third ; the firft and fecond Divifion
of the third Squadron march out from the right
flank , the third and fourth from the left , and
form
 for ^Dragoons.' 65
form as quick as poflible in the front of their own
horfes ; and the whole Regiment muft clofe in
fuch manner as to leave no intervals between the
Squadrons.
The Squadrons are to be told off in Platoons ;
and when they march from their horfes, the non-
commiffioned Officers are to fall in ; the Officers,
and Standard-bearers are to remain in their re-
fpective Squadrons.
N. B. A Regiment of ten Squadrons, is to be formed
in two battalions ; the firft in the front of the horfes
of the third Squadron ; and the fecond, in the front
of thofe of the eighth ; in which fituation they are
to remain during the Manual Exercife, and the
Firings.

Art. 2. When the Regiment is thus formed

with mouldered arms, and fixed bayonets, in the
front, the commanding Officer gives the fol
lowing caution :
lake care to perform your Exercife !
upon which the Drummers belonging to the third
Squadron run into the front, and port themfelves
behind the commanding Officer, oppofite to the
center : The other Drummers run to the right and
left flank, where they draw up three deep, and
drefs with the Regiment.
Art. 3. As foon as the Drummers have pofted
themfelves, the commanding Officer orders a
Ihort ruffle, at which the Officers, non-commif-
fioned Officers, Standard-bearers, Hautboys, and
Drummers* face to the right-about, and march,
E without .
64 R E G U L A T J 9 N S,
without further notice from the drum, into the
rear of the Regiment.
The Major alfo rides into the rear, and pofts
himfelf on the right flank, in a line with the
Officers.
The Officers, together with the Standard-
bearers and Hautboys, in taking their pofts of
exercife in the rear, are to march after one an
other through the intervals where the non-com-
miffioned Officers in the front-rank ftood.
The Officers, and non commiffioned Officers
are always to carry their fwords firm in both hands,
with the flats towards the front.

Art. 4. As foon as the Officers, non-commif-

fioned Officers, Standard-bearers, and Hautboys
have marched into the rear, and halted in ftraight
ranks, the commanding Officer orders a fecond
ruffle, at which they all come to the left-abbut to
their proper front, and the Standard-bearers or
der the ftandards.
N. B. ' The non-commiflioned Officers who form the
fourth rank in the rear of the Regiment, muft ftand
faft ; and the Standard-bearers, Hautboys, and Drum
mers are to drefs in a line : TheOfficers are to draw
up eight feet in the rear of the non-commiffioned
Officers,and the Kettle- drummers to remain on horfe-
back, on the right flank. j
■ , At the fecond ruffle, the flank-men fiep out twenty-
four paces in the front : If the Regiment confifts of
ten Squadrons, one flank-man fteps out from the
right of the firft Battalion, and one from the left of.
the fecond.

. . N. B. In
 for the Dr a g o o n s. 6j
N. B. In a Regiment of ten Squadrons, formed as
above in two Battalions, the Colonel gives the word
of command to one, and the Lieutenant- Colonel
to the other.

CHAP. II.
General Obfervations concerning the
Manual Exercife. ;
Article i.
IT is neceflary in the firft place, that every
man, under arms, fhould afiiime a good air,
hold his head and body unconftrained, keep his
feet in a proper pofition, and draw in his belly.
Art. 2. In order, to have the Exercife per
formed well, it is, in a particular manner, re-
quifite, that the ranks and files fhould firft be
even ; the Men are therefore to be taught to
make it an inviolable rule, as foon as they handle
their arms, always todrefs themfelves to the right,
and to cover well their leaders.
Art. 3. If the Men have lines drawn, they are
to toe them ; but, without lines, they muft caft
their eyes to the right, and drefs accordingly.
Art, 4. Great care muft be taken, that the
Men carry their arms well ; for which reafon,
they muft firft be diligently taught, and in-
E a formed,
68 Regulations
■ •

Formed, that they are to keep them fteady and

even upon their fhoulders ; the upper part not too
dole to their head, nor the butt- end too far from
their body, with three fingers placed above, and
two under it ; their arms almoft ftretched out,
but unconllrained ; the barrels outwards, and the
guards preffed againft their body, in a firm and
fteady pofition.

Art. 5. That the firelocks, when mouldered,

may be exactly drefled in rank and file, the Men
muft keep their bodies upright, and in full front;
and not have one fhoulder too forward, or the
other too backward.
Art. 6. The dillances between the files muft
be equal, and not greater than from arm to arm,
and that the Men have juft room to perform the-
motions ; for the future therefore, they are not
allowed to be fo large as before.

Art. 7. The firft thing to be taken care of in

the difciplining of Men, is, for the Officers to
exercife, and drefs them properly on foot, till
they afiume the air of a Soldier, and get rid of
the clown.
Art. 8. In the performance of the Manual
Exercife, the Men muft wait well between the
motions, and do them together* counting ten
between every one.
Art. 9. Every motion muft be performed as
quick and immediate as poflible after the flank-
men
 for the D r a g o o n s." 69
men begin it, who are to make the motions
nimbly, but very large.
Art. 10. The Men muft do every motion with
life, and come down with a ftrong flap upon
their firelocks or pouches, in that part of the
Exercife, where thofe motions are required ; in
planting their feet likewife, they are firft to lift
their legs well up always, and then fet to them
down hard and together.
Art. 11. The Men muft be as quick as pof-
fible, in the performance of all facings ; muft
keep their knees ftiff, and plant their feet, whe
ther forwards or backwards, brifkly and fhort ;
muft carry their arms alfo firm, and quite fteady
upon their Ihoulders.
Art, 12. The Men muft keep their ranks and
files exactly drefled, during the whole Exercife,
and never move their left heels.
Art. 13. At every word of command, and in
all the motions, the Men muft drefs with their
arms in rank and file ; muft carry them at an
equal height and diftance from their bodies, and
always hold them fteady, and without motion \
in the pofition of the potfe* muft place their left
hand clofe to the feather-fpring, and in a direct
line with their eyes.
Art. 14. No Soldier fhall move his head under
arms, and during the Exercife ; much lefs pre-
E 3 fume
jo Regulations
fume to look forwards, to the left, or backwards ;
but muft caft his eyes conftantly to the right.

Art. 15. A Soldier muft perform his Exercife

with a good grace ; is not to tremble, grunt,
bend his knees, lean either forwards or back
wards, or hang down his head ; but conftantly to
ftand upright and fteady, and to do all his mo
tions with great fpirit.

' Art. 16. The men's legs muft be a large hand's

breadth diftant from each other, in the per
formance of every motion, and word of command,
excepting when they ftand mouldered, in which
pofition, their heels muft be clofed together, and
their toes turned outwards.

" Art 17. The right hand muft hang motion-

Jefs down the right fide of the body, and no man
ftir a finger.

s CHAP.
 for the Dragoons. 71

CHAP. III.

The Manual Exercife, with an Ex

planation. . ..
TH E commanding Officer gives the word of
command,
Take care to perform the Manual Exerafet with
out word of command ! ' .
upon which the orderly Drummer beats a long
ruffle, and the Regiment performs the Manual
Exercife according to the following words of com
mand, beginning immediately after the ruffle.
■ 1. Join your right hands to your Firelocks !
1 motion.
Seize the Firelock with your right hand, and
turn the lock outward, keeping the Firelock in
the fame fituation as before.
2. Poife your Firelocks! '. . '. 1 motion.
Bring up the Firelock with a quick motion
From your fhoulder, and feize it with the left
hand, juft above the lock, fo that the little finger
may reft upon the fpring, and the thumb lie
upon the ftock : The Firelock muft not be held
too far from your body, and your left hand muft
be of an equal height with your eyes.
E 4 3- Cock
j2 Regulations
3. Cock your Firelocks ! . . 2 motions.
1. Turn the barrel oppofite to your face, and
place your thumb upon the cock, your fore-finger
before the tricker, and your other three fingers
under the guard, raifing your right elbow fquarc
at this motion.
2. Cock your Firelock, by drawing your el
bow down at the fame time, keeping your thumb
upon the cock, and your forefinger before the
tricker.
4. Prefent ! ~. . . . .1 motion. .
Step brifkly back with your right foot behind
your left heel,and bring the butt-end, in prefenting,
even with your fhoulder, finking the muzzle a
little, and levelling in a line to the right.
5. Fire ! + .....: . 1 motion.
Draw the tricker brifkly back, then bring the
Firelock down to the right fide, holding it firm
and fteady againft your body, and in a level above
the waift-belt, and, at the fame time, feize the
cock with your right hand.
6. Half-cock your Fireloc\s ! . .'. 1 motion.
Half:bend the cock brifkly, with a draw-back
of your elbow.
7■. Handle your Cartridges ! . . amotions.
1. Bring your hand, with a fhort round to your
pouch, flapping ic hard, and take hold of your
Cartridge.
2. Bring
 for /^Dragoons, 73
2. Bring the ' Cartridge, with a quick motion,
a hand's breadth diftance from your mouth with
your right hand.
8. Open your Cartridges ! . . 2 motions.
1. Bring the Cartridge nimbly to your mouth,
and bite the top well off.
2. Bring it back again to the fame diftance
From your mouth, as before.
9. Prime /.*.... 2 motions.
1. Turn up your hand, with your thumb refting
upon the pan, and fhake in the powder.
2. Place the two laft fingers of your right hand
behind the pan, holding the Cartridge upright
between the thumb, and the two fore-fingers.

10. Shut your Pans ! . . . 2 motions.

1. Shut the 'pan brifkly, drawing your right
arm, at this motion, towards your body, and
holding the Cartridge faft in your hand, as in the
former pofition.
2. Seize the Firelock, with a ftrong motion,
behind the lock, with your two laft fingers.

11. Cqft about to charge! . . 1 motion.

Step nimbly up with your right foot, fetting it
down ftrong, and before your left heel, and with
your left hand bring about the Firelock to your
left fide, holding it by the third loop, and the
muzzle in a line with your right fhoulder ; at
the fame time quit the Firelock with your right
hand, holding the Cartridge in your full fift, a
hand's
74 Regulations
hand's breadth from the muzzle, and in a line
with your mouth.
12. Charge with Cartridges ! . 2 motions.
1. Turn up your hand, and putting the Car
tridge into the muzzle, fhake all the powder into
the barrel.
2. Place your right hand clofed, with a quick
and ftrong motion, upon the rammer.
13. Draw your Rammers ! . . 1 motion.
Draw out the Rammer with as quick a mo
tion as poflible, place it above your waift-belt,
and fhorten it, holding it in a line with the bar
rel of your Firelock.
14. Put them in the Barrels ! . 1 motion.
Pufh the Rammer down the barrel, then draw
it entirely out again with an outftretched arm,
and, placing it above your waift-belt, fhorten it,
keeping it in a line with the barrel.
15. Return your Rammers ! . . 1 motion.
Return the Rammer, pufhing it down with as
quick a motion as poflible, immediately after
which, bringing the Firelock up before your left
fhoulder, place your left hand upoh the butt- end,
and at the fame time fall back with your right
foot.
16. Shoulder your Firelocks! '. 1 motion.
Bring your Firelock upon your fhoulder, and
throw back your right hand nimbly down your
right
 for ^Dragoons. 75
right fide, and carry your arms in the pofition,
already largely defcribed in the general Obferva-
tions on the Manual Exercife.

17. Order your Firelocks ! . . 6 motions.

- 1. Seize the Firelock with your right hand,
turning the lock outwards.
2. Raife the Firelock from your fhoulder, and
place your left hand with a quick motion above
the lock ; holding the piece right up and down
in both hands before you, and your left hand
even with your eyes.
3. Step brifkly back with your right foot,
placing it a hand's breadth diftant from the heel
of your left ; at the fame time, bring down the
Firelock as quick as poffible , to your Reft,
finking it as far down before your left knee, as
your right hand will permit without cnnftraint :
Your left hand is kept faft in this motion, and
your right, with clofed fingers, held under the
cock ; taking care to draw in the muzzle well to
wards yaur body, and to drefs in a line with the
butt- end.
4. Draw the Firelock nimbly, with your left
hand, againft your right Ihoulder, fo that it be
of an equal height, keeping both hands in the
fame pofition, in the performance of this mo
tion.
5. Quit the Firelock with your right hand, and,
finking it at the fame time, with your left, feize
it near the muzzle, which mull be of an equal
height with your eyes, and hold it clofe againft
your right fide.
6. Lift
jb Regulation*
6. Lift up your right foot, and plant it firm,
and at once, by your left ; at the fame time throw
back your left hand behind your fword, and with
your right, bring down the butt-end ftrong upon
the ground, placing it even with the toe of your
right foot ; the thumb of your right hand lying
along the barrel, and the muzzle kept at a little
diftance from your body.
1 8. Ground your Firelocks ! . . 4 motions.
1. Face to the right upon your heels, and, at
the fame time, turn the Firelock, fo that the
lock may point to the rear, and the flat of the
butt end lie againft the infide of your foot.
2. Step directly forward with your left foot,
about as far as the third loop of the Firelock,
and lay it upon the ground, your left hand hang
ing down by your left foot, and your right foot
kept faft, with the butt end againft it.
2. Raife yourfelf up again nimbly, bringing
back your left foot to its former pofition, and
keep your body faced to the right.
4. Face again to the left upon your heels, and
come to your proper front, letting your hands
hang down without motion.
19. Makeup your Firelocks \ . 4 motions.
1. Face to the right upon your heels.
2. Sink your body down, and come to the po
fition defcribed in grounding.
3. Raife up yourfelf and Firelock, and at the
fame time flip up your right hand as high as the
muzzle.
4. Face
 for the Dragoon s. 77
4. Face to the left, and come to your proper
front, holding the Firelock in the fame pofition
as is directed in Explanation 17.
20. Shoulder your Firelocks ! ". '. 5 motions.1
1. Slip your right hand down the barrel, as far
as the third loop.
2. Raife the Firelock high up in a perpendi
cular line from the ground with your right hand,
and feize it with your left above the fpring
3. Step back with your right foot, placing it
behind your left heel, and come down to your
Reft.
4. Lift up your right foot, and plant it ftrong,
bring the Firelock at the fame time before your
left fhoulder, and feize the butt-end with your left
hand, keeping it in the pofition above defcribed.
5. Place the Firelock upon your fhoulder, and
throw your right hand brifkly back.
21. Prefent your arms ! : . 3 motions.
This is performed at three motions, as is di
rected in Explanation 17,
22. To the righuabout ! '. . 3 motions.
1. Bring up the Firelock with a quick motion
high before you, till your left hand comes even
■with your eyes, keeping both hands in the fame
pofition.
2. Face to the right-about, taking care in
facing, to hold the Firelock right up arid down,
and fteady jn your hands.
3. Step
y% Regulations
3. Step back with your right foot, and ■come
down to your prefent. t
23. To the left-ahouty as you were! 3 motions.
1. Bring up your right foot brifkly to the hol
low of your left, as is directed in the foregoing
Explanation.
2. Face as quick as poflible to the left- about.
3. Come down to your prefenj.
24. Shoulder your Firelocks ! . . 2 motions.'
Shoulder your Firelock at two motions, in the
manner before directed. 4
25. Charge your Bayonets hreafi-high !
3 motions.
1. Join your right hand to your Firelock.
2. Poife your Firelock.
3. Let the Firelock fall down upon your left
arm, keeping your right hand behind the lock,
and ftepping back at the fame time with your
right foot ; the butt and muzzle muft be kept at
an equal height, and well levelled.
26. Shoulder your Firelocks ! . . 2 motions.
1. Bring up the Firelock before you, placing
your left hand at the fame time under the butt-
end, and planting your right foot ftrong by your
left.
2. Place your Firelock upon your fhoulder,and
throw back your right hand.
27. Secure
 for the Dragoon si 79
27. Secure your Firelocks ! . . 5 motions.
5 The three firft motions bring you to your Reft,
as in Explanation 17.
4, Step up brifkly with your right foot, turning
the Rammer at the fame time towards you, and
hold the Firelock with both hands right up and
down againft your left moulder ; your left hand
even with your eyes, and your thumb upon the
ftock.
5. Bring the butt-end with your right hand
nimbly under your left arm, then throw it brifkly
back, keeping your left in the fame pofition, and
taking care to drefs in the rank with your Fire
lock, and to hold the muzzle at an equal diftance
from the ground.
28. Tour Firelocks high in your right arms !
5 motions.
1. Slap your right hand ftrong upon the Fire
lock, feizing it juft before the left, and keeping
it ftill fecured.
2. Bring the Firelock with both hands ftraight
before you, with the lock outwards, and feize it
at once under the cock with your right.
3. Step back with your right foot, and come
to your Reft.
4. Bring the Firelock to your right fide, with
a quick motion, with your left hand, and flip it
up till it comes even with your fhoulder, placing
the four fingers of your right under the cock, and
the thumb over the guard.
. 5. Step brifkly up with your right foot, at the
fame time throwing back your left hand, and hold
the Firelock right up and c}own in your right hand.
29. Shoul
 to Regulations
29. Skoulder your Firelocks ! . . 5 motions.
1. Clap your left hand ftrong upon the Fire
lock, againft the hollow of your fhoulder.
2. Call off the Firelock, with a quick motion,
with both hands from you, and flipping your left
at the fame time down to the fpring, feize it un
der the cock with your right with clofed fingers,
obferving the fame pofition as defcribed in the firft
motion of Explanation 22.
3. Come down to your Reft.
4 and 5. 'Come to your fhoulder, as is directed
in Explanation 20.
30. Club your Firelocks ! . *. 13 motions.
1 and 2. Thefe two motions are performed as
in Explanation 1 and 2.
3. Step out ftrong and nimbly with your right
foot, and plant it before the left, at the fame time
let go your right hand, bringing down the Firelock
with your left, and feize it near the muzzle with
your right, holding it with both hands clofe to your
body, and the muzzle in a line with your fhoulder,
your left hand placed upon the third loop.
4. Slip the Bayonet up with your right hand,
keeping your right arm clofe along the barrel at
this motion.
5. Turn the Bayonet to the right, fquaring
yout right elbow at this motion.
6. Slip the Bayonet brifkly off the muzzle, and
hold it a hand's breadth from it.
7. Enter the point of your Bayonet in the
fcabbard.
8. Thruft the Bayonet quite into the fcabbard.
9. Seiz:
 for ^ Dragoons. 8i
9. Seize the Firelock brifkly with your right
hand near the muzzle.
10. Come to your Reft at once from your left
fide.
11. Keep the Firelock firm in your left hand,
and caft it about with your right, bringing up
your right foot at the fame time, and feizing it
with your right hand at the laft loop, with the
thumb oppofite to your eyes.
12. Raife the Firelock with your right hand,
and take hold of it with your left, with out-
ftretched fingers, near the muzzle, keeping it
fomewhat diftant from your body, and your left
arm almoft ftretched out.
13. Bring the Firelock, with the butt upwards
brifkly down upon your fhoulder, and throw back
yoyr right hand 5 the lock muft be outwards, the
left arm almoft ftretched out, the muzzle drawn
in well towards the body, and the Firelock fteady
and even upon your fhoulder.

31. Shoulder your Firelocks \ . 10 motions.

1. Clap your right hand ftrong upon the Fire
lock at the laft loop, and raife it nimbly from your
fhoulder.
2. Sink the Firelock with your right hand, and,
feizing it with your left, at the fpring, hold it in
the pofition above directed.
3. Let go your right hand, and turn the Fire
lock with a quick motion, with your left, bringing
down the butt end, and come to your Reft, by
placing your right hand under the cock with
clofed fingers, and ftepping back at the fame
time with your right foot.
F 4. Bring
82 Regulations
4. Bring the Firelock to your left fide with
your right hand, ftepping out brifkly with your
right foot, and placing it before the left, feize
the Firelock near the muzzle with your right
hand, and hold it againft your left fide, in the
manner before directed.
5. Take hold of the Bayonet with your right
hand, taking care at this motion not to bow your
'head, or fink the muzzle, and to hold the Fire
lock firm againft your body in the left hand.
6. Draw your Bayonet brifkly out of the fcab-
bard, and bring it up within a hand's breadth
of the muzzle, holding it right up and down, the
thumb placed upon the fhank, and the little finger
upon the notch.
7. Thruft the Bayonet down upon the muzzle,
as far as the notch will permit, keeping your right
elbow fquare.
8. Turn the Bayonet brifkly to the left, and
, fix it, bringing your elbow at this motion to
wards the barrel, and, flipping down your right
hand, take hold of the Firelock near the muzzle.
9. Bring up the Firelock brifkly before your
left fhoulder, fo high as to be able to place your
left hand under the butt-end, and at the fame
time ftep back with your right foot, placing it in
its former pofition by the left.
10. Place the Firelock upon your fhoulder, in
the manner before directed.
32. Face to the right ! . . 2 motions.
1. Face to the right upon both heels.
2. Raife your right foot, and fet it down ftrong
by your left*
31. A?
 for A Dragoons! 8^
33. As you were ! . . .2 motions.
1. Face to the left again upon your heels.
2. Lift up your right foot, and plant it ftrong
by your left.
34. Face to the left ! . 1 . 2 motions.
This is performed at two motions, as in the
foregoing Explanation.
35. As you were ! . . ~. 2 motions.
Thefe two motions are performed, as is di
rected in Explanation 32.
36. Face to the right-about ! . 3 motions.
1. Place your right foot nimbly behind your
left heel.
2. Face to the right-about.
3. Lift up your right foot, and fet it down
again, with a ftrong motion, by your left.
37. To the left-about, as you were ! 3 motions.
1. Place your right foot nimbly againft the hol
low of your left.
2. Face to the left-about.
3. Step out again ftrong with your right foot.
38. Face to the left about ! . . 3 motions/
Thefe three motions are performed, as in the
Foregoing Explanation.
39. To the right-about, asyou were ! 3 motions.'
This is performed at three motions, as is di
rected in Explanation 36. ~v
F 2 It
84 Regulations
It is to be obferved further, that in wheeling,
marching, and on all duties, the Men muft carry
their Firelocks firm and fteady on their fhoulders,
and their right hands are to hang clofe and mo-
tionlefs down their right fides.

CHAP. IV.

How the Officers are to take their

pofts again, in the front of the Re
giment.
Article i.
AF T E R the Exercife is performed, the com
manding Officer orders the Drummer to
beat a ruffle, at which the Standard-bearers fix
the Standards above their waift-beits.
Art. 2. At the fecond ruffle, the Officers, non-
commiflioned Officers, Standard-bearers, Haut
boys, and Drummers march, with an even pace,
into the front ; the Drummers drawing up in three
ranks, as before, upon the flanks of the Regi
ment.
N. B. At the firft ruffle, the flank-men go to the
right about, and march into the Regiment ; at the
fecond, they come to the left-about as they were,
and drefs.

Art. 3;
 for the Dragoons. *$
Art. 3. The Major mores into the front to
gether with the Officers, non-commiffioned Offi
cers, Standard-bearers, Hautboys, and Drum
mers ; and remains upon the right flank, till the
commanding Officer, in forming the Regiment
for firing, gives the word, "To the right ! upon
which he moves again into the rear of the firft
Squadron ; and does not return into the front, till
the Regiment is formed, after the firings.

F3 PART
86 R E GULATIONS

PART IV.
DIRECTIONS
FOR

Performing the Firings.

chap. I.
General Obfervations concerning the
Firings.
Article i.
DURING all Firings, filence muft be kept
in the ranks, and no talking, fpitting, or
moving about to be permitted ; and the
Soldiers, as foon as their Battalion, Divifion, or
Platoon has loaded, and mouldered, muft caft
their eyes inftantly to the right, carry well their
arms, drefs their ranks and files, and not put
their right hands into their pouches, or upon their
fire
 for ^Dragoons; 87
firelocks, but ftand fteady, and without the leaft
motion, as in the performance of the Manual.

Art. 2. In advancing, the firft and fecondDi-

vifion, and the right Platoon of the third, muft
look to the left ; the left Platoon, and the fourth
and fifth Divifion, to the right : and in retreating,
the firft and fecond Divifion, and right Platoon
of the third, to the right ; the left Platoon, and
the fourth and fifth Divifion, to the left.

Art. 3. In performing the firings, the ranks

and files muft be in clofe order.

Art. 4. In making ready in the firings, the

motions muft be performed as is directed in the
Mannal Exercife ; excepting, that the Men are
not to wait longer between the three firft mo
tions, than while they can tell one, two, haftily ;
and before the laft motion of cocking, they are
to allow a little more time ; taking care to drefs
with their firelocks in a line, and to ftand to a
good recover, with their left hands as high as
their eyes.
In firing Standing and retreating^ after the three
motions which bring the Men to their recover,
they muft tell four haftily before they cock and
kneel ; and the flank-man muft bring his firelock
with a large motion over his head at the kneeling,
that the front-rank may come down more toge
ther ; in performing which motion, they muft
plant the butt-end ftrong upon the ground, hold
their head and body ftraight, and their left foot
faft, placing their right knee behind it, and
. F 4 keeping
88 Regulations
keeping the left knee and heel, and the firelock
drefled a line along the whole rank.
N. B. The firelock muft be brought clofe againft
your breaft, in malting ready ; and your left hand
held as high as your eyes.
When the front-rank kneels, the rear ranks imme
diately lock in to the right, and cover the intervals
of the files ; the center-rank is to have the right feet
of the front between their legs.

Art. 5. The Platoons or Divifions muft drefs

well to the right, in prefenting ; the front-rank
taking care to level ftraight forwards, and the
rear-ranks to fink their muzzles a little ; the Men
muft take a good aim, and look boldly into their
fire : The Officers are to be careful to make them
level ftraight.
N. B. The butt muft reft even with the fhoulder, and'
the Men fink their heads a little, in order to take a
better aim.
Art. 6. At the word, Fire ! the Platoons or
fjivifions muft draw their trickers brifkly, that
their pieces may be fure to go off; after which
the front-rank riles up nimbly, bringing the fire
lock down to a level above the waift-belt upon
the right fide, and riO man muft.be fuffered to
ftoop, when he performs the motions of priming ;
The rear-ranks are not to fall back, but to re
main in clofe order, when they level their fire
locks above their waift-belts.
Art. f. Evefy Man muft be taught to load
quick, and to do all the fifing motions properly ;
and
 for /^Dragoons, 89
and particular care taken, that none be either
omitted or performed but fuch as are neceflary,
and according to the following directions :
The Men muft half- cock their firelocks in
coming down to the priming pofition, and take
hold of their cartridges nimbly, which are to be
rolled up tight, and placed in the pouch with the
tops downwards : As foon as they have taken out
their cartridges, they muft bite off the tops, fo
far, that the powder may fall into their mouths ;
then prime, fhut their pans, and call about to
charge with quick motions, taking care, in calling,
about, not to fpill any : they muft then bring
up their cartridges to the muzzle, make the
powder down the barrels, draw their rammers
as quick as pofllble at two motions, fhorten them,
put them in the barrels, and ram the charge
well down, which laft particular all Officers muft
be very attentive to fee done ; the rammers muft
then be nimbly recovered, fhortened and returned,
and the firelocks t advanced at one brifk motion,
without waiting, one for another ; afterwards,
when the whole ftand in a fteady pofition, they
muft wait a little, and fhoulder at once ; to per
form which together, the whole Platoon or Divi-
fion muft look to the right, and take the motion
from its flank-man.
N. B. When the Men fhoulder, the rear- ranks muft
incline nimbly to the left, and cover their file-leaders.

f This term is here introduced, in order to avoid a cir

cumlocution, as it will frequently occur throughout
the direftions for the firings : The pofition is defcribed
in Explanation 15, in the Manual Exercife.
The
 go Regulations
• The cartridges muft be always taken regularly out of
the pouch, no Man is therefore to put them cither
under his waift-belt, or elfewhere.

Art. 8. The loading motions are to be per

formed as quick as poffible ; and notwithllanding
the Platoons and Divifions muft be careful to calt
about to charge, and afterwards to advance their
firelocks with life, and, as much as they can,
together ; yet, they are to go about immediately
after they have fhut their pans, and bring up their
firelocks as foon as they have returned their ram
mers, without waiting perceptibly for one an
other.
N. B. Every Soldier who cannot make ready in equal
time, and is too flow in the loading motions, mult
be taught to do them quicker, and conftantly drilled,
till he becomes capable, for which the Captains fhall
be anfwerable.

Art. g. The Platoons or Divifions muft make

ready, and come down inftantaneouQy after the
Officers give the word, who are to be three paces
advanced, and to face towards them ; to give the
word loud and fhort, and to be very attentive to
each other's firings, that they may be performed
in fuccelfive and regular order.
N. B. The Officers muft take care, that the Men ftand
firm upon their ground, before they give them the
word to prefent ; and that they level well, and take
a good aim, without any hurry.

Art. io. As a Regiment of Dragoons is told

off in ten Platoons, the third Platoon has no oc-
cafion to wait, till the firft has loaded, and is
going'
 for ^Dragoons. 91
going to fhoulder, as is the cuftom in the Infan
try, whofe Battalions, being only told off in eight,
have confequently lefs time allowed for loading
between every fire.
N. B. The commanding Officer mull not give the
word to fire by Divifions, till the laft Platoon has
fhouldered.

Art. 11. No Soldier fhall prefume, on pain of

running the gantlope, to omit loading, or to
throw away his cartridge ; and in cafe any man's
piece mould mifs fire, he is not to put in more;
cartridges, but to wipe the flint and pan imper
ceptibly, and pour in frefh powder; if it mould
a fecond time mifs fire, without flafhing in the
pan, it muft undoubtedly be either out of order,
or the flint bad, for which the Captain fhall be
anfwerable : On the contrary, when a piece flafhes
in the pan, but does not go off, the infide of the
barrel muft be either dirty, or the powder is not
fhaked out of the cartridge, for which the Soldier
is to be accountable ; ■ neverthelefs, every fuch
Soldier muft continue to perform the loading mo
tions, and not leave the ranks to examine his
firelock, or to put in a new flint, without pofi-
tive orders.
N. B. As often as the firings are to be performed,
every Soldier mull be fupplied with a good new flint,
and one that is ftrong enough to laft for thirty
fires at leall.

Art. 12. The Officers, and non-commiffioned

Officers, as well thofe in the Platoons, as in the
rear, muft keep filence, obferve well their men,
and
gz Regulations
and not talk, or call out to them, nor quit their
pofts in the Platoons to drefs the ranks : In cafe
any man in the Regiment is ignorant of his bufi-
hefs, it is then no proper time to inftruct him ;
but the Officers muft remark all fuch as they ob-
ferve deficient, in order to have them taught bet
ter, after the Exercife is over, or to punifh any
who have the infolence to be carelefs.
Art. 13. The non-commiflioned Officers pofted
in the rear during the firings Jianding, or ad
vancing, are always to drefs in a line, four paces
diftant from the Regiment ; but in retreating, they
are to come to the right about with their Pla
toons or Divifions, and ftand • faft till they have
given their fire, after which, they are to go to the
left-about as they were, and to march again into
the rank of non-commiffioned Officers.
Art. 14. In the firings Jianding, or' advancing,
the Officers in the rear of Platoons, are to drefs
in a line, two paces in the rear of the non-com
miffioned Officers i but in retreating, they are to
conform to the directions before given, in order to
prevent all diforders and confufion.

CHAP.
 for the Dragoon s. 93

CHAP. II.
The manner of forming a Regiment
for Firing.
FTER the Manual is performed, the com
A manding Officer gives the word,
1. 'take care to ■perform your firings !
N. B. In a Regiment confiding of ten Squadrons, the
Colonel- commandant, or Lieutenant-Colonel, as has
been already obferved, is to command the fecond
Battalion, and to take his motions from the firft.

2. Take care !
at which word of command the flank-men ftep
out into the front.
3. Reft your Firelocks !
4. * Level your Firelocks !
Bring the Firelock down to a level above the
waift-belt, loofen the hammer-ftall quick and im
perceptibly, and hold the Firelock fteady, and in
a line, in rank and file.
* I have introduced this term preferably to handle your
primers! although the pofition is the fame, as primers
are totally out of ufe.

5. Prime
 94 Regulations
5. Prime and load!
Throw up the pan-cover, and, taking oft the
hammer Mall, and fixing it behind your waift-
belt, handle the cartridge brifkly, bite off the top,
prime, and fhut the pan, after which look well
to the right, and take the following motions from
the flank-man.
6. Face to the rigBt !
7. March ! -
The whole Regiment fteps off together, with the
left foot, the Officers taking their polls as fol
lows :
The Captain of every Squadron commands the
right Platoon, and the firft Lieutenant, the left ;
excepting in the fifth Squadron, where the Cap
tain takes poft on the left flank, and commands
the tenth Platoon. The reft of the Officers, who
are to take poft in the rear, march through the
intervals where the non-commiflioned Officers
ftood, into the rear of their Platoons : The Stan
dard bearers, who are conftantly to remain with
their refpective Squadrons, move into the rear-
rank, and cover the Officer who commands the
left Platoon.
8. Halt!
The whole Regiment takes up its ground with a
ftrong ftep, and the commanding Officer muff,
take particular care, that the files are neither too
clofe, nor too open.

N.B.Thc
 for the D r a g o o n sV 95
N. B. The Drummers are to ftand faft three deep
upon the flanks of the Regiment during this move
ment.

9. Front !
at which word of command the Regiment faces
at once to its proper front.
iOi Rear-ranks clofe to the Front ! March!
The rear ranks move up brifkly, and together, to
clofe order.

CHAP. III.
Manner of performing the Firings
Jtanding, advancing , and retreat
ing.
AFTER the Regiment is drawn up^as above,
in clofe order, the commanding Officer gives
the word,
1. 'take care to charge by Platoons ftandingl
the right flank begins !
The commanding Officers of Platoons then ftep
out three paces forwards, and face to the left to
wards their Platoons, excepting the Captain upon
the left flank of the Regiment, who is to face
to the right.
2. Charge !
96 Regulations
2. Charge !
Upon which the Officers proceed to give the word,
according to the directions below given in the
words of command for the firings : The method
to be obferved by the Platoons or Divifions in
making ready, loading and fhpuldering Jlanding,
has been already explained in the preceding gene
ral Obfervations : As foon as a Platoon or Divi-
lion has fired the number of times ordered, and
fhoulders, the Officer commanding it muft fall
brifkly into the front-rank again.

3. Take care to charge by Divifions ftanding f

the right flank begins !
Charge !
This is performed as is directed in the words of
command for the firings. After the Regiment
has fired by Divifions the number of times ordered,
the commanding Officer gives the word,
4. March!
at which the whole Regiment fteps off together
with the left foot : The Standard-bearer, toge
ther with two non - commiffioned Officers from
the rear of the center of the third Divifion, ad
vances four paces from the front-rank ; the firft
and fecond Divifion, and the right Platoon of the
third muft, at the fame time, caft their eyes to
the left towards the Standard, and the whole take
care to march exactly in a line.
. N. B. When the ground will permit, the Regiment is
to march fifty paces, before it begins to fire'; and
the Men muft carry their arms well in advancing;
• muft
 for /^Dragoons. 97
muft march flow ; and keep their ranks and files
ftxaight, and at their proper diftances : After they
have marched about fifty paces, the commanding
Officer gives the word,

5. Take care to charge by Platoons advancing I

the right flank begins !
Charge !
At which the Drummers and Hautboys are tp
ceafe till the firing is finifhed ; and the Officers
inftantly proceed to give the word of command,
as is below directed Ipr the firings advancing.
The Platoons and Divifions, when they are to
fire advancing, muft ftep out three ordinary paces,
making them flow and even v and at the third
pace, the front-rank is to come down brifkly and
together, and the rear-ranks to lock in to the
right, as they did in the firings Jianding. As foon
as a Platoon or Divifion has fired advancing., it
proceeds immediately to load, but muft ftand
faft, and not fall back into the Regiment again,
till it has mouldered ; the two firft Divifions, and
the right Platoon of the third, always taking care
to caft their eyes towards the Standard in the cen
ter, to drefs with the Regiment, and to march in
a ftraight line.
As lbon as the Regiment has done firing by
Platoons advancing, the commanding Officer gives
the word,
6. Take care to charge by Divifions advancing !
the right flank begins !
Charge !
■* This is performed in the manner explained in
the words of command forthe firings advancing.
G After
98 Regulations
After the Regiment has done firing by Divi-
fions, the Drummers beat a march again, and the
hautboys found ; the Regiment keeps advancing
a few paces, tiil the commanding Officer gives
the word,
7. Halt !
at which the five right Platoons immediately caft
their eyes to the right.
8. jbrefil
the five Platoons caft their eyes towards the Stan
dard in the center again, and the whole drefTes
in a line with it : When the Regiment ftands even
and fteady, a fignal muft be given from the cen
ter, at which the right wing caft their eyes to
the right again.
9. To the right-about !
at which word of command, the Captain of the
right Divifion fprings forward a little, and the
whole Regiment mult look to him, in order to go
about together.
After the Regiment has faced about,
1 o. March !
upon which the Drummers beat the troop, and the
whole Regiment fteps off together, the center-ftan-
dard having moved out three paces from the rear-
rank; the Regiment muft be careful to march quite
even in retreating : The fourth and fifth Divifion,
and the left Platoon of the third, incline their heads
immediately to the left towards the Standard,
that they may be able to march exaclly in a line.
N. B. The
 for /& Dragoons. 99
N. B. The Officers and non-commiffioned Officers
muft be alfo careful to march in a ftraight line.

When the Regiment has retreated a few paces,

the word of command is given,
11. Take care to charge by Platoons retreating !
the right flank begins !
Charge !
The Drummers ceafe beating, and the Platoons
and Divifions, with the Officers and non-com
miffioned Officers in the rear of them, as foon as
their refpective commanding Officers give the
word, Platoon ! muft plant their feet ftrong to
gether, ftand perfectly fteady, caft their eyes to
the right, and drefs well ; and, at the word, To
the rightabout ! they muft come brifkly about at
one motion, upon their left heels, drefs nimbly,
and ftand fteady.
At the word, Make ready ! the Platoon or Di-
vifion makes ready at four motions, as it is per
formed in the firings Jiandingy and at the fourth,
the front-rank comes down After the word,
Fire ! the front-rank immediately fprings up, and
all the three ranks level their firelocks brifkly,
and prime : When they have primed, they throw
the butt-end downwards with the right hand,
bringing up the muzzle in a line with the right
fhoulder, and load as quick as poffible ; during
which, they are to ftand faft, and not march till
they have mouldered, which laft motion is always
to be performed together.
When the Regiment has done firing by Pla
toons retreating) the word of command is given,
/ G 2 12. Take
ico Regulations
i 2. 'take care to charge by Divifions retreating f
the right flank begins !
Charge !
After the Regiment has gone through the firings
by Divifions retreating, in the manner explained
in the words of command for the firings, the Drum
mers beat the treop again ; and when the Regi
ment has retreated a few paces, the commanding
Officer orders all the Drummers to beat a march -,
upon which the Regiment comes to the left-about
at one motion, Hands faft a little, looks to the
right, and plants their feet together with the Cap
tain commanding the firft Divifion ; after which
the right wing cafts their eyes towards the cen-
ter-ftandard again. When the Regiment has
advanced a few paces, the commanding Officer
gives the word,
13. Hah!
upon which the whole plant their feet ftrong and
together, and call their eyes to the right.
14. Drefs !
at which the right wing caft their eyes to the ceo-
ter-ftandard again, and drefs in the manner already
directed in Explanation 8.
Particular care muft be taken, that the ranks
and files don't fall back, or open after firing, but
that, either flanding, advancing, or retreating, the
firing and loading motions are performed in clofe
order.
The Major and Adjutants muft be very careful
.to keep the Regiment always in a ftraight line,
in
 for ^Dxagoons. JDI
in advancing and retreating ; they are therefore to
be continually riding up and down, in order to
drefs the men, and to give their affiftance and di
rections where necefiary.

CHAP. IV.
Of Parapet-firing.
TH E Regiment being dreffed and fteady, the
commanding Officer gives the word,
i . Take care to perform the Parapet-firing !
at which the Officers who command Platoons, ftep
two files down, and face to the right: A non-
commiflioned Officer of thofe who are pofted in
the rear of the Regiment, marches into the front-
rank of every Platoon not having an Officer in
its rear, and pofts himfelf two files below the cen
ter, facing likewife to the right. — When the
commanding Officer gives the word to charge, the
Drummers beat to-arms, and the Officers and non-
commiffioned Officers give the word to the two firft
files, March ! and ftep out brifkly five paces for
ward ; the right hand man in the center- rank runs to
the right of the front, and the two in the rear to the
right of the center. —The Officer or non-commif-
fioned Officer then gives the word, Make ready !
Prefent ! when the two firft files prefent, the two
next, of their own accord, make ready •, and
when the two firft have fired, the word, March !
is given, at which the two firft files fail back in-
G 3 to
io2 Regulations
to the Regiment, and the two next at the fame
time ftep forward ; and fo on through the whole,
as often as they are to fire ; but in thofe Platoons,
in which the number of files is not even, the laft
file muft fire alone in a fingle rank ; and every
Platoon is to fire from risht to left.
N. B. Officers who are in the rear of Platoons, are
always to march into the front-rank, to perform the
Parapet- firing; and good non-commiffioned Officers
muft take poft in thofe Platoons, which have no Offi
cers in their rear, as has been already obferved.
' ' ■ i
As foon as the two files have fired, they im
mediately form three deep again, come brifkly to
their recover, and half-cock ; at the word, March!
they fall nimbly back into the Regiment, feizing
at the fame time, and biting off the top of their
cartridge ; as foon as they have fallen in, they
come to the pofition of levelling their firelocks,
prime, caft round the butt-end, bringing up the
muzzle, as in the firings retreating, and load;
when they have returned their rammers, they ad
vance their firelocks at one quick motion, bringing
up their right foot forwards, and planting it by the
left again ; after which they fhoulder together, and
ftand quite fteady.
N. B. The files muft incline a little to the right, in
marching out to fire, that the two next may have
fufficient room, without running through one an
other ; they are alfo to drefs to the right, and not
to march out further than thofe of the firft Platoon.

When the Platoons have gone through the Para

pet.firing, as often as was ordered, the Officers
and
 for the Dragoons. 103
and non commiflioned Officers are not to proceed
to fire more ; and all the Platoons muft finifh to
gether ; for if one Platoon is not made ready im
mediately after another, the Officer, or non com
miflioned Officer commanding ir, does not give
the word in proper time. The files muft prefent,
and afterwards half-cock together; it is ne'cefiary
therefore they fhould be very attentive to the
word of command : The Officers are alfo to for
bid all talking and pufhing, and to take care
that every thing is performed in regular order.
When the Parapet - firing is over, the com
manding Officer gives the word,
2. Rear-ranks open backwards to your former
diftance !
3. March !
at this word of command, the Officers and Stan
dard-bearers march into the front.
4. Drefs!
When the whole is drefied, and fteady,
5. Take care !
6. To the right form by Squadrons !
They face to the right, and plant their feet with
a ftrong motion,
7. March!
The whole ftep off together ; the Officers and non-
commiflioned Officers poft themfelves in the front
of the firft Divifion of their refpective Squadrons ;
and the Standard-bearers, in the center of the
non-commiflioned Officers.
G 4 The
104 Regulations
The Squadrons are always to be fized to the
right, with the talleft men in the front-rank, the
next in fize in the center, and the fhorteft in the
rear. —When the whole is in proper order, the
commanding Officer gives the word,
8. Halt!
at which they take up their ground with a ftrong
ftep.
9. Front!
They face to the front, after which the com
manding Officer marches to the head of his own
Squadron.

CHAP. V.
Of pafling in Review.
Article 1.
WHEN the Regiment is formed by Squa
drons, and his Majefty orders it to march,
the General or Colonel gives the word of com
mand to the firft Squadron :
1. fake care!
2. Reft your Firelocks !
$. Shoulder your Firelocks !
4. Rear-^ranks clofe to the front !
5. March!
6. To the right wheel by Divifions!
7. March!
The
 for the Dragoons. to$
The commanding Officers of the other Squadrons
muft be attentive to the Officer who commands
the firft Squadron, and take care to give the word
at the fame time ; and the Drummers are to be
gin beating together.
N. B. At the word of Command, Tt the right ivhttl
by Diviftons ! the firft Divifion of the Colonel's Squa
dron ftands faft ; the rear-ranks of the others are to
clofe to the front in their wheeling, and to perform
it with as much etfa&nefs arid regularity as the In
fantry can.—When a Divifion is to wheel, the
commanding Officer gives the word, Halt ! upon
which the rear-ranks clofe up brifldy to the frenf,
and the front-rank keeps moving their feet only; ho
then gives the word, Wheel ! upon which the three
ranks wheel together, taking care to keep an even
ftep, to march flow, and to carry their arms well :
As foon as the Divifion has wheeled, he gives the
word , Halt I Drefs t upon which all the three
ranks ftand faft at once, and drefs themfelves : The
Officer then gives the word, March ! and lifts up
his left foot, the front-rank ftepping off with the
fame, at the fame time.—When the Officer, in
wheeling to the right byDivifions, gives the word,
Halt ! To the right wheel/ the three ranks muft caft
their eyes to the left ; and, after they have wheeled,
and the word, Halt ! is given, immediately to the
right again.
«
Art. z. The Squadrons are to march off in the
following order : In the front of all,
the inferior Staff-Officers ;
the Surgeons ;
the Kettle-drummer on horfeback \
the Hautboys^
the
106 Regulations
the General, or Colonel ;
the Captain ;
the Subaltern-Officers ;
the non-commiflioned Officers, with the Stan
dard-bearer, in a fingle rank ;
the three Drummers ;
the Squadron, in four Divifions, all fized to
the right ;
, the twelve Supernumeraries ;
the Farrier, in the rear of all.
All the other Squadrons are to march in the rear
of the General's ; and the Recruits, in order to
be diftinguifhed, are to have green branches ftuck
in their hats.
*

$& From hence to the end of the Chapter, is the

fame in the Dragoon-Regulations, as from Ar-
, tide 7. p. 38. to the end of the Chapter, in
the Horfe ■, excepting, that as often as the
word Troop occurs, you are to read Squadron ;
and inftead of Trumpeter in Art. 1 1 . Drum
mers.

CHAP.
 .

THE NEW YQ)««

PUBLIC LIBRARY

A&TM, L£NOX AND

flL£>EN TOUNDMT0N8.

rli

«*
-
sr g s m
i

r
-
-

\
 for the Dragoons. 107

CHAP. VI.
How the Officers are to give the word
of command through the firings.
AS foon as the Regiment is formed in clofe
order for the firings, the Colonel, or com
manding Officer gives the word,
Take care to charge by Platoons ftanding ; the
right flank begins !
Charge !
At the word, Charge ! the Captain upon the
right gives the word, Platoon ! Make ready ! Pre-
Jent ! Fire !
When the firft makes ready, the Captain upon
the left flank gives the word, Platoon !
When the firft prefents, the tenth makes ready.
When the firft fires, the tenth prefents and
fires.
When the tenth comes down, the Officer com
manding the fecond gives the word, Platoon !
When the tenth prefents, the fecond makes
ready.
When the tenth fires, the fecond prefents and
fires ; t and fo on, one Platoon after another from
the right and left to the center fucceflively: When
the fixth or laft Platoon fires, the firft is to be
gin again, and the fame to be performed a fecond
time, every Officer taking care, as foon as his
Platoon has fired the laft time, and fhoulders, to
ftep
'

ioS Regulations
ftep back into his former poft again, and drefs
"with the front-rank.
The Officers muft be alfo very careful to fire
in regular and fucceflive order, and to keep five
Platoons always loaded, which, as the Regiment
is told off in ten, may be done without much
difficulty.
When the fixth Platoon has fired the fecond
lime, the commanding Officer gives the word,
Take care to charge by Divi/ions ftanding ! the
right flank begins !
Charge !
upon which the Officers proceed again, as fol
lows :
The Captain upon the right, Divifion! Make
ready t■ Prefent ! Fire I
"When the firft makes ready, the Captain upon
the left gives the word, Divifion !
When the firft fires, the fifth makes ready, pre-
fents, and fires ; and fo on the fecond, fourth,
and laftly the third, in regular fucceflion ; but
with this reftriction, that no Divifion makes ready,
till the preceding one has fired, to the end that
three, or at leaft two Divifions may be always
loaded.
When the third Divifion has fired, the firft be
gins the fecond round, the Regiment performing
the fame again as before, and every Officer, after
his Divifion has fired the laft time, and fhoulders,
fiepping into the front-rank again.

After
 [To face p. 10S.

THE FIRINGS
b y
DIVISIONS, Standing.

I. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Divifion !
Make ready! | | | Divihon !
Prefent ! |
Fire ! | Divifion ! | | Make ready!
| | | 1 Prefent !
| Make ready! | | Divifion ! | Fire !
| Prefent ! | |
| Fire ! | Divifion ! | Make ready! |
| Prelent ! |
Divifion ! | Make ready! 1 Fire ! |
| Prelent ! |
Make ready! | | Fire ! | | Divifion I
Prelent ! | [ | |
Fire ! | Divifion ! | Make ready'
| Prefent !
| Make ready! | | Divifion | Fire !
| Prefent ! |
| Fire ! | Divifion ! | Mak" ready! |
1 1 | Prefent !
| Make ready! | Fire ! |
| | Prefent ! | i
1 1 Fire ! 1
i
 •
-

■
'

'.
. ,
 [To face p. ix«.

THE FIRINGS
B Y
DIVISIONS, Advancing.
r. 2. q. a.. e.
Divifion !
Make ready! | |
March ! ( Divilion !
Prefent !
Fire ! | | Make ready !
| Divifion ! | | March !
| { Prefent !
| Make ready! | [ Fire !
| March ! | | Divifion ! |
| Prefent ! ( |
| Fire ! | Make ready! |
| Divifion ! | March !
| | Prefent ! |
| | Make ready! | Fire ! |
Divifion ! | March! (
| Prefent !
Make ready! | | Fire !
March ! | | | | Divifion !
Prefent ! | |
Fire ! J | Make ready
| Divifion ! i March !
| Pre jen t !
| Make ready! | | Fire !
| March ! | | Divifion |
| Prefent ! | | |
| Fire ! | Make ready! |
I | Divifion ! | March ! |
| | Prefent ! |
| Make ready! | Fire ! |
I | March ! |
| Prefent ! |
1 Fire ! | |
THE NEW YORK/
PUBLIC I.TfcRARYf

ASTOR, USNOX AND

TILOEN FOUNDATInma

'
 'To face p. 109.]

The FIRIb.
2.

Platoon !
Make ready! Platoon !
March ! Platoon ! Make ready !
Prefent ! Make ready! March !
Fire ! March ! Platoon 1y ! I Prefent !
Prefent ! Make r< Fire !
Fire! March !
Prefent
Fire !

Platoon !
Make ready! Platoon !

March ! Platoon ! Make ready

Prefent ! Make ready! March !

Firel March ! Platoorj Prefent !

—- 1
Prefent ! Make r|
Fire ! March
Prefent ,
■ Fire !
 for the D R agoons, 109
After, the Regiment has finifhed the fecond
round, the commanding Officer gives the word
to die whole,
March !
and when it has marched a few paces forwards,
Take care to charge by Platoons advancing !
the right flank begins !
Charge !
upon which the Captain upon the right begins the
lire, and gives the word,
Platoon! Make ready! March! Prefent! Fire!
at the word, March / the Platoon with firelocks
cocked, fteps out three fmall paces, very flow,
the front-rank coming brifkly down at the third.
"When the firft Platoon makes ready, the Cap
tain commanding the tenth gives the word, Pla
toon!
When the firft marches out, the tenth makes
ready, and prefently after marches out.
When the firft fires, the tenth prefents and fires.
When the tenth fires, the fecond prefents and
fires.
After the fecond, the ninth, and fo on in the
fame fucceflive order, till the whole has fired two
rounds : The fires are to follow clofe and quick,
and one half of the Regiment notwithftanding be
always kept fhouldered , for which reafon the men
muft be taught to load as quick as poffible.

When
 o face p. 109.]

The FIRIg
I. 10.

Platoon ! j | 1
Make ready! 1 | 1 Platoon !
March! | Platoon! | ■.Make ready:
Prefent ! | Make ready! | i March !
Fire ! | March ! | Platoon iy ! | Prefent !
| Prefent ! | Make r | Fire !
| Fire ! | March ! i—
1 —

| | Prefent 1 1
| | Fire ! 1
1 1 1
Platoon ! | |
Make ready! | | ' F,atoon !
March ! 1 Platoon ! | | Make ready
Prefent ! | Make ready! | I March !
Fire ! | March ! | Platoon ly! | Preient !
| Prefent ! | Make r | Fire ! \

| Fire ! | March 1
1 Prefent 1
| J Fire ! 1
!
1 l
h.' . ..
1

1 I 1
1
1 1

1
 for the D r A g o o n 6. 109
After, the Regiment has finifhed the fecond
round, the commanding Officer gives the: word
to die whole,
March !
and when it has marched a few paces forwards,
Take care to charge by Platoons advancing !
the right flank begins !
Charge !
upon which the Captain upon the right begins the
fire, and gives the word,
Platoon! Make ready! March! Prefent! Fire!
at the word, March / the Platoon with firelocks
cocked, fteps out three fmall paces, very flow,
the front-rank coming brifkly down at the third.
"When the firft Platoon makes ready, the Cap-
taia commanding the tenth gives the word, Pla
toon!
When the firft marches out, the tenth makes
ready, and prefently after marches out.
When the firft fires, the tenth prefents and fires.
When the tenth fires, the fecond prefents and
fires.
After the fecond, the ninth, and fo on in the
fame fucceffive order, till the whole has fired two
rounds : The fires are to follow clofe and quick,
and one half of the Regiment notwithftanding be
always kept ihouldered , for which reafon the men
mull be taught to load as quick as poffible.

When
 no Regulations
When the Regiment has finifhed the fecond
round, the commanding Officer gives the word,
Take care to charge by Divifions advancing!
the right flank begins !
Charge !
upon which the Captain commanding the General's
Squadron,
Divifion'■ Make ready! March! Prefent ! Fire !
When the firft Divifion is marched out, the Cap
tain upon the left, gives the word, Divifion !
When the firft fires, the fifth makes ready,
marches out, prefents and fires ; and fo on, the
fecond, fourth, and laftly the third.
When the third Divifion has fired, the firft be
gins again, and fo on as before, every Officer
taking care not to make ready till his preceding
Divifion has fired, that three, or at leatft two Di
vifions may always remain loaded.
When the Regiment has fired two rounds by
Divifions advancing, the Colonel, or commanding
Officer gives the word,
Halt ! The whole Battalion face to the right
about !
Take care to charge by Platoons retreating !
the right flank begins !
Charge !
The Captain upon the right then begins, and
gives the word,
Platoon ! To the right about '■ Make ready !
Prefent ! Fire !
When
 [To face p. hi.]

THE FIRINGS
B Y

DIVISIONS, Retrbatinc;
I. 2. 3- 4- 5-
Divifion !
To the right | |
about ! j| | |
Make ready! | | | Divifion !
Prefent ! | | To the right
| about !
Kire ! | Divifion ! Make ready!
To the right 1 1
about ! Prefent !
1 I
Make ready! | Divifion ! Fire I
Prefent ! | To th,e riSht
| about !
| Fire ! | Divifion ! | Make ready ! |
| To the right
Prefent !
j about !
Divifion ! | | Make ready! | Fire !
To the rieht 1 | D , . 1 1
about! ^ 1 | Prefent!
Make ready! | | Fire ! | Divifion !
Prefent ! | To the rign*
| about !
rire ! | Divifion ! | | Make ready!
| To the right
I about ! Prefent !
| Make ready! | | Divifion ! | Fire !
! Prefent ! j \° thf right j
1 1 about !
1 Fire ! | Divifion ! | Make ready! |
1 To the rieht |D . .
| (about! & fPrefent! j
I | Make ready! | Fire !
| I Prefent !
1 |Fire! | j J
 THE KFW ^3)^.g
jPUBUC i^KSAJR1!

ASTOft» LENOX AND

J2J£EN_TOONQAT|ONat

1
 no Regulations
When the Regiment has finifhed the fecond
round, the commanding Officer gives the word,
Take care to charge by Divifions advancing!
the right flank begins !
Charge !
upon which the Captain commanding the General's
Squadron,
Divifion! Make ready! March-t Prefent ! Fire !
When the firft Divifion is marched out, the Cap
tain upon the left, gives the word, Divifion I
When the firft fires, the fifth makes ready,
marches out, prefents and fires ; and fo on, the
fecond, fourth, and laftly the third.
When the third Divifion has fired, the firft be
gins again, and fo on as before, every Officer
taking care not to make ready till his preceding
Divifion has fired, that three, or at leaft two Di
vifions may always remain loaded.
When the Regiment has fired two rounds by
Divifions advancing, the Colonel, or commanding
Officer gives the word,
Halt ! The whole Battalion face to the right
about !
Take care to charge by Platoons retreating !
the right flank begins !
Charge !
The Captain upon the right then begins, and
gives the word,
Platoon ! To the right about I Make ready !
Prefent I Fire !
When
 [To face p. 1 1 1.J

THE FIRINGS
b y
DIVISIONS, Retreating;
t. 2. 3. 4. 5-
Divifion !
To the right | |
about ! | {
Make ready! | | | Divifion !
| To the right
Prefent I
j about !
Kire ! | Divifion ! | Make ready!
To the right 1 |n , .
I about! 5 | |Prefent!
Make ready! | | Divifion ! Fire I
Prefent ! \ 1° th,e riSht
| about !
| Fire ! | Divifion ! | Make ready ! |
| To the right
Prefent !
j about !
Divifion ! | Make ready! | Fire !
To the right
i Prefent ! j
about !
Make ready! 1 Fire ! | Divifion I
Prefent ! 1 | To the ngn1
| about !
Fire ! Divifion ! | j Make ready!
To
about! L 1|
the right L ,
j Prefent? '

Make ready! | | Divifion ! | Fire !

Prefent ! \ T° lh? r,Sht j
| about !
Fire ! | Divifion ! | Make ready i j
1 To the right [ n r i ~~
(about! & fPrefent! |
| Make ready! | Fire ! |
I Prefent ! |
I | Fire !
s
i^DBUu
y

n
 for ^Dragoons. in
"When the firft Platoon comes about, the Cap- ,
tain upon the left gives the word, Platoon !
"When the firft makes ready, the tenth comes
about.
When the firft fires, the tenth prefents and fires.
When the firft makes ready, the fecond receives
the word, Platoon ! and fo on in the fa,me fuccef-
five order through the whole, from right and left
to the center.
When the fixth has fired, the firft begins again,
and is followed by the others : And when the fe
cond round is finifhed, the commanding Officer
gives the word,
Take care to, charge by Divifions retreating!
the right flank begins !
Charge !
Which is to be performed twice round in the fame
manner as by Platoons retreating, with this ex
ception, that noDivifion is to make ready till the
preceding one has fired ; care being taken at the
fame time, that two Divifions are always kept
fhouldered, and three loaded.

PART
112 Regulations

PART V.

CHAP. I.
Regiments at a Review , or at the
opening of a Campaign to be al
ways complete.
Ariidt i.
AT Reviews in times of peace, or at the
opening of a Campaign, every Regiment
ihall be always complete under arms, in Officers,
eon com miffioned Officers, and private Men ; nor
lhall any Colonel fuffer a deficiency in his Regi
ment, of either nun or horfe, on pain of being
cafhiered.
Art. 2. At a Review, or at the opening of a
Campaign, every Squadron muft be compofed of
the following numbers :
6 Commiffioned Officers ;
12 Non commiffioned Officers ;
3 Drummers i
132 Dragoons;
1 Farrier;
1 Surgeon ;
J48 Horfes, exclufive of the commiffioned Offi
cers' horfes.
Thus
 for the Drag <voJN'S." 113

Thus every Regiment under arms will confequent-

iy have,
32 Commiffioned Officers, including the two
Adjutants., pne of .which is appointed to
.the General's Sguadfpfl, i>n& ithe other to
the Major** ;
16o Non-comjaiiffioned Officers;
15 Drummers ;
660 Dragoons ;
5 Farriers ;
74rS Horfes. *-
'N.B. The Kettje^rumrnsr -and Hautboys are ap
pointed to the General's Squadron.

Art. 3. A Regiment of ten Squadrons is to

coniift of the following numbers under arms :
64 Commiffioned Officers ;
120 Non- commiffioned Officers;
30 Drummers ;
1320 Dragoons;
10 Farriers ;
1480 Horfes.
The Kettle-drummer and Hautboys are alfo appointed
to the General's Squadron.

Art. 4. The Men are required to be in perfect

health, and the beft order, nor muft any Invalids,
or fuch as are become incapable of doing the irduty,
be fttffered to continue in a Regiment, for which
the Colonel fhall be anfwerable ; neither fhall any
H be
ii4 Regulations
be entertained under the age of 25 years, but
fuch only as are grown to maturity, and of vi
gorous conftitutions.
The Horfes are alfo to be conftantly preferved
in fit condition for fervice ; and the Colonel fhall
be in like manner refponfible, that he keeps none
in the Regiment, which are any ways diftem-
pered.

ffi* The two fucceeding Chapters which finifh this

Part of the Dragoon- Regulations, are lite
rally the fame as the two laft of Part IV.
of the Horfe.

REGU-
 #( o )# 1 15

REGULATIONS
FOR THE

PRUSSIAN
HUSSAR S.

PART I.

CHAP. I.

A Regiment of HufTars confifts of ten Squa*

drons, containing the following number
of Officers, non commiffioned Officers, in
ferior Staff-Officers, and Private Men.

H 2 Princi-
n6 Regulations
N». of
I Perfons.
General, or Colonel .
Principal i Licutenanc-Colonel .
Staff-Offitcers.
{i Major

i Quarter-mafter .
i Surgeon-major .
Inferior 10 Surgeons . . . 26
Staff-Officers. 10 Farriers . . .
2 Gunfmiths . .
2 Stock- makers .

g Captaias, including-*
the two Captain- 1
Commiffioned Lieutenants . .*33
Officers.
{ 14 Lieutenants . . .1
10 Cornets ... .J
8 Non- commiffioned
123

Non-commif- Officers pr. Squa

fioned Officers,
andTrumpeters

Private
1 dron
i Trumpeter pr. Squa
dron
102 pr. Squadron
. .
.
• 90

. 1020

Effectives Total 1172

N. B. The fix extraordinary Lieutenants are appointed

to the fix eldeft Squadrons.

CHAP.
 for the Prufilaa Hussa&s. 117

CHAP. M.
The manner of forming, and fizing a
Regiment of Hussars in Squa
drons.
Article 1.
THE Squadrons are to be drawn up in three
ranks, and always told off in three Divi-
fions ; the center-divifion is to conflft of twelve
files, and the other two of eleven only.

Art. 2. As foon as the Squadrons are formed,

the Officers, and non commuTioned Officers poft
themfelves about fix paces in the front of the Re
giment in fingle ranks ; the non-commiffioned
Officers drawing up in the rear of the Officers.
Every Captain is then to examine the number
of files, and to appoint the Officers and non-cqm-
miffioned Officers, after which he returns to his
former poft in the front, and gives the word of
command,
Draw your Swords !
Officers, and non.commiffioned Officers march t»
your fofis !

Art. 3. The Officers are pofted as follows :

A Squadron having four Captain
ir Officers, the Capt
marches at the head of
H 3 . the
ii8 Regulations
the firft Divifion, and the eldeft Lieutenant
in the rear : The fecond Lieutenant at the
head of
the fecond ; and the Cornet at the head of
the third. :
A Squadron having only three Officers, the Cap
tain leads
the firft Divifion, and the Lieutenant marches
in its rear : The Cornet leads
the fecond ; and the Quarter-mafter
the third.

Art. 4. The eight non-commiffioned Officers

are pofted in the following manner :
One non-commiffioned Officer upon the right
flank of the firft Divifion ;
One upon the right of the fecond ;
One upon the right of the third ;
One upon the left of the third ;
One in the rear of the firft ;
One in the rear of the fecond ;
Two in the rear of the third.
N. B. Only one non-commiffioned Officer can march
in the rear of a Squadron, which has but three Offi
cers to it, becaufe the Quarter-mafter leads the third
Divifion.

Art. 5. The Trumpeters march in the front,

and the Surgeons and Farriers on the flanks of their
refpective Squadrons.

Art. 6. When the Squadrons are told off in

the manner above defcribed, and are to march off,
the
 for the Pruffian Hussars." 119
the Colonel, and inftantly after him every Captain
gives the word of command to his refpective
Squadron, as follows :
Center- and Rear -ranks, move forward to clofe
order !
March !
and after the rear- ranks have clofed, to his firft
Divifion,
March !

Art. 7. Great care muft be taken in marching

that the ranks and files keep well clofed,and that the
wheelings, whether by Squadrons or Divifions, are
performed with the utmoft celerity : When the
Divifions in front quicken their march, thofe in
the rear muft do the fame, that the whole may
preferve their ranks drefied, and at equal diftances.

Art. 8. In wheeling to the right, the Men are

to caft their eyes to the left, and come about as
quick as poflible ; and in wheeling to the left,
they muft look to the right : The commanding
Officer, when his Divifion is to wheel, muft give
the word aloud,
Haiti
Wheel !
upon which the Men are inftantly to caft their
eyes to the flank which wheels, and as foon as
they are come about, the word of command is
given,
Bait !
Drefs !
H 4 upon
120 RE&ffLATroNJ
upon which the Squadron, or Divifion doles front
the right and left flank to the center ; and after
it is properly dreflTed, the Officer gives the word
again,
March !
N. B. The rear-ranks muft keep up as clofe as pof-
fible, and the Divifions be very careful to preferve
their proper dlftance*, that whenever they are or
dered to wheel to the left, and form, they may do
it at once, without having occafion to muffle, or
make the leaft movement, after they have taken up
tiheir ground.
When the Squadrons form, aiv interval1 of thirty paces.
mull be left between each.

ArP. 9. The General's, or Colonel's Squadron.

takes poft upon the right flank ; the next eldeft,
upon* the left -y and fo on the others, according to
feniority, from right and left to the center.

Art. to. The Men are to caft their eyes ftea-

dily (6 the right ; and, in an engagement, to
leave an interval1 of eight paces between the ranks j
they mull alfo cake care to keep their files well
clofed, and to have no openings but for the non-
commiflioned Officers in the front-rank.

CHAP.
 for the Pnjffian. Hussars. 12 \

CHAP. III.
Concerning the Review of a Regiment
of Hussars, and their Exerche on
horfeback.
Article 1.
AT the King's arrival, the Colonel,and every
commanding Officer gives the word to his
refpective Squadron,
Draw your Swords !
and after his Majefty has reviewed them ftarrding,
Center- and rear'ranksy move forward to clofe
order !
March !
By Divifions march !
upon which the firft Divifion marches off in the
following order :
i. the Trumpeter ;
2. the General, or Colonel, at the head of
the firft Divifion ;
3. the Lieutenant, at the head of the fecond ,
4. the Cornet, at the head of the third ;
5. the Captain-Lieutenant in the rear. .
N. 6. All the Squadrons are t» folhw in the fame
order.
Art. 2.
122 Regulations
Art. 2. After every Squadron has marched part
by Divifions, and the word of command is given,
Fcrm Squadrons !
the Divifions are to march up in full gallop, the !
fecond forming upon the right of the firft, and
the third upon the left of it.

Art. 3. After the Regiment has marched paft

by Squadrons, and is formed again, the General,
or Colonel moves into the front of the center, and
gives the word of command,
By fours to the right-about !
By fours to the right-about, as you were !
By whole Squadrons wheel to the right about ■'
By whole Squadrons to the right about , as you
were I
By whole Squadrons wheel to the left- about !
By whole Squadrons to the left-about, as yen
were !
N. B, The flank which wheels is always to come
about in full gallop ; and the Squadron mufr. take
care to preferve an even front, and to keep the ranks
and files well clofed.

Art. 4. After the wheelings are performed, the

commanding Officer gives the word,
Charge by Divifions !
upon which the firft Divifion of every Squadron
moves forward infullgallop,and forms in two ranks,
letting their fabres hangover their wrifts : The firft
rank fires their carbines ; after that, the fecond ad
vances
 jor the Pruffian Hussars. 123
varices before the firft, and fires theirs ; then the
firft rank advances before the fecond, and fires one
piftol ; after which, the fecond advances before
the firft, and does the fame ; then the firft rank
advances again, and fires the fecond piftol ; which
is alfo followed and performed in like manner by
the fecond rank ; but great care muft be taken in
the performance of this evolution, that the Huflars
don't difcharge their pieces behind one another,
and fo deftroy themfelves.
N. B. When the firft Divifions gallop back to join
the Regiment again, they are to draw up in the rear
of the fecond Divifions of their refpeftive Squadrons,
there to load their carbines and piftols, and then
move up to the right of the fecond Divifions, and
drefs in a ftraight line: The men are not required,
after they have performed the charge, to fall exactly
into their proper places again, but only into their
former ranks.

Art. 5. After the firft Divifion of every Squa

dron has charged, the fecond of every Squadron
is to form two deep, which is to be done by the
rear-rank doubling up in fuch a manner, that
the fix right-hand men become divided upon the
right of the front- and center-rank, and the fix
left-hand men upon the left of the front- and cerj-
ter-rank.
N. B. Detachments, or Squadrons of HulTars muft be
always formed two deep, when they engage the ene-
. my ; for which reafon, after they have performed,
at a Review, their wheelings by fours, and whole
Squadrons, they are to go through their manoeuvres
in two ranks ; the firft Divifion therefore, after they
have
124 Regulations
have charged', muft consequently fall into the Re
giment again in that order.

Art. 6. As foon as the firft Divifions have

fired their carbines, and both piftols, and begin
their retreat, the third Divifions are to move out,
and perform their charge in the fame manner.

Art. 7. When the third Divifions have fired

rfieir carbines and piftols, and begin their retreat,
the fecond Divifions are to advance about thirty
paces upon a gallop fword in hand, at which
diftance they are to raife themfelves off their
faddles, and make a ftroke ; their charge being
to fecond that of the third Divifions, and alfo to
cover their retreat.
The third Divifions draw up brifkly in the rear
of the firft Divifions of their refpective Squadrons,
]oad their carbines and piftols, and afterwards
move up to the left of the fecond Divifions, and
drefs in a ftraighl line.

Art. 8. The commanding Officer is then to

give the word,
Two center-fquadrotiSy march forwards !
upon which the two eenter-fquadrons form in four
troops, leaving an interval of thirty paces between
each, and move, upon a trot, in a ftraight line
forwards to the diftance of about 600 paces, where
the commanding Officer of every Troop gives the
word,
Halt !
Drefs t
 for the Pruffian Hossars. 12 $
To the right-about wheel by fours !
upon which they wheel about, and then ftand faft,
the rear-ranks making a front towards the other
Squadtons.
Art. 9. The General, or Colonel then gives
the following word of command,
Prepare to charge by Squadrons from the flanks !
upon which the commanding Officers of the firft
and fecond Squadron upon the right flank, and
thofe of the ninth and tenth upon the left flank,
give the word,
Marcht.
To the right and left wheel by Divifions !
March !
upon which the Divifions wheel on a brifk trot,
and afterwards gallop, one behind another, to
the right and left of the four Troops, which re-
prefent the enemy, to the diftanee of about 400
paces from their hanks.
N. B. The Squadrons, before they reach the flank of
the enemy in moving out to charge, are to detach a
few files from their third Divifions, who, difperfing
themfelves round about, are to annoy the enemy,
and gain time for the Squadrons to form oppofite to
their flanks.

Art. 10. When the four Squadron have gal

loped fo far, that the fecond from each flank,
comes oppofite by Divifions to the flank of the
four Troops which reprefent the enemy ; and the
firft is fo lar advanced, as to command their rear,
the
 126 Regulations
the commanding Officers give the word to their
refpective Squadrons as follows :
<r th nfft \ w^ee^ and form '* Squadron /

Art. 1 1. When the Squadrons are formed, the

commanding Officers are to detach fix files from
the right of every Squadron, who, difperfing them-
felves round about the enemy, are to attack them
in flank and rear, and fire their piftols : After
•which they are to retreat to their refpective Squa
drons, and the fix next files are to be detached,
and to difcharge their piftols at the enemy in the
fame manner : This method of attack muft be
continued till a march is founded, and they are
to charge in Squadron,
- N. B. The files, which are detached againft the ene
my, are always, when they retreat, to fall in upon
the left of their refpedlive Squadrons.

Art. 12. When the four flank-fquadrons detach

their files againft the enemy, the four Squadrons
which ftood fall, muft each likewife detach fix
files from the right flank of their firft Divifion,
who are to dilperfe themfelves about the enemy,
and to fire their piftols in the manner before di
rected for the o;her files ; and the Squadrons muft
advance, fword in hand, after them, at the diftance
of about 200 paces, and at a moderate pace,
waiting till they obferve the enemy give ground,
and fall into confufion ; immediately upon which,
a march is lounded, and all the Squadrons, both
from front and flanks, fword in hand, and fetting
up a fhout, make the grand charge, galloping ac
full

■
/
 for the Pruffian Hussars. 127
full fpeed to within about twelve paces of the
enemy, at which diftance they are to raife them-
felves off their faddles, make a ftroke, and then
ftand faft.
N. B. When the fignal for a general attack is given
by founding a march, fingle files are no longer to
be detached againft the enemy, becaufe the charge
mull then be made by whole Squadrons.
The two center-fquadrons which reprefent the
enemy, are to ftand faft , without detaching any
files.

Art. 13. After the charge is thus over, the call

is founded, upon which the four Squadrons which
attacked the flanks of the enemy, go to the right
about by fours, and wheel, the firft and fecond
to the right, and the ninth and tenth to the left,
and retreat till they come to drefs in a llraight
line with the four front.fquadrons, where they
are to come to the right-about again as they were
by fours, and then ftand faft.

Art. 14. "When the call is founded, the two

center-fquadrons likewife, which were advanced
in the front to reprefent the enemy, are to march
into the Regiment again, and, when they come
in a ftraight line with the other Squadrons, they
are to halt, to come to the right-about as they
were by fours, and inftantly drefs their ranks to
the right.
The method of attack juft above defcribed, is
what the Huffars are to make ufe of againft re
gular Cavalry : It will be impoffible for an enemy,
when thus aflaulted at once in front, flank, and
. . rear,
128 Regulations
rear, to maintain his ground, or avoid falling in
to confufion.
The Huffars are never to engage with their
whole force at firft, but muft always keep a large
body in referve * and as foon as they perceive the
enemy fall in diforder, they are then to make the
general attack with all their fury, and totally de-
teat them.
N. B. When parties of Huflats are detached from the
Army, they muft be always furnifhed with fpades,
mattocks and hatchets, in order to be able to affift
themfelves upon emergencies. wliere fuch utenfils
fhall happen to become neceflary.

Art. 15. The Regiment being formed again,

the Colonel gives the word,
'Take care .the whole to march forwards !
every commanding'Officer is then to give the word
to his refpective Squadron,
Whole Squadron, march f
upon which the Squadrons move forward, on an
eafy trot ; at the diftance ©f about fifteen paces,
they fall into a briflc trot; afterwards into a foil
gallop, keeping that pace as far as from 90 to
120 paces, where they charge the enemy.
N. B. The Officer upon the right flank, muft look
well to the commanding Officer in the front of the
center, fo as not to advance too faft, and. every
Squadron caft their eyes to the right.
When a Regiment, or any greater number begin
their march on a trot, the commanding Officers of
Squadrons muft take great care that their refpecTive
Squa
 for the Pruffian Hussars. 129
Squadrons are never further advanced in front, than
thofe upon their right.

Art. 16. When the Squadrons arrive at the

above mentioned diftance, every commanding Of
ficer gives the word,
Halt !
Srefs !
upon which the whole halt at once, lift themfelves
off the faddle, and, raifing their fwords above
their heads, make a ftroke, finking down at the
fame time upon the faddle again.

Art. 17. The Colonel, or commanding Offi

cer then gives the word,
March !
upon which the whole difperfe to the front in full
gallop, excepting the commanding Officer, who,
together with the Trumpeter, ftands faft upon the
right of the ground from which the Squadrons
difperfed ; and, after a few minutes, orders the
Trumpeter to found the call, upon which the men
rally inftantly, and draw up in their refpective
ranks to the left of the Trumpeter, but are not
to regard either their proper Divifions, or right-
hand men, that they may be able to form the
fooner.
N. B. When the call is founded, the Squadrons are to
form three deep again, becaufe, after this evolution,
they are not to charge any more : And the private
men muft be ftri&ly enjoined to be very attentive
to the fignal for forming, at which every one is to
gallop back at full fpeed, and fall into his refpective
I rank
 130 Regulations
rank and Squadron, as quick as he poffibly can, it
not being neceflary, as is before obferved, to regard
either his former Divifion, or right-hand man : And
his Majefty, at Reviews, will take particular notice,
whether Regiments form, after they receive the fignal
for it, with that celerity which he expects.

Art. 18. The commanding Officer, as foon as

Nthe Regiment is formed, gives the word as fol
lows,
Halt !
Drefs !
Return your Swords !
Difmount !
the rear-ranks rein brifkly back to former diftance,
return their carbines, difmount as quick as poffible,
link their horfes without waiting perceptibly for
one another, unftrap their carbines, and, moul
dering them, march into the front together.
N. B. The horfes are to be linked in the following
manner ; every man ties the reins of his bridle to
thofe of his right hand man by a running knot,
about a fpan's length from the bit.
When the Squadrons difmount at Reviews, their
horfes muft be taken care of by Burghers, or Coun
trymen.

CHAP.
 for the Pruffian Hussars. 131

CHAP. IV.
The Exercife on foot at a Review.
. Article 1.
WHEN the Squadrons have marched clear
of their horfes, the firft and fecond are to
incline to the left, the fourth and fifth to the
right, and clofe up to the third ; the fixth and
feventh are, in like manner, to incline to the left,
the ninth and tenth to the right, and clofe to the
eighth ; all which muft be performed running.
N. B. As it is not material amongft the Huffars,
whether their ranks are fized or not, the eldeft there
fore, and fuch as can be mod depended upon, shall
be always pofted in the front-rank.

Art. 2. When the Squadrons have clofed to

their center, the General, or Colonel in the front
of the five right Squadrons, and the Lieutenant-
Colonel in the front of the five left Squadrons,
give the word of command to their refpe&ive
wings, as follows :
Prepare to charge !
N. B. As the Huflars have their carbines already loaded,
the next word of command is,

Rear-ranks clofe to the Front !

March !
I 2 at
132 Regulations
at which the Captains fall in upon the right flanks
of their Squadrons, and the eldeft Lieutenants
upon the right flanks of their fecond Divifions,
thofe belonging to the fifth and tenth Squadrons
excepted, the Captains of which are to fall in
upon the left flanks, and their eldeft Lieutenants
upon the right ; and one Lieutenant, or Cornet
upon the right of each fecond Divifion.

CHAP. V.

Manner of performing the Firings.

Article 1.
AFTER the Regiment is formed in clofe
order for the Firings, the Colonel gives the
word of command as follows, to the five right
Squadrons, which are told off in ten Platoons,
and the Lieutenant-Colonel to the five left ; which
are alfo told off" in the fame order :
Take care to charge by Platoons {landing ! the
right flank begins !
upon which the commanding Officers of Platoons
ftep out three paces forwards, and face to the left
towards their Platoons, excepting the Captains
who command the fifth and tenth Squadrons, who
are to face to the right.

Art. 2.
 51

.'
THE NEW YORK,
PUBLIC LIBRARY

ASTOR, LENOX AND

TILDEN FOUNDATIONS.
 [To face p. 133.]
ANDIN Q.
8. 10.

|
- Platoon !

Make ready !

Platoon ! Prefent !

Make ready ! Fire !

Platoon ! Prefent !

Make ready ! Fire !

Prefent!

-
 for the Pruflian Hussars. 133
Art. 2.
Charge !
The Officers then proceed to give the word of
command, as follows :
The Captain who commands the Colonel's
Squadron,
Platoon !
Make ready!
Prejent !
Fire !
When the Captain commanding the firft Pla
toon, gives the word, Make ready ! the Captain
commanding the tenth, gives the word, Platoon !
When the firft Platoon prefents, the tenth makes
ready.
When the firft has fired, the tenth prefents and
fires.
. When the firft prefents, the Officer commanding
the fecond, gives the word, Platoon !
When the firft fires, the fecond makes ready.
When the tenth has fired, the fecond prefents
and fires ; and fo on, one Platoon after another
from right and left to the center fucceffively :
When the fixth, or laft Platoon has fired, the firft
is to begin again, and the fame to be repeated till
the whole have fired four times : And every Of
ficer, as foon as his Platoon has fired the laft
time, and moulders, muft ftep back' into his for
mer poft again, and drefs with the front-rank.
N. B. The Officers muft be very careful to fire in re
gular and fucceffive order,, and likewife to keep five
Platoons always loaded, which, as each wing of the
I 3 Regi
134 Regulations
Regiment is told off in ten, may be done without
much difficulty.

Art. 3. After the Regiment has fired four

times round by Platoons, the Parapet-firing is to
be performed, for which the following word of
command is given,
Officers, and non commiffioned Officers, take cart
to perform the Parapet -firing !
At the firft word of the foregoing command, the
Officers who command Platoons, ftep two files
down, and face to the right.
A non-commiflioned Officer of thofe who are
polled in the rear, marches into the front-rank of
his Platoon, two files below the center, and faces
likewife to the right.

Art. 4. When the commanding Officer gives

the word to fire, the Officers and non commif
fioned Officers command the two firft files, March !
and ftep out brifkly five paces forward ; the right-
hand man in the center-rank runs to the right of
the front ; and the two in the rear, to the right
of the center.

Art. 5. The Officers and non-commiflioned

Officers then proceed, as follows :
Make ready !
Prefent !
Fire !
When the two firft files prefent, the two next,
of their own accord, make ready ; and when the
two firft have fired, the word, March ! is given,
at
 for the Prufllan Hussars. 135
at which the two firft files fall back into the Re
giment, and the two next at the fame time ftep
forward, and fo on through the whole, as often as
they are to fire ; but in thofe Platoons, in which
the number of files is not even, the laft file muft
fire alone, in a fingle rank ; and every Platoon
muft fire from right to left.
N. B. Officers who are in the rear of Platoons, muft
always march into the front-rank, to perform the
Parapet- firing; and good non-commiffiorced Officers
muft take pofl in fuch Platoons, as have no Officers
in their rear.

Art. 6. As foon as the two files have fired, they

immediately form three deep again, come brifkly to
their recover, and half cock ; at the wordyMarcb !
they fall nimbly, and well clofed,into the Regiment
again, feizing, at the fame time, and biting off the
top of their cartridge ; as foon as they have fallen in,
they come to the pofition of levelling their carbines,
prime, caft about to charge, and, as foon as they
have loaded, and returned their rammers, they ad
vance their carbines before their left fhoulders,
bringing up at the fame time their right feet to a
line with their left ; after which they fhoulder
together, and ftand quite fteady.
N. B. The files muft incline a little to the right, in
marching out to fire, that the two next may have
fufficient room, without running through one ano
ther ; they muft alfo drefs to the right, and not
march out further than thofe of the firft Platoon.

Art. 7. The files muft prefent, and afterwards

half-cock together ; it is necefiary therefore they
I 4 fhould
136 Regulations
ihould be very attentive to the word of command :
The Officers muft alfo forbid all talking, and
take care that every thing be performed in regu
lar order.

CHAP. VI.
Of paffing in Review.
Article 1.
AFTER the Regiment has performed the
Parapet-firing twice round, the word of
command is given as follows :
Rear -ranks open backwards to your former
diftance !
March !
As the rear- ranks open, the Officers are to ftep
out into the front again ; and as foon as the files
are drefied and fteady, the following word of
command is given,
Sling your Carlin&s !
at which the carbines are to be flung over the left
fhoulder, in the fame manner as performed by the
Dragoons, when they are to mount.
Draw your Swords !
this word of command is performed, as on horfe-
back.
Rear-
 for the Pruffian Hussars. 137
Rear-ranks clofe to the front !
March !
March by Divi/ions!
upon which the Squadrons wheel by Divifions,
and march off in the rear of the firft Squadron,
in the fame manner as on horfeback : When they
have marched by the King, and taken up their
former ground again, the Recruits are to be or
dered out, and formed in the front.

Art. 2. Every commanding Officer of a Squa

dron is to march by the King at the head of his
own Recruits ; and after they have been re
viewed, and have joined their Squadrons again, the
Colonel, and Lieutenant-Colonel give the word as
follows to their refpective wings :
Return your Swords !
$0 the right-about !
March !
upon which the Squadrons run to their horfes,
and as foon as they ftand properly ported by their
fides :
Mount !
which word of command is to be performed
without regular motions, and with all poflible
celerity.
Art. 3. When the Huflars are mounted again,
the Colonel, or commanding Officer orders out
the grand-guard, and afterwards marches the re
mainder of the Regiment in regular order into
their quarters.
CHAP.
138 Regulations

CHAP. VII.

Of the particular Duties on which

Hussars are to be employed.
Article 1.
HUSSARS are to be employed in recon
noitring the enemy, and difcovering his
motions ; and, as often as Officers are detached
on fuch commands, all that will be required of
them, is, to make their obfervations with cer
tainty, fo as not to deceive the commanding Of
ficer afterwards by falfe intelligence ; they are
moreover, on fuch parties, to avoid engaging
with the enemy, as being fent out for a different
purpofe.
Art. 2. Huflars are alfo to be made ufe of for
the diftant advanced-pofts, to prevent the army
from being falfely alarmed, or furprifed by the
enemy.
The Officers on fuch pofts are in a particular
manner required to render themfelves judges of
their fituation, and to poft their fentries in the
moft proper places.
Art. 3. Small patroles, compofed of Huflars
are to be kept going round the army, in order to
prevent defertion, particular care being taken, that
one patrole conftantly fucceds another, fo as to
render it impoflible for any thing to efcape them.
Art. 4.
 for the Pruflian Hussars. 139
Art. 4. Parties of Huflars are alfo to be fent
out, to diftrefs the enemy, by depriving them of
forage and provifions ; by furprifing their con
voys, attacking their baggage, harafling them on
their march, cutting off fmall detachments, and,.
in fhort, by feizing all opportunities to do them
as much damage as they poflibly can.

Art. 5: Huflars are moreover to be employed

in railing contributions; and when the army
marches, they are to compofe the advanced-guard ;
reconnoitring the front and flanks carefully, and
fending intelligence to the Commander in chief
in good time, whenever they difcover any kind
of danger.
They are Jikewife to form the rear-guard, and
to cover the baggage of the Army.

CHAP. VIII.
Of marching and wheeling.
Article 1.
REGIMENTS of Huflars are to march off
their ground by the right flank, in the fame
manner as the Horfe and Dragoons do ; and the
Colonel, or commanding Officer is to give the
word for it, as follows :
Center-
140 Regulations
Center- and rear-rank , move forward to clofe
order !
To the right wheel by Divifionsf
March !
When a Regiment is marching by Divifions, and
is to form in Squadrons, the word of command
for it is given,
Form Squadrons !
upon which the firft Divifion of every Squadron
is to incline upon a trot fo far to the right, that
the fecond can march up in a direct line upon a
trot alfo ; but the third is to incline to the left,
and move up in full gallop.

Art. 2. When a Regiment, or Squadron is to

reduce, the word of command for it, is :
Form Divifions ! >
upon which the firft Divifion of every Squadron
moves forwards on a gallop fo far as to allow
room for the fecond to draw up in its rear ; the
firft inclining at the fame time in fuch manner as
to cover the fecond : As foon as the Squadrons
are reduced, and the Divifions have got their
proper intervals, they are to fall into their ordi
nary pace again.

C H AP.
 for the Pruflian Hussars. 141

CHAP. IX.

Of Action.

Article 1.
IN general, the HufTars muft regulate their con-
dud: in action, by the orders which they are
to receive the day before for that purpofe, from
his Majefty, or the General who commands in
chief.
Art. 2. The Officers muft acquire an abfolute
authority over their men, and never fufFer them
to attack the enemy, or to break, under any pre
tence whatfoever, before they receive orders for
it ; to which they are always to pay the ftricteft
obedience, and to execute them, upon every oc-
cafion, with the utmoft alacrity.

Art. 3. After the action is over, every Regi

ment muft furnifh two Officers, two non-commif-
fioned Officers, and twenty men ; who are to col
lect their wounded, and to convey them to the
neareft villages, there to be taken care of till a
general hofpital is appointed, and they can be re
moved.

What
142 Regulation!

What remains, laftly, to be obferved, is, that

the Huflar Regiments, in all other particulars,
both relating to the fervice in camp, and garri-
fon , are ftrittly to be governed by the Regula
tions for the Horfe and Dragoons, and to obey
every Article therein fet forth, with all prompti
tude and exactnefs.

REGU-
REGULATIONS
FOR THE

CAVALRY.
144 Regulations

PART V.
O F
«

Field-Duty.

CHAP. I.
Of the Decampment and March of
an Army.
Article i.
WHEN the Army is to decamp, the * Horfe
muft found to boot and /addle when the
Infantry beat the general^ and the Gene-
nerals of the day are to take care that thefe fignals
are given at the time ordered.
N.B. All the Regiments off Horfe in both lines are
to found to boot and /addle together ; when the In
fantry

* The Dragoont are to beat the genera!, and affimbly

together with the Infantry.
■f- All the Regiments of Dragoons in both lines are to beat
the general together ; when the Infantry therefore give
the fignal for it, the Drummer belonging to the Stan
dard-guard of that Regiment which is encamped upon
the
 /or the Cavalry. 14^
fantry therefore give the fignal for the general, the
Trumpeter belonging to the Standard-guard of that
Regiment which is encamped neareft, muft found
the call, and the Trumpeters of all the other Stan
dard-guards muft be attentive to take the fignal from
him, and found the fame ; upon which, the Trum
peters of the whole Regiment are to aflemble in the
front of the Standards, and found to boot and faddle
to the right flank ; from the right flank to the left ;
and from the left flank, back to the front of the
Standards again.
The Trumpeters are to begin, and. leave off found
ing together, they muft all therefore take care to
be in readinefs before-hand, and thofe of one Re
giment be attentive to thofe of another.

T Art. 2. After to boot andfaddle is founded,

the rolls are to be called, the men to make ready
for the decampment, to faddle their horfes, and
to pack up their baggage ; afterwards, when the
the right, muft: alfo do the fame ; and the Drummers
of all the other Standard-guards muft be attentive to
. follow the fignal from him ; upon which the Drum-
' mers of the whole Regiment are to aflemble in the
front of the Standards , and to beat to the right
flank ; &c. as in the Horfe.
The Drummers are to begin, and leave off beating
together, 8cc.
■J- Art. 2. After the beating of the general, the rolls are
to be called, the men to make ready for the decamp
ment, to faddle their horfes, and to pack up their
baggage: Afterwards, when the affembly is beat, the
tents are to be ftruck, the horfes to be bridled, and the
Squadrons to be drawn up in two Angle ranks on the
fides of their refpecHve ftreets ; the right-Half of the
front- center - and rear-rank on one fide, and the left--
halves of the fame on the other. Dragoon-Regulations.

K Infan
146 Regulations
Infantry beat the affembly, the horfes are to be
bridled, and the troops drawn up in their re-
fpective ftreets, the front-rank upon the flanks,
next to that the center, and next to the center, the
rear-rank.
N. B. As his Majefty has obferved that the Cavalry
have not fufficient time to pack up their baggage, if
they don't begin to ftrike their tents before the beat
ing of the ojfembly ; fo they are permitted to ftrike
their tents immediately after they found * to boot and
« /addle ; but the commanding Officers of Regiments
ihall be anfwerable, that every man packs up his
baggage properly, and that their Regiments are in
readinefs to march off at the fame time with the In
fantry.
General Officers' guards, and orderly Officers, or
Men, are to march off when f to boot and faddle is
founded.

XArt. 3. When the Troops are drawn up in the

ftreets in the order above defcribed, the Standard-
guard marches off; the Standard-bearers take
hold of the Standards, and ftand fall in that por
tion till the Colonel gives the word of command
;to mount.
N. B. When the Colonel commanding the Regiment
upon the right, gives the word to mount, the com-
, ^ DP. ..... .•

* ——immediately after the general, Sec. Dragoon.Re-

gulations.
\ . when the general beats. Drag. Regul.
J Art. 3. When the Squadrons are formed in the ftreets
in the above order, the ftandard- and rear-guards are to
march off; 8cc. Drag. Regul.
manding
 for the Cavalry.' 14,7
manding Officers of all the Regiments in both lines
muft be careful to do the fame.

t Art. 4. When the Regiments are mounted,

and the firft Troop belonging to the firft Regi
ment
■fArt.4.. When the Regiments are mounted, and the
firft Squadron of the firft Regiment upon the right
marches out on the parade, all the Squadrons of every
Regiment in both lines are to do the lame, the Colo
nels giving the word of command,
To the right and left march by fives !
at which the Squadrons march out in the following or
der. In the front of the right half-fquadron
Two Drummers ; behind them •
the Captain ; behind the Captain
two Officers ; behind the Officers
fix non-commiffioned Officers in a fingle rank ; and
behind them
the half-fquadron by fives.
In the front of the left half-fquadron
One Drummer ; behind the Drummer
the firft Lieutenant ; behind him
two Officers ; behind the Officers
fix non-commiffioned Officers in a fingle rank ; and
behind them
the half-fquadron by fives.

Art. 5 . After the right and left half-quarter-ranks

of every Squadron have wheeled to the right and left
from their refpective flanks, and marched out on the
parade, the next half-quarter-rank upon the right flank,
wheels to the left, and then to the right ; the next half-
quarter-rank upon the left flank, wheeling at the fame
time, firft to the right, and then to the left ; which
brings them both to a line, in which they march up to
their ground on the parade ; the remainder of the front-
K 2 rank,
148 Regulations
ment marches out on the parade, all the Troops
of every Regiment in both lines are to do the
fame, the Colonels giving the word of command,
ffo the right and left march by fives !
upon which the Troops march into the front in
the following order :
the Trumpeter ;
the Captain ; behind him
the two Subaltern-Officers ; behind the Sub
altern-Officers
the non-commiflioned Officers in a fingle
rank; behind them
the Troop by fives.
N. B, As foon as the whole has marched out on the
parade, the Standard-bearers are to mount together,
and immediately to join their refpeclive Squadrons.

Art. 5. When the firft quarter- ranks, or five

men-upon the right and left flarik of every Troop
have marched out on the parade, and ftand faft,
the next five from the right flank of the Troop,

rank, and after that the center- and rear-rank, per

forming the fame.
After the Squadrons have marched out on the parade,
every commanding Officer gives the word,
Officers, non-commijjioned Officers, and Drummers march
forwards !
at which they march before the center of the Squa
dron, the Officers in a fingle rank, the non-commiffioned
Officers in two ranks in the rear of the Officers ; and
the Drummers in the front of all, &£ Drag. Regal.
arc
 for the Cavalry. 149
are to wheel to the left, and then to the right ;
and at the fame time the next five from the left
flank, are to wheel to the right, and then to the
left, and both march up in a line to their ground ;
and fo on the remaining two quarter-ranks of the
front-rank ; after which the center- rank is to per
form the fame, and after that, the rear.
When the Troops have marched out on the
parade, every commanding Officer of a Squadron
gives the word,
Officers, non-commiffioned Officers and "Trumpeters
march forwards !
upon which they march before the center of the
Squadron, the Officers in a fingle rank, the non-
commiffioned Officers in two ranks, in the rear of
the Officers ; and the Trumpeters in the front of
all : The commanding Officer then completes the
files, tells off the Divifions, appoints the Officers,
and non-commiflioned Officers, and gives the
word,
March to your pojls !
at which they take their pofts.
N. B. Regiments are always to be formed in Squa
dron after this method.

Art. 6. When the Squadrons are thus formed,

every commanding Officer gives the word to his
refpective Squadron, to draw their fwords.
Art. 7. When the Infantry beat the march,
every commanding Officer gives the word to his
Squadron,
K 3 Center
ijjo Regulations
Center- and rear-ranks move forwards to clofe
order I
March!
after which they are to ftand faft, till ordered to
march off.
N. B. The Squadrons muft be very attentive to one
another's motions, that the whole may clofe their
rear-ranks to the front, together with the firft Squa
dron- upon the right.

Art. 8. When the Army is to march off, the

firft Squadron upon the right receives the word
of command,
To the right wheel by Divifions !
March !
and all the Squadrons in both lines muft obferve
well the firft Squadron, and take care to do the
fame together.
N. B. The (I Trumpeters are to found when the Squa
drons receive the foregoing word of command to
march.

Art. 9. When the Army has marched about

the diftance of hundred paces from its ground,
the [| Trumpeters are to found the fignal for re
turning fwords, and after that to leave off".
N. B. When the Men are to return their fwords on
the march, the || Trumpeters muft found the fignal
for it, upon which the Squadrons are to return their

I The Drummers are to beat, 8cc. Drag. Regul.

fwords
 for the C a'v a l r y. 151
(words at regular motions together , in like manner,
when they are to draw their fwords, the fignal for
it muft be given, and the motions performed to
gether.

Art. 10. In the paffage of all defiles, the com

manding Officers of Squadrons, muft take care
that the Men march clofe, and that they rank up,
and form brifkly as foon as they have paffed
through them ; the front-fquadron muft be alfo
mindful not to march too faft, fo that the whole
column may be always preferved in regular order.

Art. 11. When a column of Cavalry is ordered

to march up, and form by half- or whole fqua-
drons, it muft be performed by the whole column-
at once, if' the ground will permit; but where
there are defiles, the Squadrons are only to form,
as foon as they have pafied through them.

Art. 12. No Man muft be fuffered to leave his

Divifion, and in cafe any one has occafion to eafe
himfelf, the Officer commanding the Divifion to'
which he belongs, is to leave a non-commiflioned
Officer with him, who muft bring him up again ;
and all Officers fhall be anfwerable for any Men
wanting in their Divifions, when the Army ar
rives in camp.

Art. 13. When a Regiment has any prifoners,

they are to march in the rear on foot, leading
their horfes in their hands, and guarded by a
non-commiffioned Officer and fix Men ; if there
are any fick horfes in the Regiment, the prifoners
K 4 are
152 Regulations
arc to lead thofe, and their own to be rid by
others.

Art. 14. Every Squadron is to march in regu

lar order, whether by Divifions, by half- or whole
fquadrons, and muft keep their exact diftances,
according to the Directions given in the firft Part
of thefe Regulations.

Art. 15. The Lieutenant- and Major-Generals

are to march in the front of their brigades, and
to take care that every thing is ftrictly obferved,
both according to the particular difpofition of the
march, and the general orders of thefe Regu
lations.

Art. 16. The Brigade-majors, and all Officers

belonging to the Staff, are to attend the Com
mander in chief.

Art. 17. No Regiment mall be allowed to have

more than one chaife, and the waggon which
carries theftrong- box: The bat-horfes are to march
with their Regiments, and if any Regiments are
difcovered to have more carriages than their ap
pointed number, the Commander in chief fhall
order them to be plundered.

Art. 18. The Women mall not be fuffered to

appear with the Regiments on their march, but
muft be conducted by the Provoft-general, and
march out of camp before the Army, with the
Quarter-mallers.

Art. 19.
 for the Cavalry. 153
Art. 19. When the Army is to halt on its
march, the columns of Cavalry are to march up
by Squadrons clofe behind one another, and the
Men may then be permitted to difmount, but
riot to go far from their horfes ; if the Army
makes a long halt, and parties are detached to
water, Officers are to be ordered out with them ;
but they muft not be fuffered to go beyond the
diftance of 150 paces from the column at furtheft,
that when the Army breaks up, and the Men are
to mount, the whole may be at hand, and after
wards march off again in regular and complete
order.

CHAP. II.
Of an Army's March into a new En
campment.
Article 1.
WHEN the Army is to decamp, and march
into a new Encampment, the ftrength of
the Quarter-mafters' covering party, muft be de
termined by order from the Commander in chief:
The Quarter-mafter-major of every Regiment,
together with a + Quarter-mafter per Squadron,
and a Man per Troop, are to afiemble at the
t a Quarter-maller, and two Men per Squadron are
to afiemble, &c. Drag. Regul.
place
i54. Regulations
place appointed, in order to march off with the
covering party, and mark out the ground for rhe
Encampment.
The Quarter-mafter-majors are to bring the
Quarter- mafters and Men of their refpective Re
giments to the place of parade, to keep them to
gether upon the march, and be refponfible for
any who quit their party to maraude ; they mud
alfo march them in the order, in which their fe-
veral Regiments are to encamp i. and every Quar-
ter-mafter-major is to draw up the ten Men, ap
pointed to affiffc him in marking out the Encamp
ment, in three ranks, with one Quarter-matter on
the right flank, in the front-rank, and the re
maining three in the rear.
When any alarm happens, and there is a pro-
fpect of danger, the Quarter- reafters and their
Men, are to join the grand-guaids and covering
parties ; or, if the number of Officers on the fpot
is fufficient, the Quarter mafters are to draw up
their Men in feparate bodies by fives regimental-
ly, which the commanding General can regulate,
or difpofe as he thinks bell.
Art. 2. The actual Quarter-mafter-majors,
when their Regiments take the field, mutt march
with them, mark out their Encampments, and
do all their duty, as Quarter-mafters ; no Officer
therefore fhall be fuffered to do it for them.
N. B. The Quarter- matters fhall do all their proper
duty in the field, fuch as is the mounting of grand-
guards, ftandard-guards, and general Officers' guards.

Both
 for the C a v al r y. 15$
Both the Quarter-mafters belonging to a Squa
dron, are never to be ordered out on party together,
becaufe the Army may have occasion to march un
expectedly.

Art. 3. The Commander in chief is imme

diately to poft the neceffary grand- and village-
guards for the fecurity of the Army ; a commu
nication of double videts Irom one grand-guard
to another muft be alfo made, and fmall patroles
detached to reconnoitre, and prevent the enemy
from attempting to furprife any of the pofts.
Art. 4. Jf the enemy mould be difcovered, the
Quarter-mafters and their Men muft have imme
diate notice of it, in order ro fecure time to mount,
and to join the grand-guards and covering par
ties ; if it be a large body of the enemy, and the'
commanding Officer thinks it neceffary to collect
as much force as poffible, all the out-pofts and
guards muft be aflembled, and drawn up in order
of battle.
Art. 5. As foon as the Army arrives at the new
camp, the commanding Officers of Squadrons give
the word,
Draw your Swords!
upon which the * Trumpeters found, and the Re
giments march into their respective Encamp
ments, as marked out by their Quarter-mafters,
the Squadrons wheeling to the left by Divifions
to take up their ground.
* —» the Drummers beat, &c. Drag. Regal.
Art. 6.
156 Reg u l a t i o n s
Art. 6. When the firft Squadron of every Re
giment has taken up its ground, the Men are to
keep their fwords drawn, and the * Trumpeters to
found, till the whole Regiment is marched up,
after which the Colonel gives the word of com
mand,
Standard- and rear-guard march cut !
upon which a Cornet from every Squadron, to
gether with the -f Trumpeter, brings the Standard
to the center- fquadron ; the Men for guard, are,
at the fame time, to march out, to move regu
larly to the center, and draw up in two ranks, the
ftandard-guard forming the firft, and the rear
guard, the fecond ; after the guards are formed,
the Colonel gives the following words of com
mand,
Return your Swords !
The whole Regiment to the right -about byfours !
March f
upon which the t Trumpeters found the troop, and
the Regiment marches by Troops in regular or
der into the Encampment, firft the rear- rank, then
the center, and laftly the front.
N. B. All this is to be performed as quick as poflible,
in order to relieve the Men ; the guards are not to
return their fwords, till the Standards are planted.

* -—- the Drummers beat, &c. Drag. Regit!.

+ a Drummer, &c. Drag. Regul.
X the Drummers beat the troop, and the Regiment
marches by Squadrons, &c. Drag, Regul.

Art. 7.
 for the Cavalry. 157
Art. 7. When the Squadrons march by fours
into their refpective ftreets, the Men are to draw
up facing their tents in a rank entire, as they
are divided in meffes ; and after the whole Regi
ment has marched in, the Colonel gives the word
of command,
Difmount !
upon which the whole are to difmount together.
N. B. The Standard- and rear-guards go t6 the right
about by fours together with the Regiment ; and
after the Regiment has moved into its Encampment,
they march to the front of the center, where the
commanding Officer of the ftandard-guaid orders
the Standards to be planted, and the Kettle-drums
to be placed before them, for which purpofe, five
Men belonging to the center-fquadron muft be in
readinefs, to take the Standards from the Standard-
bearers : After theStandards are planted, the duty-men
march to their feveral Troops, or Squadrons, one Man
excepted, who is to difmount, and ftand fentry behind
the Standards, holding the center one in his hand ;
after the duty- men have difmounted, they are to
march to their guard, and the commanding Officer
of the ftandard-guard, as alfo the non-commiffioned
Officer commanding the rear-guard, draw up their
guards in a rank entire, and poft their fentries.

Art. 8. The old picquet is not to unfaddle

their horfes, after the Regiment has marched into
its Encampment, nor the Men to take off their
fwords, or to pull off their boots, but to remain
in their entire mounting, and not to leave the Re
giment ; afterwards, when the camp is pitched,
and the horfes have been once fed, the picquet of
every
 1^8 Regulations
every Regiment is to tarn out, and the com
manding Officer to march it to the right flank in
the front.
N. B. The picquets are not to turn out, till ordered
by the Commander in chief, who will make them
ftronger, or weaker, according as circumftances
may require.
' Art. 9. The rolls muft be called four times at
different hours, after the Army has marched into
a new camp, that no Man may have an opportu
nity to maraude, or otherwife abfent himfelf
without leave ; marauding muft be alfo prohibited
on pain of hanging.
N. B. On all pay-days likewife the rolls muft be called
a few times in the afternoon.

Art. 10. As foon as the Army has marched

into its ground, and the camp is pitched, the Ge
nerals of the day, as alfo the Commander in chief,
are to poft the proper grand-guards according to
fituation and circumftances, after which the co
vering parties of horfe and foot are to march in
to camp.

chap. in.
Of the Encampment of an Army.
Article 1.
AFTER the Regiments have marched into
their ground in the manner before directed,
the
 for the Cavalry. 159
the tents muft be immediately pitched in a re
gular and ftraight line, * fifteen to every Troop.
■N. B. The picquets for the horfes muft be alfo pitched
in a ftraight line, at the diftance of two paces from
the tents.
The Regiments on the left wing are not to en
camp to the left, but always to the right.

Art. 2. As it is his Majefty's pleafure that the

-j- Subaltern Officers of every || Troop fhall en
camp in the fame tent, they muft therefore not
be permitted to have feparate tents, but each is
to be pitched in a ftraight line in the rear of their
refpective || Troop : The effective Captains en
camp fifteen paces further back, with their tent-
doors facing the interval between the || Troop-
tents and the horfes.
Art. 3. The Field-Officers fhall encamp fifteen
paces in the rear of the Captains, oppofite to the
center of the ftreets of their Squadrons , in a
* —Thirty to every Squadron, fifteen being pitched on
each fide of every ftreet. Drag. Regul.
■\ The number of Officers' tents for a Regiment of Dra
goons, is no greater than that for a Regiment of Horie
according to the Regulations, which muft undoubtedly
be a miftake, as it is impoflible that five Officers (which
is the number of Subalterns to every Squadron) can en
camp with any manner of convenience or decency in
one tent ; efpecially as there appears to be no extra
ordinary allowance made in the fize of it : It may
therefore be prefumed, that there are two tents for the
Subaltern-Officers of every Squadron, pitched in the
rear of their refpeftive half-fquadrons.
H Squadron. Drag. Regul.
ftraight
l6o R EG ULATIONS
ftraight line with the Field-Officers and Captains
of the Infantry ; the Colonel, or commanding Of
ficer of the Regiment, in the rear of the center,
and the other Field-Officers in the rear of their
refpective Squadrons.
N. B. As the diftance from the laft company-tent in
the Infantry, to the Field- Officers' tents is fixty
paces ; but in the Cavalry, from the Subalterns' tents
to the Field-Officers, only thirty ; fo the interval
between the Officers' tents of the Infantry, is cOnfe-
quently thirty paces larger than between thofe of the
Cavalry, becaufe thirty paces more are allowed for
the depth of a Squadron, than of a Company : But
when the Encampment of Squadrons is not thirty
paces deeper than that of the companies of Infan
try, the intervals between the Officers' tents of the
Cavalry mult be larger.

Art. 4. The inferior Staff-Officers fhall encamp

fifteen paces in the rear of the Field Officers, in
a ftraight line with the inferior Staff Officers of
the Infantry ; the Quarter-mafter-major's tent to
be pitched in the center ; the Chaplain's and Soli
citor's on the right flank, and the Surgeon's on
the left.
N. B. The Chaplain and Solicitor are to encamp in
the fame tent.

Art. 5. The baggage of the Regiment fhall be

pitched fifteen paces in the rear of the inferior
Staff-Officers, and all the futtlers encamped twen
ty paces in the rear of the baggage ; the com
manding Officers are therefore to fuffer no futtling-
cr coffee- tents to be pitched in the front.

Art. 6.
 fir the CAVA.LtLTl.' 16 1
1 ,

Art. 6. The ftandard-guard-tentfhall be pitched

at the head of the center-fquadron-ftreet, in a
parallel line with the firft tent, and the rear-guard-
tent between the baggage and the futtlers : The
Standards fhall be planted five paces from the
guard- tent, and the Kettle-drums placed clofe be
fore them.
f N. B. The guards are not to have picqiiets for their
arms, but are to lay them over their curaffes.

Art. J. The King's head-quarters is between

the lines, in the center of the Infantry : All that
belong to the General-Staff" rauft be encamped at
head-quarters, as the Quarter-mafter general, the
Adjutant-General, the Brigade -Majors, and the
Engineers.

Art. 8. Field-Marflials, and Generals of the

Infantry and Cavalry, encamp in the Army, as
they ftand in the order of battle ; but the Lieute
nant- and Major'Generals encamp in the rear of
their refpective brigades.

f This N. B. omitted in the Dragoon- Regulations, and in-

ftead of it, the following :
N. B. The ftandard-guards are to have twelve picquets,
and the rear-guards eleven, fixed in a ftraight line
for the arms.
The Standards belonging to a Regiment confifting
of ten Squadrons are not to be planted in the front
of the interval between the two Battalions ; but
thofe of each in the front of their third Squadron
refpe&ively ; they are therefore to furnifti leparate
ftandard- and rear-guards. Drag. Reg.

L N.B.No
162 ..Regulations

N. B. No General-Officer fliall leave his poll, or

canton himfelf in any other than that which is af-
figned him, without his Majefty's permiffion, under
the penalty of paying 200 ducats to the Invalid-
fsnd -y but fuch Generals as are in a bad ftate of
health, are allowed to quarter themfelves in the moft
contiguous villages; neverthelefs , when they are
Generals of the day, they muft remain with their
refpeclive brigades.

t Art. 9. The depth of ground allowed for

Squadrons muft be fufficient both for the 74 horfes
of every Troop, and for the Lieutenant's and
Cornet's, which are to ftand in a line with thofe
of the Men , the diftance between the tents muft
be alfo equal, and an interval of five pates allowed
for the back-ftreets.
As foon as the Army has marched into camp,
and the tents are pitched, communications muft
be immediately made fr6m oneRegiment to another,
of a fufficient breadth for a wholeSquadron to march
through in front > but this is only required to be
J Where there is fufficient room for the Encampment of
the Army, every Regiment muft be allowed fo many
paces diftance, as to be able to form in marching out;
exclufive likewife of an interval of three * Rhindand
rods and a half between every Squadron. Drag. Rig.
drt. 9. The depth of ground allowed for the ftreets,
muft be fufficient for the 74 horfes, which compofe
the half of every Squadron, and one fide of every
Ihreet, and for thofe of the Subaltern-Officers, &c
Drag. Rigul.
♦
V Tie Rhineltnd rod amounts to twelve feet Englifli meafure ; lb the
whole interval between every Squadron muft confecjuently be about
fatten paces.
..! done
 for the C a v A l r v, 163
done in camps, wherein the Army is to halt for
fome time. •*■
Four camp- colours muft be fixed upon the four
lines on the parade, in a ftraight line from the
Infantry, but the front is not to be levelled ; ne
vertheless, the ditches and hollows are to be filled
up, that the Squadrons may be better able to form.
Art. 10. Two neceflaries muft be made for
every Squadron in both lines ; 200 paces in the
front of the firft line, and 200 in the rear of the
fecond, which are to be filled up every four days ;
no Soldier therefore, or other perfon fhall pre-
fume to go to any other place, to prevent which
the fentries are required to be watchful on their
polls, that the camp may not be rendered of-
fenfive.
A large fquare kitchin, with proper conve-
niencies, is to be made in the rear of the baggage
of every Squadron, nor fhall the leaft fire be fuf-
fered, on any account whatfoever, in the back-
ftreets, or amongft the tents.

CHAP. IV.
Of Standard- and Rear-guards.
Article 1.
»
EVERY Regiment gives a ftandard- guard, and
a rear-guard ', the ftandard- guard confifts of
L 2 One
164 Regulations
One Cornet, one Corporal, one U Trumpeter,
and feventeen private Men ;
The rear guard of
One Corporal, and fixteen private Men ;
and no Troop of Horfe, or Squadron of Dra
goons fhall furnifh any feparate, or other guard
tor its baggage, for which the Colonel fhall be
anfwerable.
N. B. The Colonel is to have one orderly man, but
the other Field- Officers none.
Every Troop of Horfe, and Squadron of Dragoons,
muft give three Men for the night-watch, who are
to be ported over the horfes without arms, in order to
prevent their getting loofe, and flriking one another.
Such Troopers as have loft their horfes, are to
mount the General's guards,ftandard-and rear-guards.

Art. 2. When the Infantry are to beat the af-

fembly at feven in the morning, and the quarter-
guards give the fignal for it, the * Trumpeter be
longing to the ftandard-guard of the Regiment
encamped neareft to the Infantry, founds the call,
upon which the Trumpeters of all the ftandard-
guards in both lines, are to do the fame.
Art. 3. The Men for guard from every Squa
dron, are to be drawn up, and reviewed in their
feveral ftreets half an hour before, after which
the Quarter-mailers make them ground their arms,
till the Infantry and Dragoons beat the ajfembly.
J —- Drummer, &e. • Drag. Regul.
* the Drummer belonging to the ftandard-guard of
the Regiment upon the right, is alfo to give the fignal
for it, upon which the Drummers of all the ftandard-
guards in both lines are 19 do the fame. ' Drag . Regul.
N. B. The
 for the Cavalry. 165
t N. B. The ftandard- and rear-guards are always to
mount completely accoutred with cuirafles , boots
and.fpurs, and, after they have relieved the old guards,
are to take off their cuirafles, and ftand fentries with
out them.

• Art. 4. As, foon as the Drummers of the In

fantry and Dragoons begin beating the a£embly%
the Men for guard ftand to their arms in the
ftreets of their refpettive Squadrons, and the Quar-
ter-mafters make them moulder ; after the ajfembly
is beat, the Adjutant, ftanding oppofite to the
center of the Regiment, gives the word of com
mand,
Standard- and rear -guard march !
upon which the ftandard- and rear guard march
out upon the parade, taking care in marching to
drefs themfelves well to the right.
N. B. The guards march out three deep, the ftan-
dard-guard drawing up on the right, and the rear
guard on the left.

After they have marched out on the parade,

the Adjutant gives the word,
Face to the lefty and right!
upon which the duty-men of the two Squadrons
on the right flank face to the left ; thole of the
two Squadrons on the left, to the right, and thofe
of the center- fquadron ftand faft ;
March !
they clofe from right and left to the center ;
f This N. B. , relating only to the Horfe, is omitted in
the Dragoon-Regulations,
L 3 Halt!
l66 R E G V J. A T I <0 *J S
Halt!
they Hand faft, with the feet next the front fore-
moft ; and at the following word of command,
Front ! .
they face brifkly to the front, and ftand fteady.
N. B. When the guards dofe from right and left to
the center, the rear-guard is to march to the left,
and the non-commiffioned Officers, and the || Trum
peter to poft themfelves before the center.

Rank and fize !

upon which the Men of both guards take poft
from right to left by fizes ; after the guards are
formed, the commanding Officer draws his fword,
-One non-commiffioned Officer, together with the
(1 Trumpeter, takes poft upon the right flank of
the ftandard-guard, and f^c other non-commif
fioned Officer upon the right flank of the rear
guard.
Art. 5. While the quarter-guards of the Infan
try are beating the fignal sound, the Officer of
the ftandard-guard gives .the following words ■of
command,
Reft your Carbines !
Shoulder your Carbines !
Rear-ranks dofe to the front !
March !
To the right wheel by Divifions!
March !
I Drummer In the Dragoons.
upon
 for the Cavalry. 167
upon which both guards march off, the rear
guard marching through the center-ftreet.
N. B. All the guards of a whole wing of Cavalry,
muft be very careful to march off, and relieve to
gether with the Infantry.
The old guards are to reft their Carbines, and to
f found a march, at the approach of the new ones.

Art. 6. When the new ftandard-guard is drawn

up oppofue to the old one, the \\ Trumpeter ceafes,
and the new guard refts their Carbines : The Of
ficers, and non-commiffioned Officers are then
carefully to deliver all their orders, after which
both guards muft Ihoulder their Carbines again,
and face to the right ; the new guard marches off,
and takes up the ground of the old, and the old
guard that of the new.
N. B. The new guard is to form in a Angle rank in
inarching off, and the non-commiffioned Officers to
take pore upon the right flank : The old guard, on
the contrary, is to form in three ranks, to face to
wards the Standards, and to carry their Carbines
fhouldered.

Art. 7. As foon as the new ftandard-guard has

taken up its ground, the commanding Officer or
ders the fentries for the relief to turn out brifldy,
and ftands faft with fhouldered arms, till the pofts
are relieved.
Art. 8. After the relieved fentries have joined
their guard, and the Drummers of the Infantry
+ to beat a march, &c. Drag. Rigul.
I Drummer in the Dragoons.
L 4 beat
1 68 Regulations
beat the final for the troops the Officer of the old
ftandard-guard gives the following words of com
mand,
Reft your Carbines !
Tour Carbines high in your right arms !
Rear-ranks clofe to the Front !
March !
and when the quarter- guards of the Infantry are
trooped off, he alfo marches off, * founding the
troop ■, and all the guards in both lines muft be
careful to march off together.
N. B. When the old guard marches off, the new one
refts their Carbines, but the trumpet is not to found.

Art. 9. After the old guard is marched off,

and drawn up again on the parade, the Men are
to open a little, after which the Officer gives the
word of command,
Reft your Carbines !
Club your Carbines !
• Face to the right and left!
March !
the f Trumpeter then founds the fignal for difmif-
fing, and the Men march to their tents.
N. B. The Men muft always carry their arms moul
dered at the relieving of a guard, whether it rains,
or not ; and in marching off, high in their right
arms, and never clubbed.

* ■ beating the /roof, &c. Drag. Regul.

+ the Drummer then beats the fignal, &c. Drag.

The
 for the Cavalry. 169
The guard of one Regiment, mint be very ob-
iervant of that belonging to another, that the whole
may relieve at the fame time, and every thing be
performed together with the Infantry.

Art. 10. The non-commiflioned Officer com

manding the rear. guard, after his fentries are re
lieved, and drawn in, makes the Men carry their
carbines high in their right arms, and marches
through the center ftreet into the front of the Re
giment ; there makes them reft their carbines,
club, face to the right and left, and march to
their respective Squadrons.
N. B. Every thing muft be ftrictly obferved at the
relieving, and trooping off the rear-guard, as is di
rected for the fiandard-guard ; but the rear-guards
are not to be marched off, till after the ftandard-
guards.

C H A P. V.
1
Of polling and relieving Sentries.
Article 1. .
TH E ftandard-guard of every Regiment polls
five fentries ; one upon the right flank, one
upon the left, one over the ftandards, one at the
Colonel's, or commanding Officer's tent, and one
over the prifoners : Of the two, who remain above
the three reliefs, one is appointed a lance-corpo
ral, to march the reliefs ; and the other a. cale-
faftor, to carry reports.
N. B, The
 17© Regulations
N. B. ' The fentries ported over the prisoners, and the
Standards, ftand with drawn fwords, and all the
others, with Shouldered Carbines.
Art. 2. The rear -guard pofts four fentries
between the baggage and the kitchins, facing out
wards, and one before the arms ; the one re
maining above three reliefs, is appointed a lance-
corporal.
Art. 3. At the time of relieving, the Men
jnuft ftand to their arms nimbly; the lance-
corporal in the front of the guard, with his drawn
fword in his hand, gives the word of command
as follows :
'Take up your Carbines !
Shoulder your Carbines !
March !
the fentries then move out, and the .lance corporal
marches them off, and relieves the pofts.
N. B. The fentries to be pofted over the Standards
and prifoners are not conducted by the lance-corporal,
with the reft of the relief; but march to their re
spective pofts, and relieve themfelves.

Art. 4. The lance-corporal of the ftandard-

guard firft relieves the fentry on the right flank,
then the fentry on the left, and Jaftly the fenjtry
at the Colonel's, or commanding Officer's tent :
The lance-corporal of the rear-guard, firft relieves
the fentry on the right flank in the rear of the
Regiment, and then the others* in fucceflive
order.
Art. 5.
 for the Cay a l r y. 171
Art. 5. In relieving a fentry with fliouldered
arms the lance-corporal gives dje word of com
mand, ,
Reft your Carbines !
then to the relieving fentry,
Poife your Carbine I
March !
the fentry who is to be relieved, then delayers the
orders relating to his poft ; after the fentry, who
is relieved, has fallen into the relief, and the other
has taken his poft, they both of their own accord
come to the left- about to their proper front, car
rying their carbines poifed, and the lance-corpo
ral gives the word,
Reft your Carbines f
Shoulder your Carbines !
N. B. During the relieving of a fentry, the whole re
lief rnuft always ftand with refted Carbines : The
Lance-corporal, in giving the word of command, is
to ftand a little advanced upon the right flank of the
relief, facing to the left, and having his drawn fword
in his hand ; he is to march fucceflively from one
fentry to another, and at the reliving of each, give
the word of command conformably to the directions
already given.
■J- Art. 6. The lance-corporal, when he returns
with the relieved fentries to the guard, gives the
word,
Reft
f Art. 6. In relieving a centry with qrdejed arms, the
lance-corporal gives the word,
Rejl ytur Firelocks !
at
 172 Regulations
Reft your Carbines f
Poife your Carbines !
March !
Front ! ■
24. Shoulder your Carbines !
N. B. The fentries, when they have marched ints
the guard, and receive the foregoing word of com
mand, Front / are to come to the left-about, and,
in coming about, place their* left hand upon the
butt-end.
When the lance.corporal returns with the relieved
fentries to the guard, the Officer, or non-commif-
iioned Officer is to receive him with fhouldered arms ;
and after the relived fentries have fallen in, mull form
and fize the guard properly again.
No lance-corporals muft be appointed, but fuch
as know their duty perfectly well ; particularly on
feparate guards.

at which the relief, together with the fentry to be re

lieved come to their Reft, as ufual ; at the fucceeding
words of command,
roi/e your tirelocks !
' March !
the centry delivers the orders relating to his poll, after
which the fentry who relieves, inarches upon his poll ;
the fentry, who is relieved, falls into the relief, faces
to the left-about to his proper front, carrying his fire
lock poifed ; the lance-corporal then gives the word,
Reft your Firelocks !
Shoulder your firelocks !
at which the relief moulders their firelocks together,
and the centry ported, orders his firelock at the ufual
motions. Drag. Regul,
* This pofition is defcribed in the firlr motion of Expla
nation 2, in the Manual Exercife.

Art. 7.
 for the Cavalry. 173
Art. 7. Officers and non-commiffioned Officers
muft be careful to give proper inftructions to their
fentries ; in fair weather, they are always to carry
their carbines fhouldered, and in wet weather,
fecured ; but whenever a General- or Field-Offi-
cer appears near their pofts, they are to fhoulder
again, to ftand fteady, and with a full front to
wards him, and to reft as foon as he comes at the
proper diftance.

Art. 8. Sentries muft not fmoke tobacco ; not

move beyond the diftance of ten paces from their
pofts, either by day or night ; neither muft they,
on pain of running the gantlope, lay their arms
out of their hands, much lefs lit down.

Art. 9. Sentries on the flanks of a Regiment,

muft not permit any perfon whatfoever, the Offi
cers and Soldiers of the Regiment, and the Gene
rals of the Army excepted, either to ride, or drive
over the parade, or through the ftreets.

Art. 10. Sentries muft challenge in time, as

foon as it grows dark ; muft fuffer no perfon
whatfoever to go into the Regiment, and in cafe
any pne fhould plead bufinefs in it, muft direct
him to the ftandard-guard.

Art 1 1. When armed parties, or detachments

return to camp in the night, the commanding Of
ficer muft draw them up in the front, and make
them form by Regiment ; afterwards, when, in
marching feverally to their refpe&ive Regiments,
they approach the ftandard-guard, the Officer
com-'
if4. REGlfiATJONS

commanding it, is to get his Men under arms .,

and after his fentry has challenged, and made
inquiry, to order an Officer, non-commiffioned
Officer, Lance- corporal, or Soldier belonging to
the party to advance ; when he finds they belong
to the Regiment, he muft fend a non-commiffionea
Officer with them, with orders to his fentries W
let them pafs.

Art, 1 2. The fentries belonging to the rear-guard,

who are polled in the rear of the Regiment, are, in
like manner, to be governed by the direclfons al
ready given ; and the non-commiffioned Officer
Commanding that guard, is moreover to be par
ticularly careful to prevent gaming, drinking,
fighting, and all manner of noife, or difturbance
in the futtlers' tents after retreat- beating.
N.B. Guard*, Or fentries are to reft their carbines
only to the round's and patroles after retreat-bearing.
After retreat- beating, the rear-guard muft fend out
patroles amongft the furriers, to prevent gaining and
drinking, and to fee alfo that no perfon conceals
himfelf amongft the baggage, with intent to com
mit theft; they are to turn out all perfons drinking
m the furriers' tents, the firft time they go ; but an
fuch as they fhall find there the fecond time, they
are to take prifoners.

CHAP.
 for the Cavalry. ij$
■' ■ i

CHAP. VI.
What Compliments are due from
guards to General- and Field-Offi
cers, with fome further Cbferva-
tions.
Article i.
TO the King, all guards ought to f found a
march and the Officers to falute ; but as
his Majefty will not have his proper honors paid
to him, they are only to receive him with refted
arms.
Art. 2. When the King is prefent in the Ar
my, the Field- Marfhal next in command, -muft be
received with a march ; but in his Majefty's ab-
fence, and when the principal command devolves
upon him, he is to be faluted alfo.
Hr. B. When the Horfe found a Trumpet, they art
not to reft their carbines, but to carry them moul
dered.

Art. 3. To a General, the guards of Horfe

are to found four falutes only ; and thofe of Dra
goons, to beat four ruffles ; but if he commands
in chief, he muft be recievcd with a march, and
faluted by the Officers.

to beat & march, &c. Drag. Rtgul,

Art. 4.
176- Regulations
Art. 4. To a Lieutenant-General, whether
Commander in chief or not, guards of Horfe are
to found three falutes, and thofe of Dragoons, to
beat three ruffles, and to a Major-General two.
N. B. The Officers, when their guards are under
arms to a General, and he makes a fignal, mult reft
their arms, but not found a Trumpet, or beat a
Drum ; when they are not yet got under arms, and
a fignal is made, they are only to ftand by their
arms, and not to take them up.

Art. "5. Standard- and rear-guards are to reft

their arms to their own Colonels, or commanding
Officers ; to thofe of other Regiments, the ftan-
dard-guards are to fhoulder their arms, and the
rear-guards to reft.
N. B. Guards are to go under arms to all Colonels,
but not to any inferior Field-Officers, either of their
own, or other Regiments.

Art. 6. The fame honors muft be paid to Ge

nerals in foreign fervice ; when any General there
fore is coming, who is not known by the guard,
the commanding Officer muft fend a man for in
formation.
Art. 7. A General of the Horfe or Dragoons
is to have two fentries on foot at his tent, and
a Lieutenant- and Major-General one.

Art. 8. The guards muft be very alert both

night and day, and get under arms in proper
time upon every occafion, otherwife the com
manding Officer, or non-commiflioned Officer fhall
be immediately relieved and confined.
Art. 9.
 for the Cavai r.y. 177
Art. 9. The Officer of the ftandard-guard,
and the non-commiffioned Officer of the rear
guard, muft never leave their guards either by
day or night ; they are therefore to fend for their
victuals; and any Officer who abfents himfelf for
the fpace of half an hour from his guard, fhall
be confined a year in a fortrefs, and his pay de
ducted for the invalid fund.

Art. 10. The Officer of the ftandard • guard

muft make his report to the Colonel, or com
manding Officer of the Regiment, before the * call
is founded ; and any orders which he may then
receive, he is to give to his guard, and to the
non-commiffioned Officer alfo of the rear- guard ;
he is in like manner to make a fecond report, af
ter he has trooped off, and difmifled his guard.

Art. 11. To the end that no Officer may ever

prefume to abfent himfelf from his guard, or be
able to advance any pretence whatfoever for fo
doing, he is no longer to make his report to the
commanding Officer before he is relieved, but to
fend a non commiffioned Officer from' his guard
with it to the Adjutant, who is afterwards to
give it to the commanding Officer.
N. B. When an Officer has occafion to eafe himfelf
in the day-time, he muft procure one of his brother-
Officers to take the command of the guard during
his abfence, for when a ftandard-guard is to be under
arms, the Officer muft, on no account, be wanting.

* See above Art. 2. p. 164.

M Art 12,
 178 Regulations
Art. 12. The Officer of the ftandard-guard is
not to carry *the parole to the Colonel, or Com
mandant of the Regiment after retreat-beating,
but the Major is to vifit his and the rear-guard,
and to receive it from him, and from the non-
commiflioned Officer of the rear-guard, together
with all fuch further orders as were given relating
to their guards ; and whatever he finds defective,
he is to make report of to the Colonel, or com
manding Officer of the Regiment.

Art. 13. The Officer of the ftandard-guard

commands the rear-guard ; the non-commiffioned
Officer therefore of the rear. guard is to make his
report to him evening and morning, and after he
is difmounted likewife.

Art. 14. No Officer on a ftandard-guard fhall

fend for a mattrefs, or night-gown, but fhall
keep on his entire mounting during the time he
continues on duty. ,

Art. 15. No Soldier fhall abfent himfelf from

his guard without leave ; and only one man at a
time be permitted to go from either guard ; but
the non-commiffioned Officer and Trumpeter are
never to be abfent.

Art. 16. The Calefa&or is appointed, to make

report of all Soldiers confined, releafed, or pu-
nifhed, to the Colonel, or commanding Officer of
the Regiment, to all the Field-Officers, to the
Captains of the Troops to which fuch men belong,
and to the Adjutants.
N. B. When
 for A Cavalry. 179
N. B. When a Trooper, or Dragoon reports any
thing to an Officer, he is to do it with his arms
fhouJdered, and afterwards to reft, and continue in
that pofition till he is difmiffed, after which he is to
fhoulder again.
Senfible and good Men are fuch only as muff be
appointed to carry reports.

Art. 17. f To boot and [addle mull be founded

as foon as it is light enough to read writing, and
the Infantry beat the reveille.
Art. 18. All Officers and non-commiffioned
Officers, who are off duty, muft appear upon the
parade at guard-mounting,and remain there during
the mounting and difmounting of the guards.

CHAP. VII.

Of General-Officers' Guards, and or

derly Duties.
Article 1.
TH E ftrength of the King's guard depends
upon his own orders, and it is compofed of
his own guards.
Art. 2. The Field- Marshal's guard, who com
mands in chief, whether the King is prefent with
the Army, or not, is the fame as is appointed in
the Regulations for the Infantry.
t Art. 17. The reveille, &c. Drag. Regul.
M 2 Art. 3.
180 Re gulations

Art 3. A General of the Horfe or Dragoons,

when the King is prefent with the Army, has
One Cornet, one non commiffioned Officer, and
twelve private Men on (oot ;
but when he commands in chief,
One Lieutenant, two non-commiffioned Offi
cers, and thirty Men.

Art. 4.. A Lieutenant-General's guard, whether

in the King's prefence or not, confilts of
One non-commiffioned Officer, and eight Men ;
and a Major-General's, whether he commands in
chief, or not, of . .
One non-commiffioned Officer, and fix Men.
N. B. Lieutenant- and Major-Generals' guards are to
be furniflied by their refpe&ive brigades.

Art. 5. The General- Officers' guards affemble

at the head of their brigades, as foon as the
ftandard-guards are mounted, and the Officers, or
non-commiffioned Officers who command them,
march them through the intervals of the Regi
ments, the neareft way to their ports, where they
draw them up oppofite to the old guards, and
make them reft their arms ; they are then to re
ceive all the orders relating to their pofts,' from
the Officers commanding the old guards, after
which they make them fhoulder again, face to the
right, march by files, and take up the ground on
which the old guards ftood, in doing which they
are to form in a fihgle rank, and the fentries for
the relief are to fall out : They then ftand fhoul-
dered,
 for /^Cavalry. i8i
dered, till the old guards are marched off, after
which they reft, order, and ground their arms.
N. B. All General- Officers' guards are to be pofted
on the right of their Generals' tents, and facing the
line of the Army.

Art. 6. The Officers, or non-commiffioned Of

ficers commanding the old guards, form them two
or three deep, in marching them off their ground,
and then Hand fall oppofite to the right flank of
the new ones, till all the fentries are relieved, and
fallen in ; after which they make them reft, and
carry their arms high in their right arms, in which
pofition they are to march them through the in
tervals into the front of their brigades, where
they make them reft, club, face to the right and
left, and march to their respective Regiments.

Art. J. Every Regiment of Horfe or Dragoons,

fends an orderly Cornet to the King, who is to
remain conftantly at head quarters ; Cornets are
to do no other duty, but that of mounting ftan-
dard-guards, and going orderly.
The orderly Officers are to be relieved every
morning.
In the King's abfence, the orderly Officers are
to attend the General, who commands in chief.
N. B. No Troopers, Dragoons, or non-commiffioned
Officers muft be fent orderly, but, in their ftead,
every Regiment of Huflars fends a Man, who, to
gether with fome of the Hunters alfo, is to remain
conftantly at head quarters.

Art. 8. Generals are not to have orderly Offi

cers, but the King allows to Field- Marfhals and
M 3 Gene
iSa Regulations
Generals two Aid-de-camps, and to Lieutenant-
and Major- Generals, one.

' CHAP. VIII.

Method of giving out the Parole.
Article i.
IN a Handing camp, the Parole is to be given
out at head-quarters at eleven o'clock, at which
time the Generals and Colonels of the dav, the
Majors of aJl Regiments, the Brigade-Majors, the
Aid-de-camps from General- Officers,together with
the non-com miflioned Officers and Lance corpo
rals belonging to the Generals' guards, muft take
care to be at hand ; but when the Army is on a
march, the Parole time muft be always given out
in orders, at which a Major is to be detached
from every column, who receives the Parole, and
gives it to thofe Regiments which compofe it.

Art. 2. His Majefty gives the Parole to the

Major-General of the day, who muft take down
all orders in writing exactly, and inquire his Ma-
jefty's pleafure, concerning all fuch particulars, as
have been reported to him by any Regiments ;
the Parole, and the orders he is afterwards to give
to the Field-Marfhals.
N. B. The Major- General of the day, after he has
taken down the orders in writing, muft read them
carefully over, to prevent miftakes.

Art. 3.
 for the C A v A l r y. 183
Art. 3." The Major- General of the day gives
out the Parole in the front of the King's guard,
to the Majors of the day, who are drawn up ac
cording to feniority of Regiment, to the Brigade-
Majors, and to the Aid-de-camps from Gene
ral-Officers, at which time the guard is to go
under arms, and to reft their carbines, or fire
locks ; afterwards to fhoulder again, andr to re
main in that pofition, till the Major-General has
done.
N. B. Eight fentries are to be polled with refted arms
upon the flanks, while the Parole is giving out.
No Voluntier, who is not effective in the King's
fervice, fhall be permitted to approach within hearing
of the Parole, and the orders, for which the Gene
ral of the day fliall be refponfible.

Art. 4. The Brigade-Major of the day is to

give the Parole, and the orders to the Majors of
the detail of General-Officers' guards, and out-
parties.
N. B. After the Parole is given out, all the Aid- de
camps bring it to their refpediive Generals, together
with the orders ; they arc alfo to give it to the non-
commiflioned Officers of their Generals' guards, to
gether with all fuch orders as may pertain to them.

Art. 5. After the Parole is given out, the Ma

jors ride to their Regiments, and give it, toge
ther with the orders, to their refpedive Colonels
and Commandants ; after which every Major is
to take down in writing any other orders his Co
lonel may think proper to give relating to the
Regiment.
M 4 Art. 6.
1 84 Regulations
Art. 6. The Major of the day gives out the
Parole to the Adjutants and Quarter mafters of
the Kegiment,an hour before the retreat is founded,
in the front of the Standards ; the ftandard-guard
goes under arms, and the fame ceremony is to be
obferved, as is already direded, when the Parole
is given out at head-quarters ; the Adjutants af
terwards bring it to the Field Officers, and the
Quarter-mailers to the Captains and Subaltern-
Officers of their refpective Squadrons.
The two commanding Officers of the grand-
guard detached from each wing of the Army, are
to fend each an Officer to the King's head-quar-'
ters for the Parole, which' they afterwards give
out, together, with a counter-fign, to every guard
depending upon them, which guards are to fend a
non-commiffioned Officer to receive it.
N. B. The picquets are alfo to fend an Officer to
., head-quarters for the Parole.

Art. 7. The Majors, when their Regiments are

to exercife the following day, and when they have
any executions, burials, or other particulars ne-
ceffary to be laid before the King, muft report
the fame to the Major-General of the day, half
an hour before the Parole is to be given out,that he,
having reported them to the King, when he re
ceived the Parole, may acquaint them with his
Majefty's anfwer.

CHAP.
 jor the C a v a l R y. 185

CHAP. IX. ;

Of the Picquet-guard, together with

fome Directions to be obferved after
the Retreat.
■\ Article t.
EVERY Regiment of Horfe furnifhes one
Subaltern-Officer, two non-commiffioned Of
ficers, and two Men per Troop for the Picquet,
and each wing, one Captain, and one Trumpeter.

Art. 2. All the Picquets are to afTemble on the

right wing in the front of the firft liqe at' feven
in the morning, to which place they are to be
marched by their refpective Officers ; after the
whole Picquet is formed, it is to march, as ufual,
with drawn fwords, and without || found of trum
pet, and draw up on the left of the old Picquet ;
when the old Picquet is relieved, it marches off
with drawn fwords, and without |] found of trum
pet, after which the new Picquet takes up the
ground on which the old one ftood, the Men dif-
mount, unbridle the horfes, and link them to the
Picquets.
•J" Art. 1. Every Regiment of Dragoons furnifhes one
Subaltern-Officer, two non-commiffioned Officers, and
four Men per Squadron for the Picquet ; and each wing,
one Captain, and one Drummer.
|| ——without beat of drum, &c. Drag. Regul.

N. B. One
186 « Regulations
N. B. One fentry on foot is to be pofied on each
flank.
The old Picquet muft draw fwords, when the new
comes at the diftance of about hundred paces, and
after it is relieved, and marched off, mull return
them, and the Men march to their refpective Regi
ments, where their Officers are to make them go
to the right-about by fours, and move to their tents.

Art. 3. Picquet-guards are not to be ordered,

but when the Commander in chief finds them ne-
ceflary, on which occafions they muft parade at
the place appointed by his order.

Art. 4. The whole Cavalry are to furnifh one

Colonel, one Lieutenant-Colonel, and one Major
for the Picquet, who, when they go their rounds,
muft always vifit the Picquet, to fee if it be alert >
and no Officer, non commiffioned Officer, or pri
vate Man belonging to it, is to take off his cuirafs,
or fword, much lefs pull off" his boots, but muft
always keep on all his clothes and accoutrements,
and continue as alert as poffible, that, in cafe of
any alarm, they may be in readinels to mount
immediately, and march without lofs of time
wherever it may be necelTary.
N. B. When the Field - Officers vifit the Picquet
in the night , the Men are to draw up by their
horfes. ■ The Major of the Picquet is to re
main conflantly with it, both by day and night, and
may have a fmall tent pitched for himfelf ; the other
Field-Officers belonging to the Picquet, are always
to wear their fafhes, to keep on their entire Regi
mentals, and in cafe any alarm happens in the night,
to repair inftantly to their poft ; in like manner,
when the Picquet is paraded and relieved, all the
Field-Officers are required to be prefent.
When
 for the C A v a l R y. 187
When the King himfelf, or any Prince is riding
our, the Picquet is not required either to mount, to
draw up by their horfes, or to take any notice of
them.

Art. 5. The Colonel of the Picquet is to go

the grand rounds in both lines ; the Lieutenant-
Colonel the day rounds in both lines; and the
Major the vifiting-rounds in both lines.
N. B. The Field- Officers, when they go their rounds,
muft ilifmount to receive the Parole, and the guards
arc to acknowledge no Officer's rounds, till he has
difmounted.

Art. 6. In the evening at fun-fet, the artillery

fires a cannon, upon which all the j Trumpeters
of the Cavalry found the retreat, they muft there
fore be in readinefs at the ftandard-guard.

Art. 7. Subaltern-Officers are not to be out of

their Regiments after the retreat, nor to game, or
make any noife in the finders' tents, for which
the commanding Officer of the ftandard-guard
fhall be refponfible.

Art. 8 There fhall be no firing in the Army,

after the retreat, and any private Man offending
herein, (ball run the gantlope thirty times ; neither
fhall the loaded pieces be at any time fired oft', but
always drawn if poffible ; and a report of all fuch
as cannot be drawn, muft be made to the Major
at orderly time, after which a non-commiffioned
% —— the Drummers of the Cavalry heat the rttrtai, &c.
Drag, Reml.
Officer
1 88 Regulations.
Officer will be ordered out upon the occafion,
who is to aflemble the men belonging to them
between the hours of eleven and twelve, at which
time they are to fire them off together, always
taking care to prefent their pieces in the air.

Art. 9. After the retreat, the rolls are to be

called over by the non-com miffioned Officers, who
are afterwards to make their reports to their Cap
tains, to the Subaltern- Officers of their refpective
Troops, or Squadrons, and to the Adjutant; and
the Adjutant reports to the Field -Officers.
N. B. No Soldier is to leave his Troop, or Squadron,
after roll-calling ; and as foon as it is dark, the Men
muft lie down to fleep ; but when the Army is to
march the day following, they are to lie down im
mediately after the retreat ; and there muft be no
drinking, or noife in the Troops, or Squadrons, much
lefs amongft the futtlers.

CHAP. X.

Duty of the Generals of the day, and

of Brigade-Generals, and the me
thod of giving in the returns.
Article 1.
TH E Generals of the day fhall vifit all the
advanced pofts and guards every morning,
and make a report to his Majefty, or in his ab-
fence, to the General who commands in chief, of
the
 for the£ av ALRYi i$g
the behaviour of the Officers upon them, and
whether they found every thing in proper order.

Art. 2. The Generals of the day muft remain

always in camp, and are never to ride out, with
out leaving word which way they are gone, .that
they may be always found, when wanted.

Art. 3. The Generals of the day are to attend

the parading of all parties and detachments from
the Army, in order to fee that every thing is
performed in a regular manner, that the Men are
afiembled at the time appointed, that every Re
giment furnifhes the proportion, fpecified in the
detail the evening before, in complete order, and
that the whole are afterwards formed, and told
off properly by the Brigade- Major of the day.
N. B. When large detachments are made, and to
be polled at any considerable diftance from the Ar
my, or to remain out for any time, a detail of them
muft be given out at orderly time the day before, and
every thing performed according to the directions
before given.

Art. 4. The Generals of the day muft take

care to give proper inftructions to all Officers,
who are fent on command out of camp, in re
gard to their conduct both upon the march, and
upon their polls ; as alfo concerning the time and
manner of their being relieved, and of marching
back again.

Art. 5. The commanding Officers of grand-

guards, or detachments, at their return to camp,
are to make their report to the General of the day..
Art. 6.
 j90 Regulations
Art. 6. Any Field-Officer who is ordered on
party, muft, at his return, make his report to
his Majefty ; a Captain, on the contrary, when
he goes on command, as he receives his inftruc-
tions from the General of the day, who attends
the parading of it, muft report to him confequent-
ly when he returns.
N. B. The returns of all parties muft be reported to
the Brigade-Major of the day.

Art. 7. Every thing of confequence which hap

pens in any Regihient in the Army, on any ad
vanced poft, or guard, muft be reported to the
General of the day, who is afterwards to report
it to his Majefty, or, in his abfence, to the Com
mander in chief.
Art. 8 . The Generals of the day muft be an-
fwerable, that all orders given the day before at
orderly time, or afterwards, are performed with
the utmoft punctuality : They are to go along the
lines frequently in the day-time, and the Adju
tants, as they pafs, muft appear in the front of
their refpective Regiments, in readinefs to receive
any orders from them.
Art. 9. When Regiments have any fick men
to fend to the hofpital, they are to give in a' re
turn of them, together with the numbers wanting
to complete, to the Major-General of the day,
who is afterwards to fend it to the Surgeon-Ge
neral in the morning before guard- mounting.
Art. 10. A Return fhall be given in to the
Brigade Major of the day, every morning before
guard-
 n for the C a v a l r y. 191
guard-mounting, of all extraordinaries, fpecifying
alfo the numbers of men and horfes wanting to
complete in each Regiment, which muft after
wards be made into one general return, and given
in to the General of the day.

Art. 11. The Generals of the day, when any

alarm happens in the night, fhall repair imme
diately to the place, and if they find it necefiary,
order the Picquet to march thither.

Art. 12. All Generals commanding Brigades,

muft be refponfible for them, they are therefore
required to be always prefent when the guards
mount, the picquet turns out, or when any de
tachments are to march, which are furnifhed by
their refpective Brigades, in order to fee that every
thing is performed in a regular manner.

Art. 13. The Generals of Brigades muft be

prefent when any Regiments, which belong to
them, are at exercife : The Major-Generals fhall
vifit them every morning, and be anfwerable that
every fpecies of duty is performed with the ut-
moft exaftnefs and application ; that no irregula
rities whatfoever are committed, either by Offi
cers, non-com miflioned Officers, or private Men,
but that eVefy perfon is ftrictly attentive to the
difcharge of his duty, and the camp perpetually
preferved in proper condition.

Art. 14. No Officer fhall be permitted to ab-

fent himfelf from camp above four hours, with
out the knowledge of.his Brigade-General ; neither
is
 192 .Regulations
is any Regiment to fend for ftraw upon.occafion,
without having firft acqnainted him with it.
Art. 15. The daily returns fhall be fent in to
the King's Adjutant-General at feven in the morn
ing; and when the Army marches, immediately
after its arrival in camp ; and the commanding
Officers of Regiments, whofe returns are imper
fect, fhall pay thirty ducats to the invalid fund.
Art. 16. The bread-returns fhall be given in
every five days, and the Majors muft take care
that the bread be good, and thoroughly baked,
and when it proves otherwife, fhall make report
thereof to the CommiiTary-General.

CHAP. XL
Of the performance of Divine Service
in the Army.
Article 1. .1 v
PRAYERS mull: be read twice a day; im
mediately after guard-mounting in tke morn
ing, and at fix in the evening.
Art. 2. When the Drummers of the Infantry
beat the fignal at prayer- time, the f Trumpeter

+ —- the Drummer belonging to the ftandard-guard of

the Regiment encamped upon the right, muft alfo beat
the fignal, to whom.thofe of all the other guards are to
be attentive, and immediately to do the fame, that the
whole may beat together. Drag. Regul.
belonging

~.
 for the Cavalry. 193
belonging to the ftandard-guard of the Regiment
encamped next to it muft found the Call, to whom
thofe of all the other guards are to be attentive,
and immediately to do the fame, that the whole
may found together.
N. B. The Trumpeters upon this occafion are to found,
and the Kettle-Drummers to beat in the front of their
refpective Standard-guards.

Art. 3. At the Call to prayers, the troops or

fquadrons are to be drawn up on the parade, and
the Rolls called, after which every Captain makes
the rear ranks of his Troop or Squadron clofe to
the front, and the Major gives the word of com
mand as follows.
Face to the right and left !
March!
Halt!
Front !
From the right and left wheel inwards, and form
the circle I
March !
N. B. The Officers are to ftand at equal diftances in
the front of their Troops, or Squadrons, and the
non-commiffioned Officers in their rear.

Art. 4. When the Regiment has formed the

circle, prayers are to be read, and all the Officers,
non-commiffioned Officers, and private Men, who
are not on duty, muft attend.
: N. B. The Men are not required to drefs themfelves
completely for prayers.
N Art.
 194 Regulations
Art. 5. When prayers are over, the Major
gives the word of command,
To the right about ! March !
After which the Troops or Squadrons break, and
march to their relpective ftreets.
N. B. The Standard-guard is not to go under arms,
when the Regiment marches out to prayers. No
fervice, finging and all included, fhall be allowed to
continue above a quarter of an hour ; and as often
as the Chaplain exceeds that time, for which the
Adjutant is to be anfwerable, he fhall forfeit «ne
rixdollar to the invalid-fund.

Art. 6. On Sundays, at nine o'clock, a fermon

is to be preached, and the fervice may laft an hour:
in a Standing Camp, the communion fhall be ad-
miniftered every fourteen days.

CHAP. XII.
General Diredtions to be obferved when
the Line turns out.
Article 1.
TH E army is never to turn out, when his
Majefty comes along the lines, without pre
vious orders ; and when fuch orders are given,
the Troops or Squadrons muft be put into proper
order, the Captains are therefore to review them
in time for that purpofe.
Art.
 for the C a v a l r y. 195
Art. 2. When the line is to turn out, no Of
ficer, non-commiflioned Officer, or Soldier, who
is not on duty, fhall be abfent, the rolls muft,
therefore, be called before-hand.
Art. 3. The Troops, or Squadrons, are to be
drawn up three deep, and in clofe order ; the
front-rank upon the non-commiflioned Officers
line, and the non-commiflioned Officers pofted to
the divifions.
Art. 4. The Officers draw up at the head of
the ftandards ; the Colonel advanced before ; be
hind the Colonel, the Field-Officers ; and behind
them, all the other Officers in a rank entire, ac
cording to feniority.
N. B. The Officers muft always wear their faflies in the
army, and in all places where a Pruflian camp is
pitched, or any considerable body of trpops affembled.
The Trumpeters, or Drummers, take poft upon the
right and left of the ftandards.

CHAP. XIII.
Of exercifing the Troops.
Article 1.
REGIMENTS are to be completed, and put
into the beft order, before they take the
field ; when they are afiembled therefore in the
fpring, they muft be diligently exercifed.
N 2 In
196 Regulations
. In the army, the Men fhall ride everyday,. un-
lefs when they have come off a march, after .which
the Horfes muft be allowed to reft ; in a Standing-
Camp, they muft be exercifed by Squadrons, at
leaft every other day; and the King, or Comman
der in chief, will fometimes take out the whole
Cavalry, or a Wing, at once : fingje Regiments
muft likewife be unexpectedly ordered, every now
and then, to faddle, and to move out with all ex
pedition, in order to keep the Men conftantly a-
lert, and render it habitual to them to be in rea-
dinefs to march upon the leaft notice.
Art. 2. Cuirafieers are never to exercife on foot
in the army, the Recruits excepted, who muft
always be difciplined firft on foot.
The Trumpeters and Drummers of the Caval
ry are to praetife at the fame time with the Drum
mers of the Infantry.

CHAP. XIV.

How Officers and Soldiers are to apply

for leave of Abfence. .
Article 1.
WHEN a Field-Officer is defirous to go out
of camp, he is to make application to the
General of the Day, and to the Lieutenant and
Major-General of his Brigade ; the Colonel, or
commanding Officer of a Regiment, can give per-
miffion
 for the Cavalry. 197
million to any inferior Officer, at his requeft, to
afofent himfelf four hours.
Art. 2: When any Officer afks leave to ftay a
night out of camp, which no Officer (hall pre-
fume to do without permiffion, the Colonel of the
Regiment mull apply to his Majefty, or, in his
abfence, to the Commander in chief.
Art. 3. The private Men mufl: be fuffered to
go out of camp as little as poffible ; and fuch as
require Leave to go to any neighbouring village,
in order to purchaie neceflaries, fhall be lent under
the care of non-commiffioned Officers, who are
to bring them back to camp again.
N. B. The non-commiffioned Officers detached from
camp .upon thefe occafions, muft not be abtent above
the fpace of fix1 hours at raoft ; and are alfo to be
anfwerable that none of the men get drunk, or com
mit-any irregularities.

, Art. 4. No Officer, non commiffioned Officer,

or Soldier, fhall leave the camp without permif
fion ; any private Man who difobeys this order,
fhall run the gantlope through 200 men.

Art. 5. Every private foldier, who is found

beyond the advanced pofts, fhall be taken up,
and hanged as a deferter ; neither muft any Offi
cer prefume to go beyond the advanced pofts with
out leave.

N 3 CHAP.
198 Reg u l ations

CHAP, XV.

Of Foraging Parties.
Article x.
WHEN the Cavalry are to forage, they muft
do it by a Wing, or at leait a Brigade,
at a time ; no fingle Regiments therefore, or Of
ficers, ihall be fuffered to forage for themfelves a-
lone, particularly when they will be obliged to
fend beyond the advanced pofts.
Art. 2. The day, or at lead the night before
any forage, a ftrong covering party muft be or
dered out, fufficient for the fecurity of the foragers,
the commanding Officer of which muft difpofe
the pofts in fuch a manner, as entirely to cover the
ground fituated towards the enemy, nor fhall any
of the foragers be permitted to pafs them : after
the proper difpofition has been made, the Quar-
ter-Mafter-General muft reconnoitre well the
ground, and affign to every Regiment a limited
portion; or, when the foi age is fupplied out of
barns, a particular village, and five Qftarter-Maf-
ters from every Regiment are to attend upon him,
who are afterwards to conduct their refpe&ive Re
giments to the places fevcrally appointed for them,
N. B. The Officer commanding the covering party,
as fpon as he has made his difpofition, muft fend an
Officer to camp, to conduft the forageis the neareft
Way to the place, . . .
At
 for the Cavalry. jgg
Art. 3. When the army marches into a new.
camp, the forage happening to be upon the ground
whereon any Regiment encamps, is to become the
fole property of that Regiment, nor fhall one
Regiment do any detriment to another in this re-
fpeft.
Art. 4. Every Brigade fhall furnifh a party,
and every Regiment another feparate one likewife,
with f one or two Officers per Troop, proportion
ed to circumftances, and the number of foragers,
who are to keep the foragers in proper order, tak
ing care that thofe of one Regiment don't mix
with thofe of another ; to prevent which, when
they march out of camp, one Officer is to be poft-
ed in the front of every Troop or Squadron, and
another in the rear.
N. B. Befides the Officers demanded from every Troop
or Squadron, each Regiment is alfo to furnilh one or
two Captains, and a Field-Officer, that the foragers
may be kept in ftill better order.

Art. 5. When the foragers arrive at the place

appointed to forage in, every Regiment is to take
pofieffion of, and to confine itfelf within the ground
refpedlively allotted it, nor fhall any Soldier, or
Servant, prefume of his own accord, and without
orders from an Officer, to quit his own Troop or
Squadron, and forage elfewhere.
Art. 6. The Officers of every Regiment muft
take care that no perfon forages beyond the polls,
and if, notwithftanding all orders to the contrary,
N 4 ' any
t With two or three Officers per Squadron, &c- Drag,
Kigut.
200 Regulations
any Soldier, or Servant, fhall be guilty of this
offence, they muft report him to the Regiment,
in order to have him punifhed in an exemplary
manner ; becaufe from fuch diforders it happens,
that fo many horfes are carried off by the enemy,
to the great detriment of the Regiments they be
longed to.
N. B. The feparate parties furnifhed both by every
Brigade, as well as every Regiment, are to take all
poflible pains to keep their refpe&ive foragers toge
ther, and to prevent their marauding, or paffing their
bounds ; they muft therefore form a chain of fentries
round about them, and continue in that difpofition,
till the foraging is over.

Art. 7. When any alarm happens during the

foraging* and there is a profpect of danger, the
foragers are to quit their forage, and retire to
camp.
N. B. As foon as a Regiment has done foraging, and
is ready, it is to be marched back in good order to
camp, the Officers of every Troop or Squadron being
polled, one in the front, and one in the rear, as is
before directed ; its feparate party is likewife to march
in the rear, but the brigade-parties are to remain in
their pofts, till all their refpe&ive Regiments have
done foraging.

Art. 8 . The Officers, when out upon foraging

parties, either in the field, or in villages, muft
always march their men in a regular manner to
the places in which they are to forage ; and after
the foraging is over, they muft draw them up,
have-the Roll called, and march them back in
the fame good order to camp. Every Officer or
dered out on thefe parties, fhall be anfwerable that
he
 for the Caval r.y. 201
he brings all his Men back to the Regiment, he
muft therefore take his precautions accordingly.

CHAP. XVI.
Of Grand-Guards, Out-Pofts, and
Parties.
Article 1.
GRand- Guards are not to be pofted above five
or fix hundred paces from the army, and
the number they are to be compofed of, muft de
pend on the ftrength of the Cavalry, and the con
tiguity of the enemy : the videts ate to be plant
ed double on every poft, that when they difcover
any thing extraordinary, one of them can march
to give intelligence of it to the guard, but the
other muft remain at his poft.

Art. 2. The guard-houfe for a Grand guard muft,

if poffible, be fituated in fome hollow ground, or
covered place, to prevent the enemy from form
ing a true judgment of the numbers it confifts of;
but the Videts are to be pofted upon eminencies,
to be able to diftinguifh objects at a great diftance;
at the fame time it is proper to obferve, that a
Guard, or Videt, muft never be ftationed too near
a wood, where they might be furp;ifed and car
ried off by the enemy.

Art.
202 Regulations
Art. 3. Grand-guards are always to be drawn
up in two ranks, and the firft care of an Officer,
who has any ambition in him, muft be, to acquire
intelligence of the enemy, in regard to their fitua-
tion, the road which leads to them, and the part
from whence he has moft reafon to expect an af-
fault ; after which he will be better able to difpofe
his Men : the intent of thefe guards is to oppofe
the enemy upon any attack, and gain time for a
large body to afiemble, and one that is fuffkient to
make a vigorous defence: the commanding OfH-
. cer of a Grand-guard, as foon as there appears any
danger of being attacked, muft fend intelligence
of it to the General who commands in chief,
that he may make his difpofition accordingly.

Art. 4. His Majefty hopes, that the Officers

of the cavalry, as they have very diftindl inftruc-
tions, in regard to the manner of polling Grand-
guards, will be more diligent in the execution of
that part of their duty, than, to their fhame, they
have hitherto been : he therefore ftrictly charges
them, carefully to examine the feat of a war,
and, by confuking proper maps, acquire an exa<5t
knowledge of the country : they are likewife al
ways to poft their Videts facing towards the e-
nemy.

Art. 5. All parties detached from the Army,

are to be told off a hundred ways, on which ac
count they muft be always compofed of equal
numbers.

Art. 6. The Grand-guards of each wing are to

aflemble at the head of the firft Regiment in the
front
 for the Cavalry. 203
front of the firft line, and to be relieved every
twenty-four hours : the Brigade-Major forms
them, and tells them off", polls the Officers and
non-com miflioned Officers, and gives them all
the neceflary inftruftions in regard to their beha
viour.
Art. 7. "When the Grand. guards, Out-pofts,
or Parties are formed, the Brigade Major gives
the word of command, as follows.
Officers and non-commiffioned Officers march for
wards !
upon which the Officers draw up in a fingle rank,
and in their rear the non commifiioned Officers in
two ranks.
N. B. The Grand-guards are to parade at five o'clock
in the morning, when the feafon of the year per
mits ; but at other times, as foon as it is light ; the '
Out-pofts and Parties, a detail of which is to be
given in the evening before at orderly time, are to
parade upon the right, or left-wing, or in the center
of the army, as is moft convenient.
The Adjutants are to deliver the Men, to be fur-
niflied by their refpective regiments for Grand-guards,
Out-pofts, and Parties, to the Brigade-Major at the
place of parade.

Art. 8. After the Grand-guards, Out-pofts,

and Parties are told off, and the Officers and non-
commiffionedOfficers appointed, the Brigade-Major
gives the word,
Officers and non-commiffioned Officers march to
your pqfts .'
Upon
204 Regulations
Upon which the Officers, non-corrimiffioned Offi
cers, and Trumpeters or Drummers, move to their
pofts, where the Officers muft examine whether
they have their proper complement of men, after
which they are to draw up at the head of their
refpe&ive divifions, when the commanding Officer
of the Grand-guard gives the word,
Draw your /words !
Center and rear-ranks^ move forward to clofe
order !
March f
To the right wheel by divifions !
March !
Upon which every Officer is to ftep off together
with his divifion.
N. B. f The Grand-guards of Horfe, or Dragoons,
continue founding or beating a marth, till they have
marched clear of the camp, after which the Trum
peters or Drummers are ordered to ceafe, and the
Men to return their fwords ; afterwards, when the
Officer approaches within about the diftance of one
hundred pace6 from the old guard, he makes his
men draw their fwords again, upon which the trum
pets are to found, or drums to beat.
All other Out- pofts and Parties are to march out
of camp with fwords drawn, but without found of
Trumpet, or beat of Drum, and to return their
fwords, as foon as they have marched clear of the
camp.
Art.
•j- Altered by an appendix to thefe Regulations, that the
Grand-guards are to march out of camp with fwords drawn,
but without found of trumpet, or beat of drum ; neither
are they to found or beat a march when' they approach the
eld guard, as before was the cuftom.
 for the Cavalry. 205
Art. 9. The new guard draws up on the left
of the old one, after which the Officers of both
guards deliver to each other reciprocally all or
ders and inftructions.
N. B. When the new guard draw their fwords, and
found their Trumpet, or beat their Drum, the old
guard mulr do the fame.

Art. 10. When the Officer of the old guard

has delivered all the orders relating to his guard,
the relief turns out, and after his fentries are re
lieved, and fallen in, he marches off with fwords
drawn, and -f found of trumpet, to the place of
parade, on which his Guard was formed the day
before, when they are to be drawn up by Regi
ment, and afterwards marched by their refpeflive
non commiffioned Officers, or Lance-Corporals, to
their feveral Regiments.
N. B. When the Officer of the old guard is marched
off about one hundred paces from the new one, he
is to make his guard return their fwords, and from
thence to march without f found of Trumpet, to the
place of parade.
The commanding Officer of the Grand-guard,
after he is relieved, and arrived in camp, is to make
his report to the General of the day ; and all the
fubordinate Officers, who were on the fame guard,
are to report their return to the Field Officers of
their refpedlive Regiments.

Art. 11. As foon as the old guard has march

ed off, the new one takes up its ground, and the
commanding Officer may order either the whole,
half, or fourth part of it to difmount, according
a&
f — beat of drum, &c. Drag. Regul.
2o6 Regulations
as he is more or lefs apprehenfive of danger From
the fituation of the enemy.

Art. 12. When Out-pofts, or Parties are re

lieved, and return to camp, they are to march
without f found of Trumpet to the place of pa
rade, whether it be on the right, or left wing,
or in the center of the infantry ; neither muft they
draw their fwords, unlefs they confift of 200 men,
or upwards, in which cafe they are then to do it.
N. B. The commanding Officer, as foon as his party
has marched up to their ground, is to form them by
Regiment.

Art. 13. As foon as the party has formed by

Regiment, every Officer, or non-commiffioned.
Officer, refpe&ively, orders his men to clofe their
rear ranks to the front, and marches them to his
Regiment : when they have taken up their ground
on the parade, he faces them to the right about,
and then difmifTes them, after which he makes his
report to the commanding Officer.

CHAP.

f ——heat of drum, &c Drag. Regit/.

 for the Cavalry. 207

CHAP. XVII.
Directions for the Conduct of Officers
on Grand-Guards, Out-Pofts, and
Parties, in Cafe of an Attack.
Article r.
WHEN a commanding Officer perceives that
the enemy will attack his guard, he muft
himfelf fally out upon them, provided they are
not too ftrong for him, when they are at the dis
tance of about 100 paces ; but if their numbers
are much fuperior, he muft retire before they ap
proach fo near.
Art. 2. Every Officer, as foon as he has re
lieved the old guard, and pofted his fentries, is
to vifit them all round, to fee whether they cover
the ground fufficiently, or not, and if he thinks
any part is too open and expofed, he is at liberty
to plant new fentries there j but he muft not re
move, or alter any of the old pofts, becaufe they
were appointed by the Generals : the command
ing Officer of the whole is himfelf likewife to
vifit all the inferior guards depending upon him,
and all poffible precautions muft be taken, to pre
vent the enemy from furprifing any poft.
N. B. The Videts are to carry their arms advanced
before them, with the buts planted on the right knee.
Art.
 208 Regulations

Art. 3. When a Guard difcovers any body of

the enemy in motion, an Officer muft be imme
diately detached with the intelligence to the Ge
neral of the day, particularizing as much as pof-
lible their numbers, and every other material cir-
cumftance : if afterwards they mould approach
very near the guard, the commanding Officer muft
. retreat flowly, and in good order, towards the
camp. • ,

Art. 4. If any General-Officers come to vifit

the Grand -guard, whether they be of the Cavalry
or Infantry, and whether Generals, Lieutenant-
Generals, or Major-Generals, the commanding
Officer muft receive them with his Guard mount
ed, and fwords drawn ; but he is not to X found
a march, not even to the commander in chief him-
felf, becaufe that is never to be done but at the
relief of the guard.
When an Officer at the head of his guard or
party, meets any General, he is to pay him no o-
ther refpect, than in taking care that his Men
march by with their ranks and files in proper or
der ; when Officers likewife are ordered to efcorc
prifoners to any fortrefs, or other place, they are
neither to § found a Trumpet, nor to draw their
Swords, during the whole command.

Art. 5. The Grand-guard may be fuffered to

difmount in the day-time, but is to remain drawn
up || three deep, nor muft any Officer, as his re
putation
% to beat a march, &c. Drag. Regul.
§ to beat a drum, &c. Drag. Regul.
|| —— two deep, nor muft any officer take off his fword,
pull off his boots, Sec. Drag. Regul.
 for the C a v a i R Y. 209
putation and honour are at ftake, take off his
cuirafs, pull off his boots, or have a chair to
fleep in, but muft keep on all his clothes and ac
coutrements, together with the non-commiflioned
Officers and Men, both day and night, nor pre-
fume to fleep as long as he continues on the
guard.
Art. 6. All inferior pofts, detached from the
Grand-guard, and commanded by non-commif-
fioned Officers, or Subalterns, depend upon the
commanding Officer of the Grand-guard, and are
to make their reports to him, and to receive the
parole from him.
Art. 7. An hour before night, the command
ing Officer of the Grand-guard is to give out the
parole to all the Officers depending upon his
guard, together with a counter-fign, or fignal,
that when the pofts are vifited in the night-time,
they may be able to diftinguifh with certainty their
own rounds, and the enemy be prevented from
impofing upon them.
Art. 8. As foon as it is dark, all pofts belong
ing to the Grand-guard are to mount their horfes,
and to continue on horfeback during the whole
night, particularly where there is any probability
of being attempted by the Enemy ; but at other
times in a camp, when there is no reafon to be
apprehenfive of any danger, one half only of the
guard muft conftantly remain mounted, and the
other keep their horfes bridled, and ftand by them.
O N. B. They
210 Regulations
N. B. They are to mount by Halves alternately, and
to be relieved at regular hours.

Art. 9. Every Officer muft be careful to give

proper inftrudions to his fentries, and muft often
patrole himfelf, as well as fend out patroles, to
iee whether they be alert and watchful on their
pofts; a non-commiffioned Officer, with a fmall
party, muft be alio frequently detached, to recon
noitre the intermediate country between them
and the enemy, in order to prevent any fen-
try, or fmall guard, from being furprifed : when
the non-commiffioned Officer returns, the advanced
fentries are not to fuffer him to pafs, till another
non commiffioned Officer, with a few Men is fent
to him from the guard, who is to demand the
parole from him with his piftol in hand, and when
he finds it right, he is then to take him to the
commanding Officer, that he may make his re
port to him.
N. B. The commanding Officer of the Grand-guard
whenever any a'arm happens, is immediately to fend
an Officer, with feme Men to the place, to gain in
formation of the particulars.

Art. 10. The fentries a'e to challenge in pro

per time, and to demand the counter-fign before
they permit any one to approach within the dis
tance of fifty paces; nor muft they on any ac
count fufFer perfons to pal's, till they become
perfectly well convinced, that they don't belong
to the Enemy.

Art. 11. The fentries, when they have chal

lenged any perfon, but receive r.o anfwer, are
im-
 for ACavalry. 2n
immediately to demand the counter-fign ; and
if they ftill receive no anfwer, they are directly
to fire ; for which reafon, the Officers are to ex
amine the arms of every relief, whether they are
in proper order, well primed, and the powder
dry ; and alfo whether the hammer-ftalls be taken
off.
Art 12. The Officers muft inform their fen-
tries that whenever they perceive more than two
men with arms, whether on horfeback, or on
foot, advancing towards them, notwithllanding
they can give the counter-fign, they are not, after
they have firft challenged, to fuffer them to ad
vance one pace further, but muft give the word
to the next fentry, who is to pafs it to the guard ;
the commanding Officer is then to fend a good
non-commifion'd Officer with a party of men, to
make examination ; if the non-com miffiond Off
icer finds it to be a detachment from the army,
he muft order it to ftand faft, and is then to re
turn with the Officer commanding it, to the
Officer of his guard, who, in cafe he be unac
quainted with his perfon, and is afraid to confide
either in his clothing, or his knowledge of the
counter-fign, muft fcrutinize him ftri&ly, require
his orders and pafs-ports, and, when he finds
them authentic, muft permit his command to
pafs.
N. B. When they happen to be a few men only,
the non-com miflion'd Officer muft bring them to
the guard, where the Officer, in cafe he has no
perfonal knowledge of them, muft detain them
all night, nor difmifs them before day light.
°v * If
212 Regulations
If in the day-time likewife any body of men fhould
approach an Officer's guard, who give out that
they are friends, he is neverthelefs not to depend
upon them, nor to fuffer them to advance too
pear, unlefs he has a perfonal knowledge of the
Officers, even in vyhich cafe he is not to Jet
his guard difmount again, till they have mar
ched by.

Art. 13. All Officers, when on out pofts or

other parties out of camp, mull take the fame
precautions, that whenever they fhall happen to
be attacked by the enemy, they may have their
men mounted, and in readinefs to receive them,
nor remain at any time expofed even to a pof- *
Ability of being furprifed; every Officer therefore
muft keep his men always together, muft take
care that not one can find any opportunity to
Ileal away to maraude, or otherwife to quit his
guard ; and likewife poll his fentries round about
in fuch a manner, as to render it impoffible for
any thing to efcape their obfervation either by
day or night.

Art. 14. When an Officer commands an out-

poft, it is highly necelTary that he fhould become
a Judge of the ground ; he muft therefore make
himfelf perfectly well acquainted with the coun
try round about him, fo as to be able to know,
from what part the enemy can beft make an at
tack upon him ; after which he can poft himfelf
in fuch a manner as to fruftrate at leaft any fuch
attempt, if not render it altogether impracticable;
the difpofition here meant by his Majtfty, is
when an Officer pofts himfelf behind a defile,
bridge, hollow way, or bank, becaufe that when
he
 for ' the C a v a l r y. 213
He prefents his guard drawn up in good order in
a fituation fo advantageous, he may reft afiured
no enemy will venture to pafs ; an eminence is
alfo another defenfible poll for a body of cavalry,
where there is a valley lying before it, and the
flanks can be well covered, for it is a very ef-
fential precaution for Officers in all fituations to
render, as much as pofllble, their flanks and
rear fecure : when an Officer, ported in fuch a
manner, difcovers the approach of any party, he
muft immediately mount his guard, and detach
a Corporal and two men, with their arms ad
vanced, to reconnoitre them, who are to fire in
-cafe they find them enemies, and afterwards
retire to their poft with the utmoft fpeed.

Art. 15. When an Officer, notwithllanding

his utmoft vigilance and precaution, is attacked
on his poft, he (hall not abandon it, without
having firft made all pofllble refiftance ; nor re
tire, unlefs compelled thereto by abfolute ne-
deffity ; namely, the being overpowered by num
bers, without any probability of receiving fuc-
cours, the reality of which he is moreover, on art
inquiry, to produce fufficient proof of: if, on
the contrary, it fhall in the leaft degree appear,
that he might either have maintained his poft,
or made a better defence ; or, that he did not
behave, in every refpect, as became a prudent
and brave Officer, he fhall be cafhiered with in
famy, and, according to the nature of his offence,
be punifhed with death, and forfeiture of his
effedh.

[O3 Art.
2)4 Regulations
Art. 16. When an Officer is detached with a
command to any considerable diftance from the
army, where it will be impoflible for him to re-
ceiye any reinforcement, and perceives a much
ftronger body of the enemy advancing towards
him, he is to make his retreat in good time, and
march back the fafeft way, through woods, vil;
lages, or defiles, to the Army.

CHAP. XVIN.
The Manner of cantoning a Regiment
on a March, and of porting the
necetTary Guards for its Security.
Article i.
WHEN a fingle Regiment is on its march,
.it muft always have an advanced guard,
confifting of a Lieutenant, 2 non-commiffioned
Officers and 40 men, which in a champaign
country, may march as far as 500 paces in front,
but where it is interfperfed with woods or defiles,
they are not to advance fo far : when the enemy
is at fome diftance, the waggons may march
between the fquadrons, but if near, they muft be
placed in the rear of the Regiment, with an ef-
cort of 60 men, under the command of a Captain
Lieutenant.
The advanced guard is not only thoroughly to
reconnoitre the country in front, but on the ad
jacent
 for the C a v a l r Y. 215
jacent fides alfo, to prevent the Regiment from
being fuddenly attacked, without having firft:
received any intelligence of the danger ; for a
further fecurity likewife, every Squadron muft
detach a non-commiffioned Officer and 4 men,
who are to patrole upon the flanks to the diftance
of 150 paces, and to fcour the neighbouring
woods and villages in order to difcover all am-
bufcades, or other defigns of the enemy to ob- *
ftrucl: their march .
N. B. The rear guard mud never be difperfed a-
mongft the baggage, but always march together in
a body.

Art. 2. The village mult firft be always

well fearched by a patrole, before a Regiment
marches into its cantonments ; and immediately
after, a grand guard ported towards the enemy :
all the approaches are to be guarded by fufficienc
numbers on (oot, exclufive of a main guard,
which is to be polled in the center of the village■ ;
a picquet-guard muft be alfo appointed, which
is to remain together in fome houfe, and to have
their horfes faddled during the night : the grand-
guard, village guard and picquet are to have
all the avenues blocked up with waggons ;' to
have their (entries planted double, and their in
ferior guards told off in two divifions: Patroles
muft be fent out every half hour in the night time :
in the morning likewife at break of day, and at
funfet in the evening, parties muft be detached
over all the roads, to difcover whether fome of
the Enemy may not be aflcmbled in the neigh
bourhood, intending to furprife the Quarters ; as
O4 thofe
 2i6 Regulations
thofe are the ufual hours at which they would be
moft likely to fucceed in any fuch attempt.

Art. 3. If the village fhould be attacked by

fmall bodies of the enemy, the guards pofted at
the avenues muft perfift in defending themfelves
with the utmoft obftinacy, till the whole have
gained time to faddle their horfes and to mount,
after which they can march out through fome
other opening, and difperfe the enemy.
N. B. The grand-guards, at the approach of the
Enemy, muft poll themfelves in fuch a manner,
as to have their rear free ; after which, provided
they can be fupported by the guards, which are
pofted on foot in the village, they may detach fome
■ of their beft mounted men to fkirBiifh with the
enemy, till the whole Regiment is got ready, and
in a condition to put them entirely to the rout :
But as fuch attacks are ufually either made about
the time of fun-fet or break of day, commanding
Officers, muft be very alert at thofe hours, attd in a
particular manner attentive to their duty.

Art. 4. When the forage in a cantonment is

not fufficient for the troops, and it becomes . ne-
ceffary to have the deficiency fupplied from other
villages* the Men muft never be fent fingle
for it, but always a ftrong covering party
ordered.

Art. 5. "When a Regiment is to march in a

direction towards the enemy, the baggage muft
be placed in the rear ; but if the contrary way,
" in the front ; difpofed in which manner, the
Regiment will ferve to cover it.
. . Art.
 for /fe Cavalry. 417
Art. 6. Where a Regiment of Horfe or Dra*
goons, on a march^ is either quatered for the
night, or in cantonrrients, the main-guard is to
confift of a Captain* 1 Subaltern-Officer, and
40 men; an Officer likewife with 20 more, or
ifneceflary 30, muft be pofted at the entrance
into the village ; and at every foot-path, or other
out-let, a non commiffioned Officer and twelve,
or whatever force the commanding Officer mall
judge fufficient : the avenues are to be block
ed up with the carriages; and the fhafts fattened
together in fuch a manner, as to be with difficul
ty got afunder : the guards pofted at the gates,
or out-lets, muft always face to the high-road,
and draw up either three deep, or two deep, ih
proportion to their ftrength or weaknefs.
Art. 7. AH guards, be they ever fo fmall, are
to be told off in two divifions, that when they
are attacked by the enemy, they may not fpend
their whole fire at odce, but always have one di-
vifion mouldered under another : a Lance-Cor
poral rriuft be pofted ih the center between the two
divifions of a non-commiffioned Officer's guard,
with his carbine ordered ; the chain of fentries is
to be continued from one poft to another, and
they are never to be planted in open fields, but be
hind the ditches, or garden-hedges, which furround
the village ; neither muft there be above a third
part of the main guard pofted fentries at a time :
After the guards are thus difpofed round the vil
lage, the Captains may difmifs their troops. ——
The main guard, if poffible, muft take poft in a
church-yard, furrounded with a ftone-wall ; or in
fome ftrong- built houfe, or fuch other defenfible
place :
218 Regulations
place : the Officers on guard muft be very alerr,
and ftrictly examine every thing that paries ouc
and in, for the better detection of fpies : the
picquet- guard, confifting of a Lieutenant and thir
ty Men, is to mount at fix o'clock in the evening,
and muft be ported in fome houfe, in the weakeft
and moft expofed part of the village : the fen-
tries muft begin to challenge, as loon as it is
dark, and continue doing fo, during the whole
night ; the Rounds and Patroles are to keep go
ing every quarter of an hour, up and down the
village from one guard to another : a light muft
be kept burning in every quarter of the village,
and a man appointed to keep watch, and conftant-
ly attend it, that in cafe any thing extraordinary
fhould happen, the whole may be prefently alarm
ed and aflembled : the Men are to have their
carbines and cartridge-pouches in the room where
in they lie, but they muft be placed in fuch a
manner, that every one will be able upon occafion,
to find his own immediately, and that no acci
dents can poffibly happen from the powder. ■
The commanding Officer muft take care to have
the baggage drawn up in fuch a manner, as to be
expofed to no fort of danger from the enemy.

CHAP.
 for /^Cavalry. 219

CHAP. XIX.
Orders relating to Adtion.
Article 1.
THE Army, in an engagement, muft be al
ways drawn up in two lines, and when the
firft advances againft the enemy, the fecond is to
remain at fuch a diftance, as to be out of danger
from the fire.

Art. 2. All Squadrons, when they they are to

attack the enemy, are to advance with their fwords
drawn, ftandards flying, and the f trumpets found
ing a march ; nor fhall any Officer commanding
a Squadron, as his honour and reputation are ac
ftake, prefume to fire ; but fhall fall upon the ene
my fword in hand, for which the Generals of Bri
gades fhall be refponfible.

Art. 3. The Officers muft always afpire to

attack firft, and not fuffer themfelves to be attack
ed ; and are to encourage their Men to keep a
good countenance, and perfuade them that the
enemy are much inferior : they muft alfo charge
them in the ftricteft terms, to fliew no mercy, but
to deftroy as many as they poffibly can ; and, af
ter the enemy is routed, not to purfue too rafhly,
but, at the call, immediately join their Squadrons,
becaufe fingly they will be able to do but little ex-
cution,
\ Drummers beating, &c. Drag. RtguJ.
220 Regulations
ecutioh, but when formed in Squadrons, a great
deal.
N. B. During the engagement the men are not to talk,
or to make the leaft noife, but muft be very atten
tive to the word of command from their Officers ;
and are abfolutely not to fire their carbines till the
enemy is entirely put to flight.

Art. 4. The manner of charging the enemy

is to be the fame as directed in the Evolutions,
in the preceding part of thefe Regulations; name
ly, to advance firft on a brifk trot, and then to fall
into a full gallop, taking care at the lame time
to keep their ranks and files well clofed : if the
Squadrons, when they make a charge, will ftricTt-
ly comply With thefe inftructions, the king him-
felf will be anfwerable for it, that the enemy muft
always give ground.
N. B. If any man is deficient in his duty, or attempts
to run away, the neareft Officer, or non-commif-
fioned Officer, muft put him to death.

Art. 5. When the firft line of the enemy gives

way, the commanding Officers of Squadrons are
to found the call, in order to complete them again
as quick as poffible ; and afterwards to fall, with
out lofs of time, upon the fecond line.

Art. 6. The fecond line muft be drawn up

oppofite to the intervals of the firft, that in cafe
any Squadron in it (hould be repulfed, the Squa
dron neareft may move brifkly up to its fupport,
and by dint or frefh vigour and intrepidity drive
back the enemy : moreover, when the firft line
has
 for ^Cavalry. 221
has fuffered much, the fecond mull be ordered up
with all expedition to reinftate it.
N. B. No Man (hall be permitted,' under any pretence
whatfoever, to quit his Squadron, for which the Of
ficers refpe&ively fhall be refponfible.

Art 7. All officers in the Cavalry muft allure

themfelves that there are only two methods of
defeating an enemy ; the firft of which is, by at
tacking them wiihthe utmoft force and impetuo-
fity ; and the fecond, by out-flanking them.-—
It muft be a ftanding maxim, and upon all occa-
lions the principal object ot every Officer's care,
to gain a power, if poffible, to attack the enemy
in flank, becaufe with fuch an advantage he will
be much fooner able at all times to defeat them.

Art. 8. If the Colonel of a Regiment is kill

ed, the Lieutenant-Colonel muft fupply his place ;
if the Lieutenant- Colonel is killed, the Major is
to fucceed to his ; if the Major,, the eldeft Cap
tain : in like manner, when a Captain, who com
mands a Squadron, is either killed, or fo fevere-
ly wounded as to be carried into the rear, the
Captain next in feniority muft take the command
of it, and after him, in cafe he fhould alfo fhare
a fimilar fate, the eldeft Lieutenant.

Art. 9. Any private Man, who takes a co

lour, ftandard, or kettle drum from the enemy,
fhall be always handfomely rewarded for his bra
very ; but any Officer, or non-commiffioned Of
ficer, fignalizing himfelf in fo confpicuous a man
ner, will recommend himfelf highly to his Ma-
jefty, and infallibly obtain preferment.
Art.
222 Regulations
«
Art. io. After the Ac"lion is over, every Re
giment muft immediately collect their wounded
Men, and have them conveyed to fome certain
place, there to be drafted and taken all proper care
of: but during the action, no wounded fhall be
carried off, unlefs it be Officers by their own fer-
vants ;• nor any be removed, but fuch as have
ftrength to go themfelves to the furgeons, without
any other afliftance. ,
i
Art. ii. The Trumpeters and Drummers fhall
remain upon the flanks of their respective Squa
drons, the Kettle-drummers excepted, who are to
be fent, together with a fmall guard, into the rear
of the Regiment.
N. B. The Chaplains and Surgeons are to remain
with the baggage during the engagement, on purpofe
to attend, and take the bell care of the wounded.

Art. 12. When there is to be an action, all

the bagg'ge, excepting the bat-horfes, muft be
left behind.

Art. 13. An Officer who is guilty of cowardice

in an engagement muft be put under arreft by his
Colonel, after which he fhall be turned out of
the army with infamy, and his fword broken in
pieces : a Captain fo offending, fhall, befides the
ignominy, lofe the value of his commiflion, and
his Majefty will prefent it to fome other Officer
who has better delerved it.

CHAP.
 jor the C a v a l r y. 223

CHAP. XX.
Dire&ions For the Care and Prefervatibn
of the Horfes in Time of War.
Article 1.
AN Officer muft always go with the horfes to
water, and never more than one Troop,
or Half-fquadron be fuffered to water at a Time.

Art. 2. The Officers muft take particular care,

that the Men fodder their horfes regularly ; that
they rub down, and curry them well ; and fur
ther, that they imbibe a. regard for them, and
learn to be fenfible of the many advantages which
they themfelves will reap in confequence of the
pains they beftow upon them ; for which reafon it
becomes a point necefiary to be inculcated as much
as poffible by all Officers, that for the horfes to
be in good condition, whether in an engagement
or on a march, is always of the higheft impor
tance.
Art'. 3. If a regiment or party is pofted near
the Enemy, the horfes will receive no damage,
although they are kept faddled for the fpace of
twenty-four hours, provided that the comman
ding Officer only takes care that the Men loofen
the girths a few times in the day, and wipe their
backs.

Art.
224 Regulations
Art. 4. 4s lt d°es not require much art to
keep the horfes in good order, after every thing
neceflary for that purpofe has been firft provided ;
the Officers therefore in the Cavalry, muft make
it their particular ftudy, notwithftanding it fhould
now and then be attended with fome extraor
dinary expence to them, to preferve them con-
ftantly in that ftate, and by their application and
diligence endeavour to have them, even in
the worft of times, in fit condition for fer-
vjce.

Art. 5. It is the duty of every Officer to ac

quire a knowledge of the difeafes which horfes
are AjbjecT: to, and the medicines proper to be
applied, becaufe all fuch acquirements are
highly efiential for their prefervation.

Art. 6. Officers muft inftrud their men in

what manner to load their horfes, fo as not to
gall their backs, taking care at the fame time
that the baggage is always well packed up, and
as much as poffible of an equal weight on
both fides; and that the faddles, and every
other part of >their furniture is in complete
order.

Art. 7. His Majefty will pofitively not allow

a Lieutenant, or Quarter- Mafter to have the
command of a Troop, or Squadron, but charges
every Captain to keep it himfelf alone, becaufe
he muft be a very contemptible Officer, if he is
in any refpecl: unable to fupport a proper au
thority over his own men.
Art.
 for the Cavalr y. 225
Art. 8. It is not only the intereft of his Ma-
jefty, for a Squadron to be kept complete and
in good condition, but, in a particular manner,
that of the Officers belonging to it, becaufe they
will then have it always in their power to out flank
the enemy, and with horfes robuft, and full of
vigour, muft certainly over-power them ; every
Officer, therefore, as his life, honour, and repu
tation are depending, is required to difcharge his
duty with the utmoft diligence, and take all poffi-
ble care to keep the Men as well as horfes con
llantly in the bell order.

CHAP. XXI.
Inftrudtions concerning the Baggage on
a March.
Article 1.
ON a march, the baggage muft be placed ac
cording to the difpofition made by the com
mander in chief; but the regimental waggons,
which carry the cafh, are to remain with their re-
fpettive Regiments, except when they are march
ing to attack the enemy.

Art. 2. The waggons are to be numbered, and

to follow one another regularly, and in numerical
order by Regiment.
Art. 3. A covering party over the baggage
muft be appointed by the commander in chief,
P the
 226 Regulations
the ftrength of which is difcretional, and to be de
termined bv circumftances.

Art. 4. When the commanding Officer of the

party has reafon to apprehend himfelf in any dan
ger, he muft take every precaution to fruftrate the
enemy's defigns, and deprive them of all oppor
tunity to furprife him, or attack his baggage ;
for which purpofe it will be abfoltely requifite to
have patroles both in front, rear, and upon the
flanks, in order to difcover their ambufcades in
time, fo as to take the proper meafures effectually
to counter-act and difappoint them ; and this. vi
gilance and attention is in a more particular man
ner neceflary in the paflage of hollow ways, woods
and thickets.
N. B. In marching through hollow-ways which arc
difficult to pafs, fmall detachments are to be polled
upon both flanks, and in the front and rear likewife,
there to remain till the baggage has got through ;
the fame mull be done in the pafiage of all woods
and thickets.
Thefe precautions are not only neceflary for co
vering parties appointed over the baggage, but are
to be put in practice likewife by all efcorts, or de
tachments on a march.

Art. 5. An Officer on a march, particularly

if he has a large body under his command, mufl:
' always have an advanced guard and a rear- guard,
and take care to reconnoitre well the country, and to
fcour all villages, woods, defiles, and hollow ways,
before he pafies them: the Officers commanding
the advanced and rear-guards muft likewife them-
felves take the fame precautions before they march
through fuch places, in order to fecure a paflage,
with -
 for the C a v a l r r. 227
without fubjecling themfelves to any apprehenfion
of being obltru&ed.

chap. xxn.
Of Field-Equipages.
Article 1.
A General of the Horfe fhall take into the field,
one chaife or coach, Mvith fix horfes to draw
it ; one baggage-waggon ; three chaife marines ;
twelve bat-horfes or mules, and as many faddle-
horfes as he pleafes.

Art. z. A Lieu tenaBJL-General fhall take one

chaife or chariot, with four horfes to draw it ; one
baggage- waggon ; two chaife-marines ; eight bac-
horfes, or mules, and as many faddle-horfcs as he
pleafes.

Art. 3. A Major-General fhall take one chaife,

with four horfes to draw it ; one baggage- waggcn ;
one chaife-marine ; fix bat-horfes or. mules, and
eight faddle-horfes.

Art. 4. A Colonel fhall take one chaife, with

two, or at moll four, horfes to draw it ; two chaife-
marines ; fix bat-horfes or mules, and fix faddle-
horfes.

P a Art.
22$ RE G V L A T I O N S

'Art. 5. A Lieutenant- Colonel fhall take one

chaife-marine ; four bat-horfes or mules, and five
faddle horfes.

Art. 6. A Major (hall take one chaife-marine,

four bat-horfes or mules, and four faddle-horfes.

Art. 7. A Captain fhall take two chaife -ma

rines, one for his troop, and the qther for himfelf,
•and three or four faddle-horfes.
N. B. All the chaife-marines fhall be coloured alike,
and the names of their refpective Regiments painted
upon them ; as fhall alfo every General's name be
painted in like manner upon the baggage- waggons,
and chaife- marines, which belong to him.
The bread-waggons fhall remain with their re-
fpeclive Troops, and mull be kept, together with
all appurtenancies, always in complete order, that
whenever they fhall be ordered into the field, the mi-
nuteft thing may not be wanting.
The bat-horfes for the troop-tents are exclufive
of thefe.

Art. 8. The Subaltern- Officers fhall take two

faddle-hotfes, and one bat-horfe ; but are pofitively
not to have waggons, and all fuch as are pro
vided contrary to this regulation, fhall be burnt.

C A A P.
 for the Cavalr y.1 229

CHAP. XXIII,

Dire&ions to General Officers for

the Keeping of their Tables in
Camp.
Article 1.
AField-marfhal fhall have one large table of
ten covers, without any defert; and one
fmall table of fix covers, for the orderly Officers.
Art. 2. A General of the horfe fhall have one
table with eight covers, and fix difhes, without
any defert ; and one fmall table with four covers
for the orderly Officers.
Art. 3. A Lieutenant General (hall have one
table with eight covers, and fix difhes, without
any defert : and a Major-General, one table with
fix covers, and five difhes without defert.
Art. 4. No Entertainment fhall be given in
the evenings, and any Officer, difobeying this
order, fhall forfeit 600 ducats to the invalid-found,
the payment of which fhall be fecured by the fo-
licitor-General.

CHAP.
 230 Regulations

CHAP. XXIV.
Containing Inftructions for the Ma
nagement of the Baggage in general,
as well on a March, as on all other
Occaiions.
Article 1.
TH E difpOfition of the covering party over
the baggage, is always made by the King,
or commander in chief, according as circumftances
may require : the Officers on fuch commands,
are to govern their conduct by the directions given
in the 21ft chapter, and ftrictly to obferve the
following regulations.

Art. 2. The whole baggage of the army, is

to remain under the care and management of the
waggon -mafter-general, as well on a march, as
on a day of action ; and all who belong to ir,
particularly the waggoners, muft pay an abfolute
obedience to his authority ; muft comply with all
his Orders without the leall contradiction, and,
on pain of death, immediately execute them ; nor
muft any waggon be drove in any other place,
than where he fhall order.

Art. 3. Before the army begins its march, the

waggon-mafter-gentral is to receive an order from
the
 for the C av a l*y. 23 1
the quarter-mafter-General, containing the route,
and the number of columns, in which the baggage
(hall march, which order he muft punctually com
ply with, and accordingly form the difpofition of
the baggage.

Art. 4. The waggon- mafter-General (hall refer

only to the Quarter- Mafter-General, concerning the
march of the baggage, becaufe he is to receive his or
ders and inftructions relating to it, only from him.

Art. 5. When the baggage marches in feveral

columns, the waggon-mafter-general (hall depute
a proper perfon at the head of every one, to pre
serve it in order, during the march.

Art. 6. Every Solicitor and waggon-mafter

fhall attend the waggons of his refpective Regiment
and keep them always in regular fucceffion, as
follows ;
1. The General's, or Colonel's waggon.
2. The waggons of the General's, or Colonel's
Troop or Squadron.
3. The waggons of the other Troops or Squa
drons, which are to follow one another re
gularly, in the order, in which they are drawn
up, and according to the rank of the troop or
fquadron they belong to, for which purpofe
they muft be all numbered.

Art. 7. After the manner above defcribed, are

the waggons of every Regiment to march, and in
the order in which they rank in their brigade ; the
waggon-mafter-general muft therefore take care to
■ difpofe the whole accordingly.
Art.
232 Reg if LATiOf!
Art. 8. When any Solicitor docs not march
with the baggage of his Regiment, to take, the
proper care of it, and to keep it in regular order, the
waggon- mafter-general fhall be obliged, immediately
after the march, to report him; and the Solicitor
fo offending, muft be put under arreft ; and if
any dilbrder, or damage be the confequence of his
abfence, he fhall he cafhiered.

Art. 9. The waggon- mafter-general fhall, on

thefe occafions, have the Solicitors fubjecl: to his
command, and they are to execute his difpofition
of the march, and all other orders he may think
proper to give relative to it, without the leaft
contradiction.

Art. 10. The baggage muft be packed up, and

ready in good time, the day it is to march ; and
the Solicitor and waggon-mafter of every Regiment
are to be on the fpot, in order to march off with
their refpec"tive baggage regularly in columns,
according to the waggon-matter-general's direc
tions.

Art. 11. all the waggons of the whole baggage

without exception, muft march in their regular
places, preferve their divifions, and follow in clofe
fucceffion, but without either driving againft one
another, or making any openings : no waggon
muft try to get before, and crowd in amongft
others, out of its own proper place ; nor halt, and
fo detain thofe which follow, but every one keep
its af painted divifion without ftopping.
The Waggon-mafter-general, the Solicitors, as
alfo the waggon-mafters of Regiments muft in
duftiioufly
 for the C a v al r y. 233
duftrioufly preferve the above defcribed regularity ;
and any waggoner prefuming to act in oppofuion
to orders, fhall be immediately punifhed with the
utmoft feventy.

Art. 12. In paffing defiles, bridges, ditches,

woods, villages, towns, and the like; place*, the
waggons mult march regularly, and in the manner
in which the Waggon-Mafter-General has firft
difpofed them, without quitting their refpective
divifions, or crowding amongft others : any wag
goner, who is not governed by his inftructions,
but (hall prefume to break the order of march,
muft be chaftifed on the fpot with the utmoft ri
gour, and brought back to his place again ; but
if he perfifts in being refractory, or offers to make
any refiftance againft the commanding Officer,
he muft be inftantly fhot through the head.

Art. 13. No waggoner, or other attendant

upon the baggage, fhall dare, on pain of death,
to quit his carriage on a march in order to drink,
to fteal, or plunder ; the Provoft-General therefore,
together with his party, fhall march with the bag
gage, and, when any waggoner leaves his carnage
to Ileal, or plunder, fhall apprehend him, and
immediately hang him without trial.
N. B. Any foldiers wives, or fuch like perfons, found
guilty of dealing on a march, fhall alfo meet with
the fame punifliment.

Art. 14 When the baggage will be attacked

on its march, no waggoner muft dare to drive
away, or to any other place than where the Waggon-
Mafter-General fhall direct ; nor to move his
waggon
2j j. . Regulations
waggon from the fpot, where he fhall be com
manded to halt. If one, or more waggoners fhall,
neverthelefs, prefume to break the order of march,.
and drive their carriages away, the Waggon-
mafter general, or the perfons polled at the head
of fuch columns, or the Solicitors, fhall imme
diately fhoot every Waggoner fo offending through
the head, and by fuch exemplary punifhments
preferve the reft in order.

Art. 15. On a day of action, the Waggon-

mafter general and his Affiftants muft keep the
baggage in the moll ftrict and regular order ;
it muft not be fuffered to be moved from the
ground on which it is halted, nor the Waggoners
to ftir from their carriages. When the Waggon-
mafter- general fhall occafionally demand the Wag
goners to advance, or draw back, they muft do
it without breaking their order, and ae conftant-
ly to keep in their refpective columns and divifi-
ons ; any fuch Waggoners as fhall behave contra
dictorily to thefe directions, or attempt, in com
pliance with their own fears, to abandon their
charge and fly, muft be inftantly fhot.
On thefe, and other the like exigencies, the
baggage-efcort muft, without any fcruple, be af-
fifting to the Waggon- mafter- general, and his
Deputies; and contribute as much as poffible to
keep the Waggoners and carriages in order.

Art. 1 6. Any waggoner, or other perfon what-

foever belonging to the baggage, who fhall dare
to take advantage of fuch opportunities to break
o; en and plunder any chefts, or other baggage,
fhall be inftantly put to death ; or, if circumftances
and

itn 1 Mil ■
 for the Cavalry. 235
and time will permit, fhall be hanged up, with
out the leaft refpecl: of perfon ; nor fhall any wag
goner or fervant, on pain of death, prefume,
upon any alarm, to unlink his horfes, to cut the
traces afunder, drive his horfes away, or leave
the carnages behind.

Art. 17. All the Officers on the baggage efcort

are ftrictly to obferve the behaviour of their Men
upon an alarm ; and to take great care, that they
don't quit their ranks, or begin to plunder the
carriages, for which themfelves (hall be anfwer-
able.

Art. 18. When the Waggon-mafter-general

and his Deputies order a barricado to be made,
every Waggon- m after and Servant muft prepare
for it ; and without the leaft difpute or contradic
tion on pain of death, drive his carriage accord
ing to the inftru&ions he fhall then receive, that
the barricado may be formed with as much expe
dition as poflible.

Art. 19. When a waggon breaks down, the

train is not to be flopped by it, but to keep driv
ing on regularly, and fuch waggon muft be left
behind ; in the mean time, the Waggon-mafter-
general, and his affiftants, are to take care that it
be immediately repaired, and afterwards drove up
into its former place again ; but if it be fo da
maged, as not poffibly to admit of being repair
ed, the moft valuable things muft then be diftri-
buted upon the other waggons, and the broken
carriage left behind.

CHAP.

..
236 Regulations

CHAP. XXV.'

Of Sutlers.
Article 1.
WHEN a Regiment takes the field, the Co
lonel muft take care that there be a Cook
provided to diet the Officers, and a Sutler to e-
very Squadron.
Art. 2. No Troopers, or Dragoons, fhall be
fuffered to futle, and fuch as have wives who futle,
fhall notwithllanding do every part of their duty,
and always march with their refpective Squadrons,
for which the Colonel fhall be anfwerable, on pain
of being cafhiered.
N. B. A Trooper, or Dragoon, may be permitted,
fo that it don't interfere with his duty, to deal in ba
con, butter, cheefe, tobacco, brandy, and all kinds
of fmall wares in camp ; he may alfo carry cheefe,
brandy, and tobacco, to fell to the men on a march,
but muft neverthelefs march in rank and file with
his Troop, or Squadron, and only be permitted to
difpofe of fuch things during a halt.

Art 3. The Solicitor-General fhall regulate

weights and meafures, as alfo the price of beer
and flefh-meat ; and fhall be anfwerable, that fuch
price be impofed according to equity, fo that the
Sutlers may be able to fubfift by it, and the Sol
diers not be opprefied. *
Art.
 for the Cavalry. 237
Art. 4. The Solicitor-General fhall have 16
■f grofes monthly from every Sutler ; the Major
of the Regiment 16 likewife ; and the Adjutant
eight ; the Sutlers fhall not be required to pay
more, and although they fhould voluntarily offer
to do it, no Officer fhall receive it, on pain of
being cafhiered.
Art. 5. All perfons bringing prbvifiohs into
camp fhall pafs without moleftation ; nor be plun
dered, on pain of hanging to the offenders.

CHAP. XXVI.
The Number of Servants allowed by
his Majefty in Time of War.
Article 1. '
IN time of war, his Majefty will allow one fer-
vant per Squadron for the baggage-waggons ;
one for the bat-horfes, and one to attend the fick;
and to every fervant one f dollar, twelve grofes
per month; as alfo a pound and half of bread
per day : thefe fervants fhall be bound by oath
to their Regiments, that the Officers may have a
greater dependance upon them, and be better able
to keep them in due fubje&ion.
Art.
f Sec below, Part 9, Chap- 1-
238 Regulations
Ait. 2. The Colonels, or commanding Offi
cers of Regiments muft not, on pain of being
cafhiered, fuffer Officers, under any pretence what-
foever, to have Troopers either to take care of
their Horfes, or to wait upon their perfons $ and
every Officer who mail, notwithstanding this Or
der, prefume to employ a Trooper, (hall be ca
fhiered.
N. B. The fervants of all Regiments are to have green
coats lined with white ; which muft be rendered dif-
tinguifhable by the difference of their lace or facings.

CHAP: XXVII.
Of Camp Uteniils.
Article 1.
VERY Troop of Horfe fhall be fupplied
E^^ with fifteen camp kettles, 15 cantjnes, anj
hatchets ; and every Squadron of Dragoons with
double the number of each, when they take the
field; which, together with all other camp-ne-
cefiaries, muft be taken good care of, both1 on a
march, and in camp.
N. B. In time of peace, the camp-utenfils muft be
Carefully laid up in the ftore-rooms.
Linnen bags muft be made for the camp-kettles
and black leather- cafes for the fhbvels,' mattocks'
and hatchets ; as alfo yellow leather-flings for the
kettles and cantines.

Art.
 for the C av alry. • . 239
Art. 2. No Whores fhall be fufFered to ftay in
camp: when any one, therefore, comes into a
Regiment, the Colonel or commanding Officer
muft order her to be ftripped naked, and turned
out. The General Officers likewife are not to al
low any Whores to' remain at head-quarters, much
lefs any Whore-Tents to be pitched, to prevent
which, the Solicitor-General is required to be
careful.

CHAP. XXVIII.

Confirming of Directions for the Care

of the Sick, and the Prefervation
of the Soldiery in general.
Article 1.
A General hofpital muft be appointed in the
neareft town, to which the fick Men of e-
very Regiment are to be fent, and there left un
der the care of fuch non-commiflioned Officers to
whom the charge of their fubfiftence money may
be committed.
N. B. As it is his Majefty's pleafure that eight fur-
georre mould conftantly remain with the medicine-
cheft, fo every other furgeon is to return to his Re
giment after he has lodged his fick in the hofpital.

Art. 2. When the Army is in a ftanding-

camp, the medicine cheft muft be kept at the hof
pital,
240 Regulations
pital, and no medicines are to be given out of it
to the Surgeon-Majors of Regiments ; but his Ma-
jefty will allow 112 dollars to every furgeon-Major,
for medicines for the whole Regiment, and likewife
Forage- money for four horfes ; with which he is to
provide all kinds of neceffary medicines, for fuch
fick men, as are not fent to the general hofpiral :
and that no furgeon may be fuffered to want his
proper quantities, a Phyfician and the Surgeon-
General of the army, fhall, about once every
month, vifit the regimental medicine chefts ; for
which reafon the Surgeon-General, and a phyfician
are to attend the army conftantly.

Art. 3. When men are fo fick, on a march,

as to be unable to ride^ they muft be carried upon
waggons, if any can be procured for that purpofe,
, till the army marches again into a ftanding camp,
and they can be fent to the hofpital.

Art. 4. The 5 fervants which his Majefty

allows to every Regiment, are to attend the fick
in camp.
Every Captain fhall furnifh eight blankets for the
ufe of his fick men.

Art. 5. The fick men, and fuch alfo whofc

horfes are out of order muft be ordered to march
with the medicine cheft ; nor fhall any fick man
be fuffered to do duty, till he is perfeftly recovered,
for fear of a relapfe.

Art. 6. The Captains muft have good broths

made for their fick, and take all poffible care that
ihey be well fupplied with every thing neceffary^
that
 for the Cavalry. 241
that they may the (boner be reftored to their health,
and become able to do duty.

Art. 7 The Surgeons Mates are always to at

tend- their refpectivc fquadrons on a march, that,
in cafe of fudden accidents, they may be at hand
to apply the proper remedies ; and their attendance
is more particularly required, when the Regiment
is in action.
N. B. The Surgeon-Major muft bealfo prefent, when
his Regiment is in action.

' Art. 8. The Captains are ftri&ly to oblige the

men of every tent to join their pay, and mefs
together.
Nothing contributes fo much to the prefervation
of the foldiery, as the eating of warm victuals every
day, for which reafon, when they cannot provide
otherwife for themfelves, they muft eat their am
munition-bread boiled up in water, with fome
fait in it, and the Captains and commanding Of
ficers of Regiments fhall be anfwerable, that their
men keep a good mefs, and make the pot boil
conftantly once a day.
N. B. The mefles mufl be divided in fuch a manner,
that there may be always left off duty a fufficient
number to provide vidluals for their abfent com
rades.

CHAP.
2^.2 R E © V L A T I Q N S

CHAP. XXIX.

Concerning the March of an Army.

Article i.
WHEN the commander in chief .orders
the army to march by the left, all fqua-
drons are to wheel to the left, and march off by
Divifions.
N. B. When a Regiment is to march off by the left,
and to move out of its Encampment, the Kettle-
Drummer and Trumpet-Major, or Hautboys, are
immediately to poft themfelves to the Troop or
Squadron upon the left flank ; in like manner when
a Regiment is to march out of Garrifon by the left,
the ftandard bearers, trumpeters or hautboys, and
the Kettle-drummer, are to be affembled, and for
med with the left Troop or Squadron, and not with
the General's, as is ufual at other times.
When the army is to decamp, the horfes, before
they are loaded, are to be rid to water with bredoons
on, becaufe, being led with halters only, they are
fubje£t to break loofe; nor mud any Trooper be
permitted to lead more than one.

Art. 2. Every Regiment (hall have a Waggon-

Mafier, to whom, in time of war, his Majefty
will allow 3 rix-dollars, and a portion of bread per
month, out of the general fund, and alfo thirty
rix-dollars for a faddle horfe : on a march, he is
to attend the baggage, taking care that the waggons
follow one another regularly and clofe, and move
up to their ground and off again in good order :
and
 for the Cavalry. 243
mod to render the fervants obedient to all his di
rections, ftrict orders to thac effecl: muft be given,
both to thofe which belong to the commander
in chief of the Regiment, and to every other
Officer.
The Regimental waggon-Mafters muft be re
gularly pofted upon the baggage, by the Waggon-
Maller General.

CHAP. XXX.
Further Obfervations and Inftru&ions
concerning Foraging-Parties.
Article. 1.
THE Quarter-Mafter-General is firft to recon
noitre the ground, where the army is to forage,
after which he will be much better able to fix
the difpofition of the covering party with the
General, or Officer who commands in chief.

Art. 2. When the foragers arrive &t their

ground, they muft be all drawn up together, to
receive fuch orders upon the fpot as circumftances
may render it necefiary to give, after which every
Regiment marches off to forage in its appointed
place,
.N. B. The foragers of the firft Regiment in the front,
muft match flow, to prevent thofe which follow,
from being obliged to run, which the Officers
are to prohibit on pain of very fevert punifti-
ment.
CL* Art.
244 Regulations
I Art. 3. When the Army is to forage near the
enemy, and where there are copies and villages
contiguous, in which they may have planted am-
bufcades, no man muft be fuffered either to warrder
from his party* or to venture into them ; and if
there is forage in the copfes, the horfes muft be left
at fome diftance from them in the open field, and
the trufles, when made up, brought to them on foot.
N. B. The trufles are to be bound up with four fo
rage-cords, to prevent the horfes backs from being
galled.
The private men muft be taught, in time of peace,
how to make up trufles of forage ; how to load their
horfes alfo, and in what manner to mount afterwards,
and ride with th«m.

CHAP. XXXI.
Further Directions to be obferved by
the Grand-guard.
Article t.
THE Grand-guards, or advanced polls muft
be difpofed as much as poflible in fuch a
manner, as not to have any defile too clofe to them,
and the fentries planted fo as to be able to dif-
cover every thing that paffes, without being ex-
pofed themfelves.
Art. 2. When the grand-guard has any reafon
to be apprchenfive of an attack, it muft retire,
as
 for the Cavalry. 245 4
as foon as it is dark, under cover of the army,
where it is alfo to continue the day following,
in cafe the weather fhould happen to be very
foggy ; and not advance towards the enemy a-
gain, till all the intervening country has been
thoroughly reconnoitred.

Art. 3. The patroles are to keep near their

pofts, becaufe by advancing too far, they may,
ih the night-time, be eafily furprifed and car
ried off,

Art. 4. The videts, having cocked their car

bines, muft challenge the patroles when they ap
proach within a few paces off their pofts, and are
not to demand the counter-fign too loud, left it
ihould be difcovcred by the Enemy.

Art. 5. "When any poft belonging to the

Grand-Guard is alarmed, the poft neareft to it,
muft immediately repair to the fpot, and the
commanding Officer of the Grand-Guard, pro
vided he finds it' necefiary, is to draw in all his
fentries, and march the whole to the place where
it happened.

Q, J ... CHAP,
 *4& Regulati oh*
hi '

CHAP. XXXII.
Of Convoys.
Article, i.
' A N Officer, having the command of a convoy*
jf"\ muft take all poffible precautions for his fecuri-
ty ; and although circumftances may happen upon*
his march, for which it is impoffible to prefcribe
particular rules of conduft, and which muft, at
all events', be referred to his own difcretion ;
rieverthelefs, he will in general find great help
upon thefe occafions from the following in-
ftructions.

Art. 2. The commanding Officer of a convoy,

muft endeavour, before- his march, to procure
fome good intelligence concerning the enemy's
out-parties ; and as the Commandant of the place,
from which the convoy is to march, and thofe of
fuch other places as it is to pafs by, are the moft
proper perfons to apply to for affiftance ; he muft
therefore take fuch meafures, as will enable
him to keep up a conftant intercourfe with
them.
Art. 3. The time appointed for the march of
a convoy, muft be kept as profound a fecret as
poffible : fome particular day may firft be given
out for it, in order to impofe upon the enemy,
after which the convoy can depart fooner; but
the
 for the C a v A L K f. 247
ihe gate of the town muft, if pofllble, be kept
fhut both before, and after its march.
Art. 4. The commanding Officer of a convoy
muft be very vigilant on his march, and keep
patroles conftahtly out, not only in the front,
but in the rear likewife, in order to deprive the
enemy of all opportunities of falling upon him
unexpectedly.
Art. 5. The commanding Officer of a convoy
muft divide well mounted Huflars amongft the
carriages, and take all poffible care that they
•follow clofe, one after another ; nor is any fingle
one to be permitted to halt for forage, left the -
march mould be thereby retarded, or the train
lengthened, to prevent which it is alfo neceflary
to fee, that they are not over-loaded.
Art. 6. An Officer, having the command of
a fmall efcort, muft condudt the waggons, or
whatever he may have to efcort, in the center
of it; and muft never march through Copfes,
Woods, or villages, till they have been firft re
connoitred by a fmall party proportionable to
his command, which he is to advance before him
for that purpofe; if he be attacked, he muft en
deavour as much as poffible, to preferve his rear
free and fecure ; and muft draw up the carriages
on the moll commodious piece of ground,
till, by an obftinate refiftance, he may have
difperfed the enemy, and can purfue his march.

Art. 7. An Officer commanding a large ef

cort, is to have a van-guard to reconnoitre the
Q^4 way
248 Regulations
way before him, and likewife a rear guard, both
compofed of Huffars or Dragoons: he muft alfd
detach fmall parties to patrole upon the flanks,
with orders carefully to examine all copfes, woods
and villages contiguous to the road ; to march up
to the top of every adjacent hill, or eminence,
and take a furvey of the country, and, by giving
intelligence upon their difcovery of any danger,
prevent his being furprifed.
N. B. An Officer having the command of a detach
ment of Infantry, flull never divide them into fmall
platoons, on pain of being cafhiered ; but when
his efcort confiits of a whole battalion, he fhall poft
one divifion in the front of the carriages, two in
the center of them, and the fourth in the rear: if
he has cavalry, they muft be divided, in proportion'
to their numbers, between the divifions ; he is
moreover to take particular care that the waggons
follow in clofe fucceffion, one after another, nor
fall into too long a train.

Art. 8. When there is any hollow way to pafs,

an advanced guard is to march through firft ;
and fome platoons, or divifions, according to the
ftrength of the detachment, muft be ordered to
take pofleflion of the eminencies on each fide, be
fore the efcort with the carriages is to pafs.
N. B. The platoons, or divifions, are to remain upon
the eminencies, till the efcort has pa/Ted the hollow-
way, in order to deter the enemy from making any
attempts to obftrucS it- : and after the whole has
marched through, they are to fall into the rear of
their command again.

Art. 9. The utmoft care and precaution muft be

taken, in the conducing of powder- waggons; the
mea
 for the .Cava l'r y. j/49
men muft not be fuffered to fmoke tobacco, and
the carriages are to be driven gently over ftone-
pavements, left the powder fhould take fire, be-
caufe fuch an accident might be attended with very
bad confequences : And if at any time a powder,
corn, bread, or forage- waggon, fhould happen to
break down upon the road, the directions before
given in Chap. 24, Art. 19, relating to fuch acci
dents, are to be obferved.

Art. 10. Wherever an efcort halts a night, the

commanding Officer muft have the waggons al
ways carefully fecured from fire ; and the defile,
village, or town fo effectually guarded, as to re
main expofed to no danger from the enemy.

Art. 11. The commanding Officer is to poft

a detachment of his cavalry towards the enemy,
by way of grand -guard, and keep patroles con-
ftantly going during the night, that in cafe the
enemy fhould make any difpofition to attack him,
he may be able to receive timely intelligence of it.

Art. 12. When the commanding Officer of a

convoy has certain intelligence, that the enemy
are in motion, he muft, if circumftances require
it, immediately fend advice thereof to his com
mander in chief, and to the garrifon moll conti
guous : and when it happens, that he has undoubt
ed reafon to expect being attacked, it will then
become more prudent for him, notwithllanding
the enemy fhould be even fuperior in numbers, to
march againft them himfelf, and begin the attack,
rather than wait to receive it ; upon emergencies
of which kind, it is always incumbent upon the
com.
t$0 R" 1 G V L A T I 6 rf s
commanding Officer to take, as much as he pof-
fibly can, the advantage of the ground.

Art. 13. If the enemy are much too powerful,

and it is abfolutely impoflible for the convoy to
maintain its ground againft them, but the com
manding Officer has at the fame time fufficient
feafon to expect relief by fome means or other,
he mull, in that cafe, provided the circumftances
of time and ground will admit of it, form a bar
ricade with the carriages, and fend intelligence of
his fituation, to all the places from which he can
expect any afliftance.
In general let it be obferved, that it becomes
a good Officer to take all imaginable precautions;
to deny himfelf during the whole march, all man
ner of eafe and indulgence, and fludy, in a par
ticular manner, to render himfelf confpicuous for
diligence, and attention to his duty.
N. B. When a waggon breaks down, the loading
muft be distributed amongft the others, and it re
moved out of the way, fo as not to obftrudl the
march of the remaining part of the column.

CHAP. XXXIII.
Of Patroles.
Article 1.
S the Patroles ufually confift of a few men,
A and are always detached in the night-time ;
 fir the C a ▼ a l r T. i$t

generally to dangerous places, and more than

once to the fame ; they are therefore, as much
as poffible, to avoid going at certain hours, and
not to keep conftantly oneway, either in their
march out, or return.

Art. 2. The Patroles are always to march at

fome diftance behind one another, efpecially in
paffing defiles ; and are not to enter any village,
without having firft detached a man or two to re
connoitre it, and to examine either the prieft,
conftable, or fome inhabitant, concerning the e-
nemy. » s

Art. 3. The men who are furtheft advanced

in the front of the Patroles, are frequently to halt,
and liften whether they can hear any thing ; to do
which they muft difmounr, and lay their ears clofe
to the ground : On Horfeback, they are to move
as gently as poffible, are not to fing, to fpeak
loud, or to fmoke tobacco, without a Hopper over
the pipe, to hinder the fire from being feen : the
horfes muft be likewife prevented, as much as
poffible, from neighing, or making any noife.

CHAP.
35? Regulations

CHAP. XXXIV.
Of Ambufcades.
Article i.
WHEN an Officer would plant his party in am
bufcade, he mull, with great caution, fix upon
the thicket, or other fituation the moft con
venient for his purpofe before hand ; muft keep
his defign an inviolable fecret; march to the
place either in the nighttime, or at day-break, ■
and have it firft reconnoitred, before he takes '
pofleflion of it, left he himfelf Ihould fall into
the fame fnare, which he was preparing for the
enemy.
Art. 2. After the ambufcade is planted, the
commanding Officer muft fecret his men in fuch
a manner, as not poffibly to be difcovered : if
it be in a wood, he is to poft his fentries in trees
during the day-time ; if in an open country, on
the neareft eminencies, fo that nothing may efcape
their obfervation : but in the night, he is to take
fuch other precautions for his fecurity, as are or
dinarily made ufe of.
N. B. In an open country, the fentries are to lie flat
upon the ground in the day-time.

Art. 3. The whole party are to keep their

horfes bridled, and in conftant readinefs, in the
day-
 for the CAvalry. 253
day-time ; and the commanding Officer mull fre
quently call the roll over, that no one may have
any opportunity to fteal away, and give intel
ligence to the enemy : but if notwithftanding,
fuch an accident mould happen, he muft im
mediately either make a retreat, or change his
poft. "
Art. 4. The Officer is not to fally out with
his party too haftily, but to take good time, when
he perceives that his ftratagem will fucceed, and
the enemy fall into his fnare.
Art. 5. If any ftraggling foldiers, peafants,
or other perfons happen to fall into the ambuf-
cade, they are to be taken prifoners, and kept in
fafe euftody : in the night-time the commanding
Officer muft be careful that his men keep a pro-
foundfilence ; muft fuffer no fires to be made,
give out no counter-fign, and prohibit all manner
of noile ; fdme of the fentries are moreover to
lie down at their pofts, placing their ears clofe
to the ground, that they may be • able to hear the
approach of any thing the fooner ; on which
account they are Jikewife to be relieved the
oftener.
Art. 6. When an Officer -has any foundation
to imagine, that the enemy have acquired intel
ligence of him, he muft either change his poft,
or make a retreat, as has been directed in a pre
ceding article.

CHAP.
* 54 Regulations

CHAP. XXXV.
OfOut-Partics.
Article i.
ALTHOUGH very good intelligence
may now a days be had from fpies, never-
thelefs it is on many occafions neccflary to fend
out parties -, and it is moreover the only method,
to form recruits, and to infufe courage into them ;
becaufe it is too dangerous, to defer the firft
trial of men, till the day of a general en
gagement.
The commanding Officers of parties, muft be
very careful on their march, and in a particular
manner attentive to the execution of their duty,
becaufe the following articles will furnifh them
with inftru&ions for their conduct upon moft oc
cafions-
Art. 2. An Officer who is detached on party,
fhould be thoroughly acquainted with the country,
but if deficient in that refped, he muft be pro
vided with proper guides.
Art. 3. An Officer on party muft always avoid
being feen, and for that reafon is to march chiefly
in the night time, till he has executed his charge;
after* which he muft make his retreat by a dif
ferent road.
Art.
 /ur /& Cavalry. 25$
Aft. 4. An Officer on party is to fhun all
villages ; but if he is obliged to pafs through any,
he muft do it in the night time ; and when it
happens, that he cannot avoid marching through
a village even in the day-time, he is not to do it
regularly by troops, or fquadrons, but in a proT
mifcuous and confufed manner, in order to pre
vent the inhabitants as much as poflible, fron^
judging of the ftrength of his party.
Art. 5. An Officer on party, muft carefully
reconnoitre all fuch fufpicious places, as he is
obliged to pafs ; muft always guard againft a fur-
prife, keep his defigns a fecret, and frequently
tell over his men, left he fhould be betrayed by
any deferters from his own party.

Art. 6. When an Officer fuffers his party to

take refrefhment, he is to do it in the open field,
and never in houfes, or villages ; he muft at the
fame time be particularly careful, that nothing
belonging to the inhabitants is damaged, and
manage them in fuch a manner, as to prevent
their betraying him to the enemy.
Art. 7. When an Officer marches on command
in the night-time, he muft alwas keep his advanced
guard at a fmall diftance only before him, and
likewife have it ftronger than in the day, that in
cafe it fhould happen to meet with any detached
party of the enemy, it may be fufficient to repulfe
them at once, becaufe at that time, every other
meafure will be impracticable.

Art.

J
'&
256 Regulations
Art. 8. An Officer on thefe commands is to
divide his men into fmall parties, formed in two
ranks, that, if it becomes neceflary to difcover
himfelf, he may both perplex the enemy the more,
and mew a larger front : this difpofition, more
over, will at all events better enable him to fe-
cure his retreat ; neverthelefs he muft take care,
that the whole may be always in a capacity to join
upon occafion, and to form a larger body, if cir-
cumftances fhall require it.
N. B. Small Parties of the enemy are not to be pur
sued rafhly, or too far, particularly where there is
any reafon to apprehend they may have a referve.

CHAP. XXXVI.
Of Night-Marches.
Article 1.
AS it may very eafily happen, that in the march
ing of a large detachment in the night time,
fome Troops or Squadrons may lofe therrifelves,
efpecially where there are any crofs-roads, or diffi
cult paffes : in order therefore to prevent fuch acci
dents, two or three guides muft be procured, if
poffible ; and, after they have fatisfied each other
concerning the route, by a previous consultation to
gether, be diftributed in the detachment.
Art. 2. The commanding Officer at the head
of the detachment muft march flow, provided the
na-
■ T
 for the Cavalry. 257
nature of his expedition will admit of it; and
wherever he finds any by-roads on the march, he
muft poft a few Men there, to direct the fucceeding
Squadron ; which Squadron is to repeat the fame
caution, and fo on throughout the whole.

Art. 3. As it is almoft impoflible for Squadrons

to keep conftantly clofe to one another ; and as it
likewife frequently happens, that in order to con
ceal a march from the enemy, no Trumpet muft be
founded, or Drqm beaten, which would otherwife
ferve for a Direction in the night-time; agoodnon-
commiflloned Officer therefore, with four, five, or
fix men, muft be appointed to the rear of every
Squadron, who are to divide themfelves, and to
form a chain in the interval between it and the one
fucceeding, ia order to prevent any miftake of the
toad.
Before the detachment marches off, the com
manding Officer muft be careful to exhort the Offi
cers leading Troops, or Squadrons, ftrictly, to ob-
ferve all the above directions ; and muft alfo have
feveral orderly men to attend him ; and, if poffible,
. more than one guide in the front.

Art. 4. The advanced-guard is not only to be

ftronger in the night-time, and to march only at a
fmall diftance from the main body, but alfo, when-
foever it fhall happen unexpectedly to meet a body
of the enemy, muft inftantly charge it with all pof
fible vigour ; on which account, and in order to
be in continual readinefs, it is always to march with
advanced arms. . '. . ; \ _ .

... R N. B. In
258 Regulations
N. Br In the day-time, the advanced- guard is ufual.y
to march at a confiderable diftance from the main-
body, but not out of fight ; and mull have a few
good men, or a fmall party advanced before it, to
give timely intelligence to the commanding Officer,
in cafe they fhould difcover any thing of the enemy.

CHAP. XXXVII.
Of making a Retreat.
Article 1.
IN order to fecure the retreat of a large detach
ment in the beft manner in the prefence of the
enemy, it will be neceffary to form it in two lines,
at the diftance of 200 large paces afunder : the firft
line is to wheel by fours by Squadrons, and retreat
ing through the intervals of the fecond, march a~
bout two or three hundred paces in its rear; ac
cording as it may be more or lefs preffed by the
enemy, and then face about again.
After the firft line has thus moved into the rear
of the fecond, the fecond is to wheel about, and to
march through the firft, and fo on, both lines con
tinuing to retreat in this manner, as long as it may
be neceflary.
Art. 2. During the retreat, a few fmall Parties,
compofed of the beft and braveft Men, are to be
advanced towards the enemy, in order to fkirmifh
with them, and thereby to facilitate the movements
of the main body.
N. B. This
 for ^Cavalry. 259
N. B- This is what may frequently be neceflary for
the rear-guard to put in practice, when the ene
my makes attempts either to obftrufl:, or to reconnoi
tre the march of the enemy.

CHAP. XXXVIII.
Of paffing a Bridge, or fhort Defile,
in the Prefence of the Enemy,
THE commanding Officer having halted his
party clofe to the bridge, or defile, and faced
it towards the enemy, is to make the rear-ranks go
to the right-about, and march through, as quick as
poffible, forming inftantly again, after they .have
paffed, on the oppofite fide ; upon which the front-
rank is then to face from right and left to the cen
ter, to move through at full fpeed by two's, and
draw tip in the rear of the rear- ranks.

CHAP. XXXIX.
Of palling Caufeways, or large De
files, where there is any Danger of
being obftru&ed by the Enemy.
Article 1.
Body of Men, in paffing a large defile, or'
A caufeway, are not only to march in regular
R 2 order
160 Regulations

order, and not too clofe together ; but to be forc

ed with a front fo narrow, as to leave room on
the right flank for one man to move either for
wards, or backwards, with eafe ; that in cafe the
enemy fhould attack them in the pafiage, they
may be able to make a retreat, without being dis
ordered by the firings, which is to be performed
in the following manner : the front rank fires,
then faces to the right, marches one after another
along the flank, and falls into the rear of its di-
vifion again ; after that, the center rank fires,
and laftly the rear ; both ranks facing to the right,
after they have given their fire, and marching to
the rear, in the fame manner as the front rank did ;
which muft be continued till they have retreated
out of the defile.

Art. 2. When a body of Troops in a defile are

to fire advancing, the above- defcribed difpofition
muft be obferved; namely, the center- rank, as
foon as the front has fired, is to advance before it,
and fire ; after that the rear rank ; then the front
again ; and fo on fucceflively, till they have pafled
through the defile, nothing further being required,
than to keep up an alternate and brifk fire, and
to leave a -fufficient fpace upon the flank, for a
horfe to pafs by without any obftru&ion.

PART
 I I

for the Cavalry. 261

/

PART VI.
O F

GARRISON DUTY.

CHAP. I. ,
Of Divine Worfhip in Garrifon.
Article 1.
DIVINE Service fhall be performed twice
every Sunday, and Faft-day: when the
church-bell rings, the Troops, or Squadrons,
are to be aflembled, and drawn up before their
Captains quarters, and the Rolls called ; and no
Officer, non-commiflioned Officer, Trumpeter,
Drummer, or private Man, who is not on duty,
fhall be abfent : after the Troops or Squadrons
are formed, the Captains are to march them to
church.
N. B. Every Captain muft march his Troop, or
Squadron, complete to church, in Officers and non-
commiffioned Officers, as well as private men.
The * Trumpeter is to found the call to church,
in the front of the main-guard, when the bell rings
the fecond time. /
R 3 / ArU
* The Drummer is to beat the call, &c Drag. Rtgul.
262 Regulations
Art. 2. All Officers (hall march to, and from
church with their men, and are noc to go out of
church till the minifter has quitted the pulpit :
and to prevent any non-cornmiffioned Officer, or
private Man, from going out of church during
the fervice, a non commiffioned Officer fhall be
polled at every door.
Where there is a Roman Catholic church in a
garrifon, the men who profefs that religion muft
be ferit to it, under the care of a non-commiffi
oned Officer.

Art. 3. Soldiers guilty of behaving indecently,

or irreverently, during divine fervice, are to be
confined as foon as it is ended, and punifhed :
They muft be ordered to conduct themfelves in a
becoming manner, and to be, in general, devoutly
attentive to the word of God, but particularly fo
•to the prayers and the bleffing.
N. B. When a garrifon-, confifting of a Troop, Squa
dron, or Regiment, is to go to the town- church, the
commanding Officer muft endeavour to get one par
ticular part, large enough to contain the whole, af-
figned for their feparate ufe ; otherwife it will be im-
poflible for him to govern their behaviour during the
fervice.

Art. 4. No Trooper, or Dragoon, fhall be or

dered, the day on which he is to receive the holy
facrament, on guard, or any other duty that may
Tall to his turn ; but muft either get it performed
before, or defer it till afterwards.
The communion muft be administered every 14
Days in all garrifons ; and the Captains are to take
care, that their men go to receive it.
R 4 CHAP.
 for the Cavalry. 263

CHAP. II.

General Rules for the Condud ofCom

mandants in Garrifons.
Article 1.
THE Commandant in every garrifon muft be
always on the parade at guard- mounting,
to fee that the whole mounts in good order, and
that the men are clean, and welldrefTedi forfuch
irregularities as he may obferve, he is afterwards
to reprimand the Captains in whofe Troops, or
Squadrons, they may happen, and enjoin them to
review their men with more care before their
quarters, and bring them to the parade in better
order.
Art. 2. The commandant fhall be anfwerable,
that the entire duty of the garrifon is always per
formed in a proper manner, and exactly accord
ing to the Directions given in thefe Regulations x
He muft be alfo careful to promote ftricl: fubor-
dination amongft the Officers, and good Difci-
pline amongft the non-commiffioned Officers, and
private men : and his Majefty depends upon them
in a particular manner, for the executing of thi*
order.
Art. 3. When a Commandant receives intelli
gence of any gypfies, thieves, or highwaymen,
he is immediately to fend out parties to appre-
R 4 hend
 164. 'Rke'ULATIONS
hend them, if poflible, and confine them till fuis
ther orders.

Art. 4. His Majefty having obferved, that

fubordination has lately not been kept up with
that ftrictnefs which he requires ; it is, therefore,
his command, that, for the future, it fhall be en
forced with the utmoft feverity, and without the
leaft refpect of perfqn.

CHAP. Ill,

Of the Authority of Governors, and

Commandants.
Article r,
WHEN Cavalry and Infantry lie in garrifon,
together, the commanding Officer of a
Regiment mall not interfere with any part of the
duty relating to the garrifon, but fhall be obedi
ent to all the orders of the Governor and Com
mandant of it, although himfelf be a General in
the army, and the Commandant a Colonel only.

Art. 2. The Governor and Commandant are

entirely to give up the care and judicial Manage
ment of Regiments to their refpective Generals and
commanding Officers ; neverthelefs, no General,
or commanding Officer, has a Power to releafe any
Officer from confinement, or to punifh any Sol
dier,
 for the C a v a l r y. 265

dier, without having firft made a report thereof

to them, by the Major of the Regiment.
JT. B. Commanding Officers of Regiments, are per
mitted to punifh non-commiffioned Officers and Sol
diers with the picket, wooden- horfe, or tying neck
and heels, for fmall crimes committed, contrary to
fome particular order of their own Regiment ; and
are only to make report thereof to the Governor and
Commandant, after fuch priloners have received their
punifhment, and are releafed again ; but the nature
of their crimes mult be at the fame time fignified in
fych report.

Art. 3. When any Officer, non-commiffioned

Officer, or Soldier, in garrifon, is guilty of a dif-
pbedience of the Governor's orders, the General,
or commanding Officer of the Regiment to which,
the Officer or Soldier fo offending belongs, can
confine him, but not punifh, without the Gover
nor's leave.

Art. 4. No General, or commanding Offi

cer of a Regiment in a garrifon, fhall affume
any authority over the inhabitants, that be
ing the fole province of the Governor or Com
mandant, unlefs it fhould become neceflary, on
fome fudden occafion, to confine one, on account
of any quarrel between him and the foldiers ; or,
when a foldier makes any juft complaint againft
his landlord : Occurrencies of this nature muft be
reported by the Adjutants to the Governor or
Commandant, who has a difcretionary power ei
ther to releafe or punifh fuch inhabitant.

Art.
266 Regulations
Art. 5. When a Regiment is to exercife the
day following, to go through the firings, to bury,
or to execute any foldier, to grant furloughs, to
fend out parties, or to perform any other duties of
the like nature, the Major of the Day of fuch
Regiment muft inform the Governor, or Com
mandant thereof, the evening before at orderJ y
time, in order to obtain his permiffion.

Art. 6. No Officer, though he may have bu-

finefs to prevent his attending the parade in the
mcrning, and at orders in the evening, fhall go out
of the garrifon, without leave obtained from the
Governor or Commandant, much lefs lie a night
out of it ; and every Officer who difobeys this or
der, fhall forfeit a month's pay to the invalid fund.
N. B. The general directions here given, concerning
the authority of Governors and Commandants, are
in like manner to take place in fmall ganifons ; and
the Commandants thereof are to be treated with
equal deference and refpect by all Officers under their
Command.

Art. 7. All perfons, who pafs in and out of

the garrifon, and are reported to the Officer com-
tnanding the main-guard, muft be reported to the
Governor, and the Commandant.

CHAP.
 for the Cavalr Y. 267,

CHAP. IV.

The ufual Guards in Garrifons, and

their Manner of Mounting.
Article 1.
DURING the time of year, when Regiments
are affembled for exercifing, a grand-guard
fhall be appointed, compofed of 150 men, in e-
very garrifon containing a whole Regiment, with
a proportionable number of Officers and non-com-
miflioned Officers, under the command of a Field-
Officer : which guard is to furnifh a feparate one,
for every port belonging to the garrifon.
The grand-guards are always to be relieved at
nine o'clock in the morning ; and, where there is
a whole Regiment in a garrifon, are to mount
from the firft of May, to the firft of November.
N. B. As long as grand-guards continue to be polled,
the main- guard is only to confifr. of a non-commifli-
oned Officer, and fix Men, and every port-guard of
a lance-corporal and three.

Art. 2. The grand guards in all garrifons are

to mount from the ift of May to the ift of Sep
tember : where there are only one or two Squa
drons in a garrifon, the grand-guard is to be ad
vanced before one of the ports, and a Lance-
Corporal likewife with three men polled at every
one.
In
*68 Regulations
In a garrifon where there is one complete Squa
dron, one Officer, or non-commiffioned Officer,
and 20 Men, are to mount the grand guard, and
nine are to be furnifhed for the ports : but if un
complete, one non-commiffioned Officer and 12
Men are to compofe it ; it is to be ported by the
commanding Officer, fometimes before one port,
and fometimes before another, and to be governed
in all refpe&s by the preceding Regulations for
field duty.
In a garrifon where there is more than one Squa
dron, the ftrength of the grand-guard muft be
proportionably augmented.
N. B. The grand- guard is always to march back int«
the garrifon at the retreat.

Aft. 3. In winter time, when there is no grand-

guard, all the guards are to mount at eleven.
Every Troop of Horfe, or Squadron of Dra
goons, is to furniffi one non-commiffioned Officer
and 12 Men for the guard, who are to affemble
early enough at their Captains quarters, to be af
terwards on the grand parade, at the time they
were ordered.
The Captains, and fubaltern Officers of Troops
or Squadrons, are carefully to review their men,
and to fee that they are well dreffed, and mount
the guard always in the fame good and complete
order, as when his Majefty is prefent.

f Art. 4. When a whole Regiment of Horfe

is affembled together in a garrifon, it fhall furnifh
a
+ When a Regiment of Dragoons, confifHng of 1 o Squa
drons, is in garrilbn together, two Captains and feven Sub
alterns,
 for the Cavalry* 269
a Captain and three fubaltern Officers every day
for the guard : where there is only one Troop, a
non-commiflioned Officer fhall mount the guard :
when there are two, a fubaltern Officer fhall mount:
when there are three or four, two Subalterns fhall
mount : when there are five or fix, a Captain fhall
march off the guard, and go the grand rounds^
and two Subalterns mount : when there are feven
or eight, a Captain and three Subalterns fhall
mount.
N. B. The Captain and fubaltern Officers belonging
to the guard, are to wait upon the Colonel, or com
manding Officer, at the time the men aflemble be
fore their Captains' quarters, and all fuch orders. as
he may give relating to the guard, they are to de
liver to the non-commiflioned Officers.

Art. 5. A non-commiflioned Officer is always

to march the men for guard of his Troop, or
Squadron, to the parade -, and when he gives the
word of command, he is to ftand about one pace
advanced upon the right flank, facing to the left :
when the rear ranks clofe to the front, in order to
march off, he is to poft himfelf two paces before
the center of the lft divifion.

Art,
alterns, fhall mount guard every day : when there are eight
or nine Squadrons together, a Captain and fix Subalterns
are to mount : when there are fix or feven, a Captain and
five Subalterns are to mount : when there are four or five,
a Captain and four Subalterns are to mount : when there are
three, a Captain is to march off the guard, and to go the
grand rounds, and three fubalterns are to mount : , when
there are two, two Subalterns are to mount; end when
there is but one, one Subaltern is only to mount.
2jo Regulations
Art. 6. When the non-commiffioned Officer
has marched up to his ground oa the parade, he
makes his Men clofe their files, and order their
arms.
After the whole have taken up their ground,
and the guard is to be formed, the Officers poft
themfelves in a rank entire, according to feniority,
in the front, and draw their fwords ; after which
the Adjutant gives the word of command to the
whole, to fhoulder their arms.
N. B. The Trumpeters, or Drummers, poft them
felves before the center of the line of Officers.

Art. 7. The parade, being fhouldered, the Ad

jutant gives the word,
Face to the right !
March !
upon which the non-commiffioned Officers march
to the front of the center, in the rear of the Offi
cers, draw up according to fizes in a fingle rank,
and face at once towards the Officers.

Art. 8. The Adjutant then gives the word,

Halt! Front! The guards arc then to be told off,
after which the Adjutant gives the word of com
mand, as follows ;
Officers and non-commiffioned Officerst march to
your pojts !
the Officers having taken their polls,
Reft your carbines !
Shoulder your carbines !
Rtar^
 jar the Cavalry. 271
Rear- ranks clofe to the front!
March !
To the right wheel by divijions !
March !
after which every Officer and non-commiffioned
Officer takes his poft in marching order.
N. B. At the word of command, Officers and non-
commijftoned Officers march to your pojts ! the Officer*
poft themfelves in the front of their divifions, the
non-commiffioned Officers in the front-rank, and the
Trumpeter, or Drummers, upon the right flank.

Art. 9. The Captains muff, aflemble the men

for guard belonging to their refpective Troops, or
Squadrons, at their quarters, before they march
to the grand parade, and fee them perform fome
parts of the exercife, particularly the motions of
making ready, in order to render them as quick,
and expert in loading, as poffible. The whole
likewife, when formed on the grand parade, are to
practife together the motions of making ready, in
the fame manner as they are performed by the In
fantry.

Art. 10. All Officers and non-commiffioned

Officers, who are not on duty, . fhall be prefenc
at guard mounting on their refpective regimental
parade, as well as on the grand parade, nor go
away till the guard is entirely marched off; and
the commanding Officers are ftrictly to promote
the obedience of this order.
N. B. All the non-commiffioned Officers, not belong
ing to the guard, fhall draw up in a rank entire, in
the front of the parade,
Art.
272 Regulations
Art. 11. All guards are to keep the ordinary
pace, in marching to their pofts : the Officers and
non-commiffioned Officers muft frequently look
back' on their divifions, to fee that the men don't
grow carelefs, that they keep filence, carry their
arms well, and march with ftraight ranks, for the
neglect of which themfelves fhall be anfwerable ;
and all FUeld- Officers are required to take care that
thefe directions be obferved.
N. B. When a Field-Officer fees any Officer, or non-
commiffioned Officer, marching his men in an irre
gular manner, he muft order him to be immediately
relieved and confined.
When a march is f founded, the arms arc to be
carried fliouldered, whether it rains or not.

Art 12. In a garrifon where there is but one

Troop of Horfe, or Squadron of Dragoons, a
main-guard only is to be mounted , the non-com
miffioned Officer commanding which, is to parade
it at the Captain's quarters, and march from thence
to relieve the old guard ; after having done which,
he is to detach a Lance Corporal and three men
to every port ; and likewife poft one fentry at the
Captain's quarters, one over the arms, and a third
over the prifoners.

Art. 13. In a garrifon where there are not lefs

than three Troops of Horfe, or two Squadrons
of Dragoons, the gua<d is to mount in the fame
manner, as is before directed for a Regiment.

Art. 14. When Cavalry and Infantry are in

garrifon together, the Cavalry are only to mount
a re-
f When a march is beat, &c. Drag. Rtgul.
 for the Cavalry. 273
a regimental guard, which is to parade and form
at the commanding Officer's quarters, and march
from thence to relieve the old guaid.

Art. 15. When Cavalry and Infantry lie in the

fame garrifon in time ot war, the Cavalry are
to do their duty on horfeback, and to form their
guards on a feparate parade.
N. B. The old guard when relieved, is to march back
to the parade, f founding the troop ; and having taken
up its ground, and returned fwords, is to go to the
right about by fours, and march to quarters.

Art. 16. Patroles muft be fent out at break of

day, and fun-fet in all garrifons, both winter and
fummer, before the opening and fhutting of the
gates ; which are to reconnoitre either the neareft
woods, or villages, according as the garrifon may
be fituated, in order to difcover any parties of the
enemy, which may lie concealed therein : at their
return, the gates are to be either opened, or kept
fhut, according to the nature of their report.
N. B. During the time of year, when grand-guards
mount, thefe patroles are to be furnifhed by them ;
but during the winter, by the main-guard, upon
which occafions they are to faddle their horfes.
In garrifon, the guards are always to mount with
their cuiraffes, boots, and fpurs on, and after they
have relieved the old guards, are to ground their cui
raffes, and lay their carbines over them.
The reliefs are to be marched without cuiraffes.

S / CHAP.
/
f ■■ beating the troop, &C. Drag. Regul.
274 Regulations

CHAP. V.
Of the Difmounting of Guards.
Article i.
THE Officer of the old guard is tp. order his
men to reft their arms, and the -f trumpeter
to found a march, when the new one approaches
within the diftance of about 40 paces : the Officer
of the new guard draws it up three deep, oppo-
fite to the old, and makes his men reft their arms;,
after which the Officer who is to be relieved, de
livers all the orders relating to his guard, to the
Officer who comes to relieve him.
>J. B. The neceffary inftru&ipns for the; mqu^ting andj
relieving of grand guards, have been, already given.
in Part V. of Field- Duty, tp which the Officers pp.,
fuch duties are referred.

Art. 2, After the Officer of the old' guard has

delivered all the orders to the Officer of the new
one, they both take their pofts again, and give
the word of command to their refpective guards,
Shoulder your carbines !
Face to the right !
March !
The new guard then marches up to the ground on
which the old one flood, and forms in one or
two ranks, according to its ftrength; the old guard
marches
i" —~ tne Drummer to beat a march, &c. Drag. Regul.
 for the C a V A l r V. 275
marches off, and draws up in three ranks, oppofite
to the new one : When both guards have faced
about, and ftand fronting each other, the Officers
give the word of command.
Non-commiffioned Officers and Lance Corporalst
march forwards !
after which they Iikewife deliver all their orders.
As foon as the new guard is numbered, the
commanding Officer gives the word,
Firft number, march forwards !
upon which the non commiffioned Officer, or
Lance-corporal, is to march off the relief, and
muft be attentive, when the fentries are delivering
their orders to one another, left they mould omit
any part.
The guard is to remain with ordered arms, du
ring the relieving of the fentries.
Art. 3. As foon as the fentries are relieved,
and fallen into the guard, the commanding Offi
cer orders the whole to fhoulder their arms, and
having completed the files, gives the word.
Reft your carbines !
Tour carbines high in your right arms !
Rear-ranks clofe to the front I
March !
"When the Officer of the old guard has trooped it
off to the diftance of about 100 paces from the
new, he is to form it again, and after that to reft,
to club, to go to the right about, and then to dif-
mifs it.
S 2 The
276 Regulations t
The f Trumpeter is to found the Troop, during
the marching off the guard.
N. B. Non-commiffioned Officers guards are likewife
to be governed by thefe directions in mounting ; ex
cepting that fuch, as have no drum, are to club their
arms, and to be difmified upon the fpot, as foon as
they are relieved.
Particular care muft be taken, when a guard is
trooped off, that the men carry their arms well club
bed, and march properly, efpecially in paffing through
any ftreet. )

Art 4. The new guard remains with refted

arms, till the old one has marched to the diftance
of about forty paces, after which the new guard
orders, and grounds ; and the men go to the right
about.
N. B. The Lance-Corporals that are ported at the
ports, muft be appointed from intelligent old foldiers ;
and the featries are to be likewife fuch, as are moft
remarkable for a good appearance, and dexterity in
handling their arms.
Old foldiers are to be planted fentries over the
arms, and the recruits on the pofts neareft to the
guard, by which means the Officers will be able to
have a conftant eye upon their behaviour, and to
give them occasionally fuch instructions as may be
neceffary.
All guards are to have pickets fixed for the arms.

Art. 5. A guard confilling of about forty men,

muft be formed in * two ranks, and told off in
two divifions ; and the Captain is to poft himfelf
at the head of the firft.
. . A guard
•f The Drummer Is to beat the troop, &c: Drag. Regul.
* —— In three ranks, &c. Drag. Regul.
 for the Cavalry. z'/j"
A guard of about 1 8 men, is to be drawn up in
two ranks, and if only commanded by a non.com
miffioned Officer, a Lance-Corporal mull be
pofted in the center, between the two divifions.
A guard of abouc nine men is to be formed in
a fingle rank, with a Lance-Corporal pofted in the
center.
N. B. On a non-commiffioned Officer's guard, the
non-commiffioned Officer, when his guard goes un
der arms, is always to poll himfelf on the right
flank.
In good weather the arms muft be grounded both
day and night.
If an Officer's guard mounts with a Trumpeter,
or Drummer, he is to take port before the center,
in the rear of the Officer.

CHAP. VI.
Of Relieving Sentries, with Directions
how they are to behave on their
Polls.
Article i.
WHENa relief is compofed of fix fentries
or more, a non-commiffioned Officer muft
march it, and give the word of command at the
relieving of the fentries in the fame manner as has
been direded in Field- Duty : when the fentries
march out of the guard, and form the relief, every
non-commiffion'd Officer or Lance-Corporal calls
out his own numbers.
S3 N. B.
-
tyS R E GV L A T I O N S
N. B. A relief, compofed of three men, is formed
and marched off in one rank } from four to eight in
two ranks, and from nine to any greater number in
three ranks.

Art. 2. The manner in which fentries are re

lieved, and how they are afterwards to fall into
the guard again, has already been defcribed in
the chapter which treats of the relieving of fentries
in Field- Duty, and all the directions there given,
are ftrictly to be obferved in Garrifon.
However it is not unneceflary to remind the
non-commiffion'd Officers and Lance-Corporals,
not to march negligently with their reliefs, to give
the word of command in a diftirct and proper
manner at the relieving of the fenciies, and to
make them perform their motions regularly.
N. B. The Lance Corporals muft have their drawn
fwords in their hands, and are frequently to look
back, and to obferve their reliefs as they march them
along.
In rainy weather, the reliefs are to carry their arms
fecured, and the commanding Officer of the guard
is to have it under arms when the reliefs turn out,
and alfo when they return with the fentries relieved ;
after which he is to complete, and fize it afrefli.
In rainy weather, the Officer, or non-commiffi-
oned Officer, commanding a guard, orders the arms
to be taken into the guard- room, and hung up, fop
which he gives the word of command, as follows »
Reji your Carbines !
Poife your Carbines f
To the right about /
March !

Art,
 fbr the Cavalry. 279
Art. 3. The Lance Corporal ported at the gate
on a port-guard, plants and relieves his own fen-
try : he muft be ordered to fufter no non-com-
miffioned Officer, or private Man to go out of the
gate without a pafsport.
Art. 4. When the Lance- Corporal at the gate
difcovers any perfons of diftinction approaching,
he muft call out to the fentry polled over the arms,
that the Officer, or nbn commiffioned Officer,
commanding the guard may come ; after which,
the Lance-Corporal, provided it be in time of
peace, and the country is free from the plague,
may fuffer fuch perfons to pafs directly to the clerk
of the port, where the Officer, or non- commiffi
oned Officer of the guard is to be already preferit,
In order to examine them, who they are ., what
are their names ; what their profeilion, and in
whofe fervice ; from whence they came, and to
what place they are going ; whether they intend
to pafs through the garrifon, or to ftay in it ; and
how long they propofe to make that ftay ; what
bufinefs they have in it, and where they are to
/odge : afterwards, when the clerk of the port ha§
fearch'ed them, the Officer, or non-conimiffioned
Officer lets them pafs, and muft order his guard
under arms, in cafe there fhall happen to be any
perfon amongft them■, to whom that compliment
is due.
N. B. Wherfany perfons wanting to pafs, will not
fuffer themfelvej to be fearched, the guard muft be
afnftmg to the clerk of the port in compelling them.
in time of peace, and when the country is free"
from the plagcre, perfons of diftindtion muft not b<f
required to produce pafles, but they are neverthelefs
S 4 t«
280 Reghl at ions
to be ftridly examined, according to the directions
above given.
During war-times and plagues, the Lance-Corpo
ral muft ftop all perfons, let them be who they will,
at the barrier, efpecially in fortreffes, unlefs they fhall
have fent fome body before hand, to give intelligence
of their coming ; and the Officer, or non-commiffi-
oned Officer of the port-guard, muft firft examine
them, and demand their pafsports ; after which, pro
vided he finds no reafon to fulpedr. them, they may
be permitted to p.tfs in.

Art. 5. When non commiflioned Officers and

private Men, or when any of the inferior fort of
people want to come into the garrifon, the fentry
at the gate muft bring them to the Officer, or
non- commiflioned Officer commanding the guard,
and fuch non commiflioned Officers and Soldiers
muft be afterwards fent to the main guard; but
the inferior fort of people, after they have been
examined, and their pafsports found authentick,
are to be fuffered to pafs, and the Officer, or non-
commiffioned Officer, is to infert their names in
the report-roll ; but in cafe he has any grounds to
fufpecl: one or other of them, he muft fend him
to the nnin-guard, and at the fame time report
his reafons for fo doing.
N. B. The Lance-Corporal at the gate muft fuffer
no beggars, or travelling Jews to come in, nor ac
cept of any gratuity from perfons wanting to come
in, on pain of running the gantlope.
1

Art. 6. The Lance- Corporal at the gate muft

report all Officers who pafs in and out, to the
Officer of the guard, and the fentry is always to
keep the barrier fhut, and hold the chain in his
hand. ~
N. B.
 for /& Cavalry. 281
N. B. The fentry polled at the gate is always to (land
with fhouldered arms, and the Lance-Corporal with
ordered;

Art. 7. Sentries mull be always alert on their

polls, and watchful to difcover every thing that
pafies both by day and night ; they are therefore
not to keep in their boxes, unlefs it rains or fnows
very hard : if the badnefs of the weather obliges
them to remain in them, they mull neverthelefs
immediately turn out when they perceive any Of
ficers, or perfons of diflinction apptoaching in the
day-time, and the rounds and patroles, or any
thing elfe, in the night : the hoies in their boxes-
are not to be Hopped up either by day or night,
but always kept open, that the fentries may be able
to obferve every thing that pafies, and the rounds
and patroles mull examine, and take care that they
continually remain open.
N. B. Sentries, in good weather, muft always carry
their arms fhouldered : in bad weather, they may
fecure them ; but whenever they fee an Officer ad
vancing towards them, they muft immediately moul
der them again.

Art. 8. Sentries muft have nothing of bufinefs

to do on their polls, mull not lay their arms out
of their hands, or lit down, on pain of running
the gantlope ; nor get drunk, fleep, or quit their
pofts before they are regularly relieved : They
mull alfo, in the night-time, have always chal
lenged before any perfon can come within fifty
paces off them, otherwife they are not alert on
their pofts, and muft be confined the day fol
lowing.
N. B.
eBz Regulations
N. B. After the tatt-too, no ferttry or guard is to reft
their arrris, but to the rounds, or patroles.

Art. 9. Sentries, particularly thofe who are poll

ed within the garrifon, are not to fmoke tobacco,
tior to move beyond the diftance of ten paces frbrrt
their pofts : When any Officers, guards, or perforii
of diftinctions are advancing towards them, they
are immediately to ftand ready to face them, to
fhoulder their arms, and to reft in proper time to
all fuch perfons as are to be received with refted
arms.

Aft. 10. Sentries are to put a flop to all quar

rels and noifes happening near their pofts, and to
give information of them to the firft Officer, of
fion-commiffioned Officer, who paffes by ; yet they
*re, by no means, to go too far from their pofts :
In like manner, whenever they difcover any fire,
they muft call out, and give the alarm.

Art. 11. Sentries are to take great care of all

that is committed to their charge, to keep their
pofts clean, nor to fuffer any thing aboiat them to
be deftroyed or taken away, much lefs be guilty of
doing it themfelves ; and when they are relieved,
muft deliver up all in proper order, on pain of run
ning the gantlope ten times through the regimental
parade.

Art. 12. The fentries polled on the a>f ms muff call

Out, and warn the guard in proper time, whenever
they difcover any perfons advancing, to whom the
guard is to turn out : After the Tatt-too* they are
to challenge all people boldly, nor to fuffer any one
to
 for the Cavalry. 283
to approach near the arms, before they have chal
lenged, and called out a non-com miffioned Officer
of the guard to examine who he is, and what bufi-
nefs he has with the guard.
N. B. , When a fentry pofted on the arms has chal
lenged any perfon, who gives himfelf out for a Field-
Officer, he muft order him to ftand, and then caH
out the guard ; the Officer, or non-commiffioned
Officer, as foon as his guard is turned out, orders
them to fhoulder their arms, and then examines the
Field- Officer ; after which, fuch Officer, in cafe he
has any orders to give concerning the guard, or will
go into the guard-houfe, muft be permitted to pafs.

Art. 13. The fentries pofted on the arms, are

to call out to the f Trumpeter of the guard, when
it is the time to found the retreat, or to boot and
faddle ; muft challenge all patroles in proper time,
and order them to ftand, till they have called to the
guard:
Non-commiJJiened Officer, or, Lance-Corporal,
turn out !
and till they are difpatched : they are in like man
ner to challenge the rounds in time, and order them
to ftand till they have called,
Turn out the guard !
and till they are afterwards difpatched.
Art. 14. The fentries pofted over the prifoners,
are not to fuffer any one to go out, till they
have
+ ' The Drummer of the guard, when it is the time
to beat the Tatt-too, or Reveille, &c. Drag. Regul.
284 Regulations
have called to a non-commiffioned Officer of the
guard, who is to acquaint the Officer commanding
the guard ; after which one man with his arms mult
be ordered to attend him : They are likewife to
prevent all noife and dillurbance, nor to fuffer any
of the prifoners to get drunk, particularly fuch as
are to be punifhed.
N. B. The fcntries potted on the prifoners are to be
anfwerable that, whatever punifliment (hall be feve-
rally ordered tbem, whether that of the picket,
the wooden horfe, the carrying of wood, or the being
/ tied neck and heels, it be inflidted properly ; and to
fuffer none to drink fpirituous liquors, to fmoke to
bacco, to cry out, or make any noife, while they
- are receiving their punifhments.

Art. 15. Sentries pofted over goods of any kind,

muft fuffer no perfons to come near them, but the
proprietors, and fuch as have real bufinefs with them.
N. B. That every man may know how to behave on
his poft, both by day and night, the commanding
Officer of the guard muft give directions for that pui-
pofe to every relief. v

CHAP. VII.
Inftructions to Officers on Guard.
Article 1.
THE Officer of the main-guard, as alfo of the
port-guards, are always to employ capable
and good foldicrs to carry reports ; on which occa-
fions
 for the Cavalr y. 285
fions they. muft be alfo careful to give them full
inftructions ; for if any foldier makes a wrong re
port, or does not know every particular which is ne-
cefiary to be reported, the Officer, or non-cornmif-
fioned Officer, who fent him, mall be anfwerable.
N. B. When a foldier is carrying a report to the
main-guard, and meets any Field-Officer in the
ftreets, he muft make the report to him, and after-
wards proceed on his way to the main-guard.

Art. 2. Every Officer, or non-com miffioned

Officer commanding a guard, muft, without any
cxcufe to be admitted, have his men under arms,
and their carbines refted in proper time, as often as
any perfon paffes, to whom that compliment is due;
the Officer, therefore, or non-commiffioned Officer,
is not to fuffer the men to remain conftantly in the
guard-houfe, nor to continue there himfelf, but to be
frequently walking about in the front of the guard :
All the men muft keep either in, or before the
guard-houfe, both day and night ; and every fol
dier who is not immediately at hand, when the guard
is ordered under arms, fhall be looked upon as one
who has quitted his guard without leave, and pu-
niffied accordingly.

Art. 3. When a foldier goes away from his

guard without leave, he fhall be confined, and the
day following run the gantlope ten times through
150 Men ; the Officer, therefore, or non-co'mmif-
fioned Officer, commanding a guard, is frequently
to order his men under arms, particularly in the
night-time, and have the Roll called, to fee if any
one is wanting.
N. B.
2?6 Regulations.
N. B. The men are not to carry wood on their fhoul-
ders, but every guard fhall have a wood-cart for that
purpofe.

Art. 4. Every Officer, or non-commiffioned

Officer, commanding a guard, muft fee that his
men are always well dreffed : As foon as to • boot
and faddle is founded in the morning, they muft
rife from the guard-bed, muft wafh and comb them-
felves, clean their boots, brufh their hats and clothes,
tighten their ftocks, and put on their fide-arms pro
perly ; afterwards, as foon as it is day, the com
manding Officer, or non-commiffioned Officer, muft
order them under arms, fize them, and examine
whether they, have dreffed themlelves in a proper
manner.
Art. 5. All guards are to grant leave of abfence
to a few men, at the time the horfes are to be rub
bed down every morning, and as often afterwards
as they are to be fed : When they return to their
refpective guards, others are to be fent in their
ftead ; and in fuch manner, that the horfes may be
always properly attended, and taken care of : but
the main-guard is nor, on any other account, to fuf-
fer more than two to be abfent at a time ; nor any
inferior guard more than one, who muft alfo join
their guards again within half an hour. After the
retreat, no man muft be allowed to quit his guard,
on any pretence whatfoeven
Art. 6. No Officer, or non-commiffioned Of
ficer, on a feparate guard, fhall leave it for a mi
nute, either by day or night ; to prevent, there
fore,
* — The Reveille beats, &c. Drag. Regul.
 - ' for the Cavah t. 287
fore, any neceffity of doing it, they muft fend for
their victuals \ and every Officer who abfents him-
felf from his guard for half an hour, fhall be con
fined in a fortrefs for the fpace of a year, and his
pay deducted for the invalid fund.
N. B. No Officer on guard fhall fend for a mattrefs
or night-gown, much Jefs prefume to undrefs him-
felf, but muft keep on all his clothes during the
night>
No Officer muft excufe any man his guard, and
fufrer him to go away, without an order from thfc
Governor, or Commandant of the garrifon.

Art. 7. A report muft be given in every morn*

ing, by a non-commiffioned Officer of the guard,
to the Adjutant, who is afterwards to report to the
commanding Officer, and to all the Field- Officers,
In a garrifon where one, or more Squadrons lie,
the Officer who commands the main -guard muft
make his report, by a non-commiffioned Officer^ to
the commanding Officer of the whole.

Art. 8. A report muft be made by all inferior

guards, as foon as they are relieved, to the Captain,
or Officer, commanding the main-guard ; who is
afterwards himfelf to deliver a general report to the
commanding Officer, and another, by a non-com
miffioned Officer of his guard, to the Field-Offi-
cers.

CHAP.
2S8 Regulations

CHAP. VIII.

Of giving out the Parole.

Article i.
WHERE there is a Regiment in garrifon, the
General, or effective Colonel gives out the
Parole to the Major of the day on the grand parade,
immediately after guard-mounting, who brings it
to the Commandant of the Regiment, and after
wards to the Adjutants, the Quarter- mafters, and
the non-com miflioned Officers, and Lance-Corpo
rals of the guard, during which four fentries from
the main-guard are to be pofted with refted arms,
to prevent any but the proper perfons from hearing
the parole, and the orders.
N. B. In a garrifon where there is no Officer of lb
high a rank as a Major, the eldeft Captain is to give
out the parole.

Art. 2. The Majors are required to take care,

that all the Officers and non-commiffioned Officers
of their refpective Regiments, who are not on duty,
do attend at the giving out of the parole.

Art. 3. The Adjutants are to bring the parole

to their Field-Officers ; and the Quarter-mallers to
the Captains and fubaltern Officers of their Troops
or Squadrons, together with all the orders of the
day.
Art.
 for the Cavalr V. 289
Art. 4. The non-commiflioned Officers and
Lance- Corporals on guard* bring the parole to the
Officers and non-commiffioned Officers of their re-
fpedive guard, together with the orders of the day.
The Quarter- mafters are not to bring the parole to
, any Officers on guard, unlefs it be the command
ing Officer of the Troop, or Squadron, to which
they belong.

Art. 5. In a garrifon where one or two Squa

drons lie, commanded by a M jor, or Captain, he
is himlelf to give out the parole to the Quarter-
mafters, and to the non-commiflioned Officers, or
Lance-Corporals of the guard.
N. B. When there are two Majors in the fame gar
rifon, the youngeft is to receive the parole from the
eldeft, and give it out to the garrifon.
When a Major comes into a garrifonj where a
Colonel, or Lieutenant-Colonel commands, and there
is no Major belonging to it, he muft receive and give
out the parole, as long as he continues in it ; be-
caufe a Field-Officer not only takes command, ac
cording to bis rank in the army, in his own garrifon,
but in all others, though not cpmpofed of the Regi
ment to which he belongs.

Art. 6. When cavalry and infantry lie together

in the fame garrifon, the Majors belonging to both
are to receive the parole from the Commandant to
gether.
In a garrifon compofed of both Cavalry and In
fantry, which is no fortified place, the eldeft Ge
neral, Colonel, or other Officer, upon the foot, takes.
the command, and gives out the parole.

T / CHAP.
290 Regulations

CHAP. IX.
Of opening and (hutting the Gates.
Article 1.
THE gates or barriers rnuft be put to, as foon
as it is dark, and the fentries begin to chal
lenge ; and the wickets are only to be kept open,
to let foot-paffengers in and out, till the gates are
fhut : but when any waggons are to be drove out
or in, the Port- Officers are to have their men under
arms, till they have paffed, and the gates are fhut
again.

Art. 2. In time of war, the gates mull be fbut

as foon as it is dark ; and whenever a gate is to
be opened afterwards, on account of the approach
of any party of men, or otherwife, the guard poll
ed there rnuft firft be reinforced from the main-
guard, before they are to gain admittance ; after
which, the men to be ordered out on the occafion,
are to march through the wicket before the gate is
Opened, and to remain without the barrier, till the
party has pafled through, and the gate is fhut again.

Art. 3, As foon as the + Retreat is founded, a

non-commiffioned Officer of the main-guard, with
two men, and a third to carry the keys, rnuft fhut
the gates ; and the Officers, or non-commiffioned
Officers
t As foon as the Tart-too is beat, &c Drag. Begul.
 for the Cavalry. 291
Officers commanding the port-guards, muft. fee that
they do it in a fecure and proper manner.

Art. 4. "When the non-commiffioned Officer of

the main-guard brings the keys, the port-guards are
to receive them with mouldered arms, and to remain
in that pofition till the gates are fhut, and the keys
carried back again.

Art. 5. All ftrangers, or perfons belonging to

the town, who have been on a journey, and wane
admittance in the night-time, are to be allowed it ;
and the Officer, or non-commiffioned Officer of the
port-guard, muft immediately fend a report to the
main-guard, that a non-commiffioned Officer may
bring the keys, and the gate be opened.
N. B. The keys muft be hung up before the gates on
poll-days, and at fuch other times when it is cer
tainly known there will be occafion to open them,
till the poft, and the perfons fo expe£ted (hall arrive.

Art. 6. The gates are to be opened as foon as

-f-to boot and faddle is founded, and the port-guards,
during the time of opening them, are to remain un
der arms.
N. B. At the opening and (hutting of the gates, all
the directions which have been given, in regard to
the fending out patroles every morning and evening,
arc to be obferved.

T 2 CHAP.

f —_ The Reveille is beat, &c . Drag. %*/.

igi Regulations

GHAP. X.
Of Rounds and Patroles.
Article I.
AN Officer, as he muft be anfwerable for every
thing which happens on his guard, is, never
to leave it for the fpace of half a quarter of an
hour; the neceffity of the fervice requires this punc
tuality, and for this reafon, his Majefty has thought
proper to give his orders in fo peremptory and ftridt
a manner in thefe Regulations, that no Officer, or
non-commiffioned Officer upon guard, may here
after prefume to abfent himfelf from it.

Art. 2. When a Regiment is affembled toge

ther, at the time of year for exercifing, the rounds
are to go from one grand-guard to another, accord
ing to the inftructions given in Field-Duty.

Art. 3. Where a Regiment is in garrifon for

a whole year, patroles of horfe are to keep conftant-
ly going through the ftreets, during the whole night,
in order to prevent all diforders.

Art. 4. When a whole Regiment is toge

ther in a garrifon, the Major of the day muft vifit
all guards, as foon as it is dark, in time of peace;
and after the gates are fhut, in time of war, and fo
go the firft rounds: the commanding Officer of
every guard is to give him the parole, together
- with
 for the Cavalry. 293
with all the orders of the day, and an account alfo
of every thing relating to his guard : if the Major
finds any irregularities on his rounds, that a guard
is not alert, that any of the Men are abfent, that
the Officer, or non-commiffioned Officer cannot give
the proper parole, and does not know the orders of
the day, or is, in any other refpect whatever, defi
cient in his duty, he muft report it, after he has
received the ufual report from the Captain of the
main guard after the Retreat, to the commanding
Officer of the Regiment.
•J

N. B. No Officer fhall entertain people on his guard

in the night-time, nor importune any friend, or
other perfon, to pafs the evening with him ;
but, on the contrary, muft give himfelf up entirely,
and without any fort of interruption, to the care of
his men, and the performance of his du.ty.

Art. f. When the f Retreat is founded, and the

gates are fhut, the port-guards are to make a report
to the Captain commanding the main-guard, who
is afterwards to fend a report of the whole by a
non-commiffioned Officer to the Major of the
day, together with the report-roll ; the Major
afterwards makes a report of his rounds to the Ge
neral, or commanding Officer of the Regiment,
delivers the report-roll, and at the fame time gives
him an account of every thing that has paffed, and
of all the particulars reported to him from the Cap
tain of the main-guard.

Art. 6. When one or two Troops of Horfe, or

Squadrons of Dragoons, lie in a garrifon, the Of
ficer commanding the main-guard is to vifit the pofts
T 3 when
+ When the Tatt-too is beat, &c. Drag. Regul. .
294 Regulations
when it is dark ; and after the Retreat, or Tatt-tcoji
to carry the parole to the commanding Officer, mak
ing, at the fame time, a report of his rounds, and
giving in the report-roll.

Art. 7. In a garrifon compofed of a whole

Regiment, or of three, or more Troops of Horfe,
or Squadrons of Dragoon?, an Officer off Duty,
fhall be given out in, orders, for the night-rounds,
and he muft go at different hours : He is to go
five times in the long nights, after the Mnjor, or, in
fmaller garrifons, after the Officer commanding the
main-guard, has gone his firft rounds, and three in
the fhort ones : They are alio to be called vifiting
rounds, and to give the parole to every guard they
vifit.
N. B. As often as every Officer has gone his rounds,
he muft make a report to the Captain commanding
the main-guard.
The Major of the Day, or the Captain, when
they go their round*, muft take a non-commiffioned
Officer and two men from the main-guard ; the o-
ther Officers, when they go their rounds, are to tajce
a non-commiffioned Officer and two men from one
guard to another ; but when they vifit a guard, on
which there is only one non-commiffioned Officer,
they muft keep the former non-commiffioned Officer
till they come to a guard with two.

Art. 8. When the fentry at the guard difcovers

the rounds coming, he calls out the guard, which
is immediately to fall tinder arms, after which the
commanding Officer orders a non-commiffioned Of
ficer with two men to advance towards the rounds,
who, as foon as he arrives within a proper djftance,
s is
 for the Cavalry. -295
is to challenge, IVho comes there ? and when he is
anfwered, Rounds, he is to demand further, What
Rounds ? After the rounds have made themfelves
known, he comes back to report it to the Officer,
or non-commiffioned Officer, who then gives the
word of command to his guard, Reft your Car
bines ! and calls out to the rounds, Advance
Rounds ! After which the Officer of the rounds,
and the commanding Officer of the guard, having
drawn their fwords, hold the points againft each
other's breaft, when the parole is given : the non-
commiflioned Officer, in the mean time, with the
two men who examined the rounds, ftands faff,
to prevent the rounds from advancing nearer to
the guard, and makes the two men reft their arms
together with the guard, keeping them in thatpo-
fition till the parole is given, and the rounds arc
difpatched.
N. B. The rounds are alfo to reft their arms, toge
ther with the guard ; and after the parole is given,
the two men from the guard, and the rounds are to
fhoulder again : the non-commiffioned Officer, with
the two men, muft then either fall into his guard,
or march with the rounds to the next guard, in which
cafe the former non-commiffioned Officer and two
men, who came with the rounds, are to march back
to their refpedtive guard ; in doing which, they muft
vifit every poft, and pafs for a patrole.
The guard muft remain with refted arms, till the
rounds are marched off.
The rounds are to be received in the fame manner
by non-commiffioned Officers' guards, excepting that
the non-commiffioned Officer of a guard is to give
the parole to the Officer of the rounds, in doing
which, he is to hold the point of his fword againft
the Officer's breaft.
T 4 When
296 'ft'EGULATIONS

When there is onfy one non commiffioned Officer

on a guard, a Lance- Corporal muft be ordered to
advance with two men, to examine the roimds in
the manner above directed ; and the non-commifll-
oned Officer is not to move from his poft, when he
difpatches the rounds.

Art. 9, When an Officer b ordered to go the

Rounds, and does not perform every thing right,
and according to fuch orders as he fhall receive,
for which the Captain, or commanding Officer
of the main guard fhall be anfwerable, he fhall
be confined a year in a fortrefs, and his pay de
ducted for the invalid fund.
Every Officer alfo, or non-commiffioned Offi
cer, commanding a port guard, mull report all
Officers who ntgled going their rqunds according
to orders.

Art. 10. As foon as it is dark, and the kn-.

tries begin to challenge, patroles muft be con-
ftantly fent to the right and left from one guard to,
another, the whole night through : When the pa
troles from the firft guard are difpatched, they are
to return to their guard, and the fecond guard
muft fend out a patrole to the guard next to it •,
and this is to be continued from one guard to an
other, till the laft patrole comes, and reports tq
the main-guard whether every thing was found in
proper order.
N. B. Patroles muft be feht every half "hour from the
main-guard, and are to vifit every poft to which they
are to patrole, both going and Coming back, and to
report fuch fentries as were not alert on their pofts.
1"he Patroles muft go ahout'hvas^mort a time as
?he
 for th C a v a l r y, 297
the Rounds ; as often as it happens otherwife, the
Captain of the main-guard muft inquire into the
reafon.
When Patroles or Rounds meet one another, thofe
who challenge firft are to demand the parole ; but
when Rounds meet Patroles, the Patroles are always
to give the parole to them : non-commiffioned Of
ficers are likewife to be fometiilies fent out with Pa
troles, to keep the fentries more alert, becaufe they
are not fo much in awe of the Lance-Corporils.

Art. 11. In order to be certain that the Patroles

go regularly, and vifit all the pofts, every guard
Ihall have a tally, and every tally muft agree with
that belonging to the main-guard : The main-
guard tally muft be always carded round, and the
Officer, or non-commifiioned Officer of every
guard, as often as he is vifited by a Patrole,
muft compare his tally with it, and -draw a ftroke
on each ot them with a pencil.
N. B. The Tallies muft be fent every morning, to
gether with the reports, to the main-guard, the Cap
tain, or commanding Officer of which is to compare
them with his own ; if the number of ftrokes drawn
on every taMy, anfwers to the number of patroles fent
from the main-guard, and of ftrokes on the main-
guard tally, the Patroles muft have gone regularly ;
jf otherwife, the Captain muft inquire into the rea
fon, and report it.

Art. 12. When the Patroles approach a guard,

the fentry over the arms challenges, and is an-
fwered, Patrole ! after which he is to fay, Stand
Patrole ! What Patrole? and having received an-
fwer, Non-commiffioned Officer''s, or Lance Corporal's
Patrole! he muft then call to the non-commiffion
ed
298 Regulations
ed Officer, or Lance-Corporal of the guard to
come out, who, together with one man of the guard,
is to advance towards the Patrole, and challenge,
Who comes there? and being anfwered Patrole / is
to demand further, What Patrole ! Advance Pa
trole ! upon which the non-commiffioned Officer,
or Lance-Corporal of the Patrole, gives the pa
role, and reports whether. all be well, during
which the non-com miflioned Officer, or Lance-
Corpo.al of the guard, holds the point of his
fword againft his breaft, and the one man refts
his carbine : After the parole is given, the non-
commiffioned Officer, or Lance-Corporal, demands
his tally, and carries it to the Officer, or non-
commiffioned Officer commanding the guard, and
at the fame time reports whether all be well : af
ter the Officer of the guard has drawn a ftroke
on the tally, the non-commiffioned Officer, or
Lance-Corporal of the Patrole takes it again, and
marches back to his guard, vifitingall the fentries,
as he returns : Immediately after this Patrole is dif-
patched, another is again fent to the next guard,
and fo on, every Patrole obferving the directions
already given.

Art. 13. Every guard muft fend out Patroles

after the Retreat, to infpect the publick-houfes,
who are at the firft time to turn out all perfons
drinking, particularly private foldiers, and fend
them away to their quarters ; but all fuch foldiers
as they fhall find the fecond time, either in pub
lick-houfes, or in the ftreets, they are to take pri-
foners.

N. B.
 jor the Cavalry. 299
N- B. In all garrifons, certain diftri&s mud be affign-
ed for every guard, in which they are to keep Pa
troles copftantly going from eight o'clock. to eleven ;
which patroles are to confift of a non-commiffioned
Officer and two men.
. When thefe Patroles don't take all the foldiers pri-
foners whom they find after the Retreat, and the com
manding Officer difcovers that they were out of their
quarters at th2t time, the non-commiffioned Officer
of that Patrole lhall be confined, and reduced to a
private centinel for two months, efpecially if fuch
foldiers were guilty of any irregularities out of their
quarters.

Art. 14. From the middle of September to

the middle of March, every guard fhall found the
•f Retreat about eight o'clock ; the time of doing
it, during the other months of the year muft de
pend on the weather ; but it is ufually about, or
between the hours of nine and ten.

Art. 15. Immediately after the * Retreat at

night, and to boot and faddie in the morning, a
non-commiffioned Officer of a Troop or Squadron
muft vifit the quarters, deliver to every man the
orders given out at orderly time, together with
all others, which the Captain may have thought
proper to give relating to his Troop, or Squadron:
Every non-commiffioned Officer, who vifus his
quarters in a negligent, irregular manner, fhall be
reduced to a private centinel for three months.

C HAP.

+ Shall beat the Tatt-too, &c. Dreg. Regit!.

* *— The Tatt-too at night, and the Reveille in the morn
ing, &C. Drag, Regul.
300 Regulations

CHAP. XI.
Directions to be obferved in a Garrifon,
in cafe of Fire.
Article i.
WHEN an alarm happens in a garrifon, on
the account of fire, or otherwife, the Troops
of Hcrfe, or Squadrons of Dragoons, are in-
ftantly to repair to their refpective alarm-pofts,
with their entire clothing, their arras, accoutre
ments, and every thing belonging to them.
N. B. From the firft moment of the alarm, the whole
garrifon mult be affembled on horfeback, at their re-
fpe£Hve alarm -pofts, in twenty minutes ; on which
account the Officers are required to exercife their
men with great diligence, in order to render them,
as quick and expert at faddling their horfcs £S pof-
fible.

Art. 2. When a fire breaks out in a garrifon,

the guard which fhall firft difcover it, muft im
mediately fend a non-commiffioned Officer with
two men, to fee if it be dangerous ; and if it ap
pears to be fo, the non commiflioned Officer is
directly to fend one of his men to report it to the
main-guard ; upon which the commanding Officer
orders the * Trumpeter to found to arms.
N. B. As foon as the * Trumpeter of the main-guard
founds
* — The Drnmmer to beat to arms, Drag. Rigul.
 for the Cavalr y. .xpt
founds to arms, thofe belonging to all other guards,
and thofe alfo who arc off duty, are to do the fame.
The Officer of the main-guard muff, immediately
fend a man to the commanding Officer to report the
fire ; and at the fame time to inform him, that the
guards have already given the alarm.

Art. 3. "When a fire happens, the men on

guard muft be fent to their quarters, to fecure their
horfes ; but one fentry muft be left at every port,
and the gates be kept fhut.
N. B. The keys which lock up the fire-engines are to
be kept at the main-guard, the commanding Officer
of which is to fend a non-commiffioned Officer and
fome men, to draw the engines to the place where
the fire happens, till the inhabitants are affembled
there, after which the non-commiffioned Officer is
to return with his men to the guard.

Art. 4. As foon as the Troops, or Squadrons,

are afiembled at their alarm-pofts, they muft be
drawn up, and the rolls called ; after which they
muft difmount, link their horfes, and march clear
of them on foot : The commanding Officer is
then to fend as many men as may be neceffary, to
affift in extinguiihing the fire ; and if they find
the number of inhabitants on the fpot to be fuf-
ficient without them, they are to return to their
alarm- poft.
N. B. A proper number of men muft be left behind,
to take care of the horfes.

Art. 5. The commanding Officer in a garri-

fon, muft, with the advice and concurrence of the
magiftrates, eftablifh fome good rules amongft
the
302 Regulations

the inhabitants, that when a fire happens, every

profeflion may know its province, and all inter
ruption confequently be the better prevented. If
the inhabitants are too long in coming to a fire,
they Jhall pay four grofhes to every foldier who
is employed in extinguishing it in their ftead ; and
the commanding Officer fhall moreover correct
them for fuch negligence.

Art. 6. When a foldier is not at his alarm-

poft in proper time, he fhall be put prifoner. and
run the gantlope the day following : the Officers
and non-commiffioned Officers are required to be
the firft at their alarm-pofts, and not fet bad ex
amples to their men by coming late ; but if an
Officer is altogether abfent, he fhall be confined
a year in a fortrefs, and his pay deducted for the
invalid fund ; if a non-commiflioned Officer, he
lhall be ordered to do centinel's duty for a year ;
and if a private man, he fhall run the gantlope
20 times.
N. B. Every foldier muft bring all the clothes, ac
coutrements, or other things belonging to fuch of
his comrades as are on guard, or fick, along with
him to the alarm-poft.

CHAP-
 for the Cavalry. 303

CHAJP. XII.
Of Military Honours.
Article 1.
WHEN his Majefty halts only for a night in
a garrifon, no feparate guard is to mount
at his quarters, without his exprefs order for it;
but two fentries are only to be ported before the
houfe, and two non-commiffioned Officers before,
his chamber, which are to be furnifhed by the
main-guard.
N. B. An orderly non-commiffioned Officer mail be
ordered to attend his Majefty as foon as he arrives
at his quarters.

Art. 2. All guards ought to found, or beat a

march to the king, and the Officers to falute ; but
as it is his Majefty's pleafure, that the proper ho
nours fhall not be paid to him, neither the one nor
the other muft be done ; and the guards are to
receive him with refted arms only.

Art. 3. When his Majefty's brothers arrive

in a garrifon, the guards are to found, or beat a
march to them, and the Officers to falute, if they
will permit it ; otherwife they are only to be re
ceived with refted arms. When they halt in a
town, two fentries are to be polled at their quar
ters.
Art.
304 Regulation*
Art. 4. When the * fovereign Margraves ar
rive in a garrifon, the guards are to found, or
beat a march to them, the Officers to falute, and
two Grenadiers to be pofted fentries before their
quarters. The honours due to the young Mar
graves depend upon their rank in the army ; and
fuch of them as are not in the army, a:e only to
be received with refted arms, and to have one fen-
try pofted at their quarters.

Art. 5. When a reigning prince of the empire

paffes through a garrifon, the guards are to found
or beat a march to him, the Officers to falute, and
two fentries to be pofted at his quarters. To a
prince of the empire, who is not in the army, no
honours are due from guards, except the porting
of one fentry at his quarters, but to one who is
in the army, the honours due to him from his
rank muft be paid by all guards.

Art. 6. When 3 Field- Marfhal in his Majefty's

fervice arrives in a garrifon, the guards are to
found, or beat a march, and the Officers to falute,
but if his Majefty is prefent, the Field-Maribal:
is not to be faluted : Guards mwft pay the fame
compliments to General Officers, in garrifon, which
they do in camp.

Art. 7. In a garrifon coofifting of one Regi-

unent, all guards are to reft their arms to the Co
lonel, or commanding Officer; to any other Field
Officer, the main-guard is 60 fboujder, and ali
Other guards to reft. '
N.B.
* This is a title belonging to the feyeral branches of th«
houfe of Brandenburgh.
 Jbr the C a v al r Yi ' '305
N. B. To other Officers, non-commiffioned Officers'
guards ftand by their arms, and the (entries reft to a
Captain, but to the fubaltern Officers ftand fhoulder-
ed only.

Art. 8. When a Regiment of Cavalry and In

fantry lie in a garrifon together, the main guad
fhoulders their arms to a Colonel, and all the other
guards reft : to any inferior Field-Officer, the
main-guard only ftands by their arms, but the
port-guards are to moulder, and all guards com
manded by non commiffioned Officers, to reft.
N. B. All fentries are to reft to all Field-Officers.

Art. 9. In a garrifon confilling of one, or

more Troops, or Squadrons, the guards reft their
arms to the Captain who commandsj to every o-
ther, the non.commiffioned Officers' guards are to
turn out with fhouldered arms, and to ftand by
their arms to the fubal terns.

Art. 10. The fame honours muft be paid to

all Field-Officers, who are in his Majefty's fervice',
when they come into a garrifon, as to thofe who
belong to a Regiment in the garrifon : But when
any General- or Field-Officers, who are out of
the fervice, come into a garrifon, they are to be
taken no notice of by the guards.
N. B. The fame honours muft be paid to foreign
Generals, who are actually in fervice, as to the Ge
nerals in his Majefty's fervice ; but none of any kind
are to be paid to foreign Colonels, or other Field-
Officers.
p
U Art.
306 Regulations
Art. ii. With refpect to fentries, they muft
be pofted in garrifons after the fame manner as
they are in camp, excepting that the commanding
Officers of Regiments, are to have one fentry poft
ed at their quarters, but no other Field Officers
are to have any.
Art. 12. When a guard has turned out to a
General Officer, and he gives them a fignal, they
are then not to march to their arms, but to draw-
up in the rear of them : if the guard has already
ftiouldered, before the General gives a fignal, they
muft then remain under arms, and reft, but not
found a Trumpet, or beat a Drum, unlefs he
fliould order them to ground : on the contrary,
when the guard has fhouldered to a Field Officer,
and he gives them a fignal, the commanding Of
ficer, or non-commiffioned Officer, is to make
them ground their arms, and draw them up in the
rear of them.

Art. 13. As foon as it is dark, and the fentries

have begun to challenge, the guards are neither to
reft their arms to his Majefty, nor to any General
Officer, but to carry them fhouldered.
N. B. No non-commiffioned Officer under arms muft
take his hat off to any perfon whatfoever ; nor is
any foldier, on pain of running the gantlope, to take
his hat off when he has his arms in his hand.

CHAP.
 ' for ^Cavalry; 307

CHAP. XIII.
Of PunifTiments and Executions.
Article 1.
WHEN a foldier is fentenced to run the gant
lope in a garrifon, he muft always do it
through the parade at guard mounting : if. the
parade is too ftrong, the fupernumeraries muft be
taken off from the left ; or if too weak, extraor-
dinaries added, which depends on the number*
through which he is to run.
Art. 2. After the ufual guard is formed, the
extraordinary party ordered on account of the pu-
nifhment, faces to the right, and the guard to the
left : at the word, March ! the party, with com-
miffioned and non-commiflioned Officers, marches
to the right flank of the guard ; as foon as the
word, Front ! is given, the Adjutant drefles the
files of the guard, and tells off the divifions : the
eldeft Officer of the party dreffes alfo his files,
and polls the Officers and non-commiflioned Of
ficers.
N. B. The left file of the party muft clofe to the
right file of the guard.

Art. 3. The Officers and non-commiflioned

Officers of the party, are to be attentive to the
Adjutant, and to march to their pofts, together
with the Officers and non-commiflioned Officers
U 2 of
308 Regulations
of the guard, when he gives the word of com
mand for it.

Art. 4. When the whole parade is formed, the

Major gives the words of command,
Reft your carbines !
Shoulder your carbines !
Rear rank, to the right double your ranks !
March !
on which the rear rank fteps up brifkly, and toge
ther, to the right of their file-leaders ; after which
the center muft move up fo clofe to the front, as
only to leave the proper interval for the prifoner
to run the gantlope through.
N. B. When the Major gives the word, March !
the rear-ranks muft ftep off at once with the left
foot, and fall nimbly into their places ; muft carry
their arms well, let their right hands hang motion-
lefs down, keep filence, ftand fteady, and dreis to
the right.
The non-commiffioned Officers pofted in the rear
of the divifions, muft move up to proper diftance
from the center rank, when the rear-rank doubles.

Art. 5. When the rear rank has doubled after

the manner above explained, the Major gives the
words of command,
Front rank, face to the right about f
Order your carbines !
Bring your carbines to your left fides !
This word of command is performed at three mo
tions, as follows :
1. Seize
 for ^Cavalry. 307
1. Seize the carbine with your left hand, and
hold it in a perpendicular line with both
hands.
2. Bring the carbine nimbly to your left fide,
and hold it right up and down in a line
with the point of your left foot.
3. Plant the but-end at once, with a ftrong
motion, on the ground ; at the fame time
throw your right-hand brifkly back, and.
let it hang down your right fide.
N. B. As foon as the front rank has faced to the
right-about, the center is immediately to caft their
eyes to the left ; and as foon as the whole parade .
have brought their arms to their left fides, the
center-rank muft call their eyes to the right again.

Art. 6. The Officers are to go to the right

about, together with the front-rank : a Captain
and one Officer take poll on the right flank, and
two Officers on the left flank alfo ; the reft of the
Officers march through, come about at once to
their proper front, and are to fee that the men lay
on properly.
N. B. The Trumpeters of Horfe, or Drummers of
Dragoons, poft themfelves on the right and left
flank.

Art. 7. As foon as the parade is formed, the

provoft marches through with the twigs, and every
man takes as many as there are prifoners to be pu-
nifhed . after the provoft has marched through,
the f Trumpeters found the fignal, on which the
O 3 > pri-
f —— The Drummers beat a ruffle, &c. Drag. Re^ul.
jia Regulations
prifoner runs the gantlope, and the Major rides
up and down to fee that the men lay on properly.
N. B. When a prifoner runs the gantlope, a non-
commiffioned Officer is always to march before him,
and the Trumpeters are to continue founding while
he receives his punifhment.

Art. 8. "When the prifoner has got through,

the Major gives the following words or command,
'Throw away your twigs !
Order your carbines !
upon which the center- rank caft their eyes at once
to the left, and, as foon as they have ordered their
arms, to the right again.
The preceding word of command is performed
at the three following motions ;
1. Seize the carbine brifkly with your right
hand, and hold it in a perpendicular line.
2. Bring the carbine with both hands right up
and down in a line with your right foot,
fo high that the muzzle may come in a line
with your hat.
3. Order the carbine in the ufual manner.

Art. 9. The Major then gives the word of

command, as follows,
Shoulder your carbines !
Front rank, to the left about as you were /
Rear rank, face tv the right about !
March !
Front !
 fir the C ava lry, 3H
Front !
Drefs !
N. B. At the word, Shoulder your carbines / the Of
ficers are to march into the front ; and when the
rear rank goes to the right about, be at their former
pofts.

Art. 10. As foon as the parade is formed three

deep again, and ftands fteady and well drefled, the
Major gives the word to the party.
Reft your carbines !
Club your carbines !
To the right-about !
March!
the party is thus difmifled, after which the guard
is marched off.
N. B. When the parade is to be formed in the ufual
order, for a fok':er to run the gantlope, all the Of
ficers muft divide t\ rnfelves on the front ; and the
non commiffioned Officers are to fland fteady in a
rank entire in the rear of their Troops, or Squadrons,
and to fee that the punilhment is properly inflicted.

Art. 12. When a man is to be punifhed with

death, and the execution to be performed without
the garrifon, a detachment of 200 Men from the
Regiment he belongs to, muft be ordered on the
occafion, which is to be paraded before the com
manding Officer's quarters, and formed in eight
divifions : after which the Major gives them the
word to march off, which they are to do with
mouldered arms, and without found of trumpet,
U4 or
3 J2 Regulations
or beat of drum, to the place of execution, where
he is to form them into a circle.
N. B. A parade confifting of 200 men, or about that
number, is to march in eight divifions 5 a parade of
about 150, in fix; and one of about 100, in four-
Parades muft never be told off in an odd number
of divifions, but always in two, four, fix, or eight.

Art. 12,. An Officer muft be fent for the pri-

foner, with fuch a number of men as may be
thought necefiary to prevent his refcue or efcape,
who are to march with him in the center to the
place of execution, and deliver him up in the
circle.
N. B. As foon as the Officer has delivered the pri-
foner in the circle, he mult fall into the execution-
party, and alfo march back again into quarters in
the fame body.
The men are to reft their arms while the fentence
is reading and after that to fhoulder again ; in which
pofition they are to remain till the execution is per
formed.

Art. 13. After the execution is performed, the

Major gives the word of command to the circle,
to go to the right about, to wheel to the right and
left, to come about to their proper front again,
and the rear ranks to open backwards to their for
mer diftance ; after which he is to march the whole
back again with Ihouldered arms, and without
found of trumpet, or beat of drum, to the Colo
nel's, or commanding Officer's quarters, where he
makes them reft their carbines, club, go to the
right- about, and then difmkTes them.
N. B,
 for the C a v a l r y. 313
N. B. The Major is to haye his fword drawn, when
he marches the execution party out, and back again.

Art. 14. When the execution is to be perform

ed within the garrifon, the ftrength of the execu
tion party muft be proportioned to the fize of the
town, and the danger there may be of any in-
furre&ion.
N. B. When the criminal is no foldier, the inhabi
tants muft be ordered to conduct him to the place of
execution, where they are to deliver him up in the
circle, after which all the direction* already given
are to be obferved.

CHAP. XIV.
Of the Burial of Officers, non-com-
miffioned Officers, and private Men.
Article 1.
TH E funeral of a Field- Marfhal, who is ef
fective in his Majefty's fervice, fhall be fa-
liited with three rounds of 12 cannon with whole
loading, and attended by three battalions, and four
fquadrons
That of a General of the Horfe fhall be faluted
with three rounds of nine cannon, and attended
by three Squadrons.
That of a Lieutenant- General fhall be faluted
with three rounds of fix cannon, and attended by
two Squadrons.
That
314 Reg v l at i o n s
That of a Major- General ffiall be faluted by
three rounds of three cannon, and attended by one
Squadron.
That of a Colonel fhall be attended by one
Squadron.
That of a Lieutenant Colonel by ioo men on
horfeback, with a proportionable number of com-
miffioncd and non-commiffioned Officers, under
the command of a Major.
That of a Major by one Captain, with 80 men
on horfeback, and a proportionable number of
Officers.
That of a Captain, by one Captain, with 60
men on horfeback, and a proportionable number
of Officers.
That of a fubaltern Officer, by one Lieutenant,
one Cornet, and 30 men on horfeback.
That of a non-commiffioned Officer, by one
non-commiffioned Officer, and 20 men on toot.
That of a private man, by one Corporal, and
16 men on foot.
The following directions, in regard to funerals,
are alfo to be obferved.

Art. 2. The Squadrons, or funeral-parties are

formed before the commanding Officer's quarters,
from whence they are to march without drawn
fwords, found of trumpet, or beat of drum, to
the houfe in which the corps lies.

Art. 3. When the corps is brought out, the

commanding Officer makes the party draw their
fwords ; after which, and as foon as it is placed
on the bier, or other carriage without the houfe,
he makes them reverfe their fwords, and marches
them
 for the C a v a l r v. 3X5
them off, the * Trumpeters fouuding the dead
march.

Art. 4. When the funeral-party has marched

up to the church, or church yard, where the body
is to be interred, the trumpets, 01 drums, are to
ceafe , and, as foon as it is pur into the grave, the
commanding Officer makes the party retu n their
fwords, unfling their carbines, and bring them be
fore them : atte wards, when the burial fe> vice is
ended, and the body inter ed, rhey are to fire three
vollies, with their pieces presented in the air.

Art. 5. After the men have fired the three

vollies, the Officer makes them return their car
bines, and draw heir fwords again ; after which .
he marches them back to the commanding Offi
cer's qua trrs, with the trumpeters, or drummers,
at the head of the firft divifion : as foon as the
party arrives at the commanding Officer's quar
ters, the trumpets, or drums, ceafe, and the
Officer orders them to return their fwords, to go
to the right about, and march to their quarters.
JJ. B. When a funeral-party panes by a guard, the
guard is to reft their arms.

Art. 6. When a party is ordered on foot, for

the funeral of a non-commiffioned Officer, or pri
vate man, it muft be compofed of a detachment
from all the Squadrons, paraded at the command
ing Officer's quarters, and ma.ched from thence,
with
9 . The Drummers beating the died march. Drag.
XtgHl.
316 Regulations
with fhouldered arms, to the houfe in which the
corps lies, where they are to order their arms.
Ar . 7. The men are tofhoulder their carbines
a little before the corps is brought out, that they
may be in readinefs to receive it with refted arms^
arter which, and as foon as ic is placed on the
bier, or other carriage without the houfe, the
non-commiffioned Officer makes them reverfe their
carbines, and marches them off in the ufual man
ner, the * Trumpeter founding the dead march.
Art. 8. When the funeral-party has marched
up to the church-yard, the tiumpet, or drum,
ceafes, and the non-commiffioned Officer makes
ihe men reft their carbines, till the body is
put into its grave ; after which, he orders them
to moulder, and keeps them in that pofition till
it is interred ; after which they are to fire three
yollies over it, with their pieces prefented in the
air.
N. B. As foon as the men have fired the third volley,
they ftep up with the right foot, pkcing it in a line
by the left, carry their arms before them, half-cock,
fhut their pans, place their hands under the buts,
and, calling their eyes to the right, fhoulder to
gether.

Art. 9. After the men have fired the three

Tollies in the manner above defcribed, the non-
commiffioned Officer gives the word of command,
Reft your carbines!
Carry your carbines high in your right arms !
which
* The Drummer beating the dead march. Drag. Regul.
 for the Cavalry; 317
which being done, he marches them off, the trum
pet founding, or drum beating, till he arrives at
the commanding Officer's quarters^ where he or
ders the men to reft their carbines, to club, to
go to the right about, and then difmiffes them.
Art. 10. All Officers attending the funerals of
even their neareft relations, fhall notwithllanding
wear their entire Regimentals, and only tie a piece
of black crape round their arm : Officers alfo who
die in the fervice, fhall be put into their coffins
with their Regimentals on.
N. B. A non-commiffioned Officer's corps fhall be
followed to the grave by non-commiffioned Officers ;
and a private man's, by the private men of the Troop
or Squadron to which he belonged.
Soldiers wives, or children, who die, are to be
carried to the place of interment, either by the inha
bitants, or on carriages, and not by foldiers ; nei
ther fhall any be differed to follow them.

CHAP. XV.
Regiments to be always in Readinefs
to take the Field at twelve Days
Notice.
ALL Regiments fhall hold themfelves con-
ftantly in readinefs to march, and take the
Field at twelve days notice : during the twelve
days, the abfentees muft be fent for, and the Of
ficers
318 Regulations
ficers provide horfes, together with all other camp*
neceflaries of every kind whatfoever, which fhall
be wanting, either for themfelves or their men ;
that when they receive the laft orders to march,
there may not be the leaft deficiency, exclufive of
horfes, but every thing be found in complete and
good condition.

CHAP. XVI.
The Ceremony of nailing on, and
fwearing to the new Standards.
Article i.
WHEN a Regiment receives new ftandards,
they rouft be nailed on, in the General's,
or commanding Officer's quarters, and all the Of
ficers, with one Quarter- mailer, one Standard-
bearer, one Corporal, and 10 Men per Company,
are to attend the ceremony.

Art. 2. The day after the ftandards are nailed

on, the whole Regiment is to march out by Troops
or Squadrons, on foot, to a place appointed, where,
as foon as they arrive, and are drawn up together,
the Major, polling himfelf oppofite to the center,
orders them to fhoulder their arms, and the ftan
dards to march to their refpective Troops, or
Squadrons, after which he gives the word of
Command,
FrdtH
 for the Cavalry. 3 19
Prom the right and left wheel inwards and form
the circle ! . .
N. B. The Officers ftand on the front of their Troop
or Squadrons, the Standards on the center, and the
Trumpeters or Drummers in the rear ; and becaufc
the new Standards have not yet been fworn to, no
honours are to be paid to them, when they are brought
out of the commanding Officer's quarters, and carried
to the rendezvous.
The Standards are not to be folded up, but to be
kept flying.

Arty 3. As foon as the circle is formed, the

Major makes them reft their arms, and the foli-
citor is to make a fhort harangue, and read the
articles of war , after which the Major gives the
word of command,
Order your carbines !
the Chaplain then fays a prayer, imploring God,
out of his grace and goodnefs, to fave every fol-
dier from being perjured, and fo to govern him,
that, on all occafions, in battles, lieges, and en
gagements of every kind, he may continue firm
to his ftandards, and maintain them againft an
enemy to the laft drop of his blood. When the
prayer is ended, the Major gives the word of
of command^
Bring your carbines to your leftfides !
after which all the Officers and Soldiers lift up their
fingers, and fwear to the ftandards. ,
■Art.
320 Regulations
Art. 4. When the Regiment has fworn to the
flandards, every Captain muft exhort his Troop,
or Squadron, to keep inviolably the oath they
have taken, after which the Major gives the word
of command.
Order your carbines !
Shoulder your carbines !
The whole Regiment face to the right about !
March !
every Troop, or Squadron, moves back to its for
mer ground, after which the Regiment marches
back into quarters again.

Art. 5. The Regiment having marched back

into quarters, the old ftandards muft be carried,
either on the fame, or the following day, by the
five ftandard bearers, to the neareft arfenal, at
tended by one Officer, two non-commiffioned Of
ficers, one Trumpeter or Drummer, and 20 pri
vate men, and there depofited. .
N. B. The ufual honours muft be paid to the old
flandards, till they are lodged in the arfenal ; and
when they march out of a garrifon, and into night-
quarters ; or into the fortrefs, wherein fuch arfenal
is, the men are to draw their fwords, and to march in,
without found of trumpet, or beat of drum.

CHAP.
 Jor ^Cavalry. 321

CHAP. XVII.

Of the Choice of Surgeons, the Care

of the Sick in Garrifon, and the
Prefervation of the Soldiery in ge
neral.
Article 1.
NO Surgeon Major fhall be taken into the
army, till he has been prefented to the Sur
geon-General, and examined by the profeiTors of
the College of Phyficians and Surgeons, that his
Majefty may be affured, j:here is no Surgeon-
Major appointed to any Regiment, who has not
acquired a proper experience and underllanding
of all kinds of difeafes ; to certify which, the pro-
feflbrs, after he has been examined, are to give
him an atteftation, fetting forth his abilities ; and
if it appears from thence, that he is properly qua
lified, the Solicitor is then to adminifter to him
the oath of allegiance, in the prefence of the com
manding Officer.

Art. 2. The Mates belonging to every Regi

ment, fhall be appointed, fubfifted, and difmified
by the Surgeon Major, and be alfo fubject to his
authority : they are likewife to fwear allegiance
to the Regiment for the fpace of time which their
contract with the Surgeon-Major is to laft ; that
they will ferve faithfully, attend the fick and
X, .' wound
322 REGULATIONS

wounded diligently, and fubmit altogether to the

fubbrdination of the Regiment
Art. 3. The Surgeon-Major fhall be anfwera-
ble that he admits no Mates, but fuch as are
capable of the employment ; and particularly
careful to appoint thofe only to Squadrons which
lie alone in a garrifon, who are well fkilled in all
kinds of diforders : in like manner, when a com
mand is fent out, the fame caution is to be ob-
ferved : fuch lick men as labour under dangerous
and chronical difeafes muft, if practicable, be re
moved to the head-quarters, where the Surgeon-
Major is : Every Captain muft remain fatisfied
with his Mate, provided that his Troop, or Squa
dron is fhaved at the proper time, that his fick
and wounded are taken good care of, that he keeps
himfelf in due fubordination, and does his duty
diligently; in default of which, he muft be re
ported to the commanding Officer of the Regi
ment, and to the Surgeon Major, in order to be
punifhed.
N. B. When a Troop, or Squadron, has a ereat
many fick, the Surgeon- Major muft attend it in
perfon.

Art. 4. In every garrifon, care muft be taken

to provide a particular houfe, by way of hofpital.
Art. 5, In an hofpital for a whole Regiment,
one good Mate fhall always remain, but particu
larly in the night-time, together with two fervants,
who are to take all poffible pains during their
attendance, as well in giving the fick their medi
cines properly, as their victuals, or doing any
other
 fof the C a v a l r Y. 323
other fervice equally neceflary : Every day alfo
an Officer, and fometimes a Field-Officer, muft
vifit the hofpital, to examine into the real (late of
every thing : the Surgeon-Major is in a particu
lar manner required to attend the fick diligently,,
to give them the proper medicines regularly, and
to order alfo fuch food and liquors as are moft
fuitable to their different diforders.

Art. 6. When any dangerous difeafe breaks

out in a garrifon, .the Surgeon Major, and more
efpecially the Mates in his.abfence, muft confult
with the phyfician, if there happens to be one in
the town, in order to put a ftop to it,, if poffible,
in its infancy, and to prevent its fpncading ; to
contribute to which every fick perfon in an hof-
pitaj, feized with any infectious diforder, muft be
immediately removed, ;
N. B. When a Captain employs a Do&or, or any
other perfon out of the Regiment, to cure a fick
man, the Surgeon-Major fliall not be obliged tofur-
nifh the medicines.
,i . . As it is unwholfome for a man to come fuddenly
out of a hot' room into, the colflJair, fo the Tires in
guard-rooms, and in quarters, (hall not be made too
large.

Art. 7. Since difeafes may be prevented from

becoming epidemical, if they are not too long con
cealed ; fo the foldiers muft be in general encou
raged, whenever they mall find themfelves out of
order, to difcover it early"; "but as Tome men are
unwilling to be fent to the hofpital, till the in-
ereafe of their diforder renders it unavoidable ; fo
the Captains, and all the Officers muft carefully
X 2,> ob-
/
324 Regulations
obferve the looks of their men, and muft fend
every one who appears to be not well, whether
he will, or not, to the hofpital, that the Surgeon-
Major may examine into the ftate of his health in
proper time.
N. B. No Officer, non-commiffioned Officer, or Sol
dier, before a march, or at the time of exercifing in
the fpring, fhall, by way of prevention, phyfic him-
felf without the furgeon's knowledge and approbation.

Art. 8. The Men are not to be permitted, du

ring the feafon for fruity to fquander away their
money upon it, and throw themfelves into diftem-
pers ; thofe forts of fruit are more particularly to
be prohibited, which are accounted the moft hurt
ful ; the foldiers fhould be induced to avoid them,
even out of regard to themfelves, for fuch as are
prudent enough to lay out the money on bread,
which others fpend on fruit, find their advantage
in point of health.

Art, 9. It is further necefTary, in order to pre

vent the men as much as poffible from throwing
themfelves into diforders, and of becoming inca
pable of doing their duty, or from dying, to for
bid exceffive drinking, and efpecially of ipirituous
liquors; as nothing likewife is more prejudicial
than for a man to drink when he is hot, fo the
Officers are by no means to fuffer their men to
drink on a march in hot weather : for the fame
reafon, the Troops, or Squadrons, after they have
been performing their exercife on foot, muft be
detained for fome time under arms, before they
are difmiffed : a general order ought alfo to be
given,
 for the Cavalry. 325
given, to reftrain the men from drinking too foon>
after all violent exercifes.
Art. 10: Directions for the fick eo have good
broths made, and to be well taken care of; and
for the foldiers in general to keep a good mefs,
and to boil the pot once a day, have been already
given in the 5th Part ; and the Officers are once
more ftri&ly required to fee, that the fame regu
larity, and good management, prevails conftantly.

CHAP. XVIII.
Inftru&ions concerning the Care and
Management of the Horfes.
Article 1.
THE Officers mull ftudy, as much as poffible,
to make their men contract a regard for their
horfes, in confequence of which, the attendance
upon them will become a pleafure , and, being
well taken care of, they will thereby be rendered
capable of more fervice on a march. It is like-
wife his Majefty's command, that they be exer-
cifed in trotting, and galloping every day ; which,
fo far from doing them any harm, is what will
rather contribute to their prefervation : the Offi
cers are alfo to be converfant amongft the men,
in order to render their perfons reciprocally fami
liar to one another.

X 3 Art.
326 Re g u l a t 10 n $
Art. 2. Every Captain, together with his Offi
cers, and norttcommiilioned Officers, muft take
all poffible care, to keep the horfcs of his Troop,
or Squardion, in good order, he muft himfelf
therefore vifit them frequently, as well as require
the fame diligence from his fubordinate Officers.
The Subalterns to every Troop, or Squadron,
are to vifit their refpe j.ive diftricts every day, the
quarters being told off in leparate divifions for
that purpofe, and fee after what manner the men
attend, and drefs their horfes, making a report
afterwards t@ the Captain, whether they are pro
perly taken care of, and whether any arefick.

Art. 3. The non commiffioned Officers to every

Troop, or Squadron, muft be feverally appointed
to infpect particular diftricts, which they are to
do immediately after the Retreat : when they find
that any man is abfent from his horfe, has neglect
ed to fodder, or take proper care of him, they
muft confine him, and are to make a report to their
Captain., an hour after the Retreat.

Art. 4. The non-commifTioned Officers are alfo

to vifit their refpective diftricts every moning at
feven o'clock, and make ftric~b examination, whe
ther all the horfes are well fed and attended, and
whether any are fick, of which they muft make a
report to their Captain : afrer the non commif-
fioned Officers have made their report, the Offi
cers are frequently to vifit the quarters, and when
they find, that any non-commiffioned Officer has
been negl gent in his inflection, or irregular in
his report, he mall be confined, and tied neck
and heels for four days.
Art.
 for the Cava im/* 337
Art. 5. Although his Majefty hopes, that no
Officer will omit any part of his duty, and negi
led: to vifit, and review the horfes properly, ne^
vcrthelefs if any one mould be gu..lty of fuch re-
mifihefs, and confequently of having afterward*
made a falfe report to his Captain, he ihall.be
confined 14 days on the main guard ; and foFhis
fecond offence of this kind, a month : rhe Cap
tain, therefore, to prevent any fuch impofition, is
not to depend altogether upon the reports of the
Subalterns, much lefs on thofe of the non-com-
miflioned Officers, but muft review the horfes him-
felf every other day at leaft.
Art. 6. The Officers, and non-commiffioned
Officers, when they vifit their queers, aie. ftrich
ly to inquire, whether the men make a proper ufe
of all the forage which is daily allowed for their
horfes; and any one who is difcovered to have
dimini(hed, and fold any part of it, fhall be imme
diately confined, and run the gandope 12 times
through 200 men.
Art. 7. Every man mall. fupply his horfe with
the ufual quantity of hay, at five, eight, and 12
o'clock in the morning, and at four and eight in
the afternoon ., and fhall water him in the mornr
ing, at noon, and in the evening ;••
The men muft be taught by the Officers and
non-commiflioned Officers in what manner they are
to fodder and water their horfes. .,.
Art. 8. When a horfe refufes to eat his food,
the man to whom he belongs, muft take the firft
opportunity to report it to the Ofjjcer^or non-cona-
X4 . miflioned
//
328 Regulations
miffioned Officer, when they are on their vifiting
rounds, upon which the former is to be fent for,
to examine into the nature of the horfe's diforder,
who muft afterwards carefully attend him, and
apply fuch remedies as are moft proper to reftore
him to his appetite, or to cure him, if he has
got any diftemper; on which account, every Cap
tain muft take great care to provide a capable far
rier for his troop, or fquadron ; one who under
stands all the difeafes to which horfes are fubject,
and can alfo ihoe them well.

Art. 9. As foon as a horfe is feized with any

infe&ious diforder, or difcovered to be glandered,
he muft immediately be put by himfelf, and the
greateft care taken, to prevent his coming near
any that are found.

* Art. 10. The men are to curry, and rub their

hoifes well down every morning ; and, alter they
have drefTed them, are to put on their body-clothes;
they muft alfo keep their ftails clean, and litter
them up well at nights.

Art. 11. When a horfe is hot, after the ex-

ercife, or a march, he muft not be fuffered either
to eat or drink, within lefs than two hours time ;
after which, the fweat muft be wiped off, and
when he is dry, he muft be curried again.

Art. 12. Above all things care muft be taken

on a march to prevent the horfes backs from be
ing galled, on which account, it becomes necef-
fary that the men mould firft be taught how to
faddle their horfes, to make up their baggage,
» and
 for the Cavalry. 329
and to ride in the proper manner. If a horfe's
back, notwithllanding all precautions have been
taken, fhould happen to gall, he muft not be rid
den the day following ; the Officers, therefore,
and non-commiffioned Officers are required care
fully to examine the horfes backs every day before
they are faddled, to fee if any of them are in the
leaft degree fwelled, becaufe fome men, from an
unwillingnefs to walk on foot, might otherwife
conceal an accident of fuch a nature.

Art. 13. When a Troop, or Squadron, is at any

time ordered to march, and has many fick horfes,
it muft be owing to the negligence of the Captain,
and his inferior Officers, by which they will
greatly injure their own characters ; for as often
as Officers are found guilty of fuch inattention to
their duty, they muft be feverely reprimanded by
their Colonel or commanding Officer.
N. B. On a march, the men muft be ftriftly enjoined,
to put their hands frequently, before and behind,
under their faddles, in order to feel whether their
horfes backs itch in any part; becaufe a faddle may
very poflibly come fuddenly to pieces in riding, al
though it was perfect at the time of its being put
upon the horfe's back.

Art. 14. When a horfe dies, the commanding

Officer of the Regiment muft inquire into the
caufe of it, and if his death can be imputed to any
neglect or omiffion in the Captain of the Troop,
or Squadron, to which he belonged, fuch Captain
fhall become accountable for the value of him i
nor fhall it be admitted as any excufe for him, to
challenge his Officers or non-commiffioned Officers
with
»3° REGULATION*
with a want of proper care, . becaufe he himfelf
alone is refponfible for it, and for that reafon
ought to oblige -them at all ..times .to difcharge
their duty in a proper manner.
'■"
N. B. The horfes are not to be foddered too clofe to
gether ; nor their bellies be fuffered to grow large.

Art. 15. One half of every Troop, or Squa

dron, is to afiemble with their horfes at their
Captain's quarters, about half an hour after eight
every morning, Sun lays excepted, whether it rams
or not ; and the other half about three or four in
the afternoon. The horfes are to be ridden with
bridons, and in their body-clothes, which muft be
girthed on with furcingles. The men are to have
on their waift- coats, and frocks ; their foraging-
caps, with their hair tucked up under them, and
their boots, but no fide arms. When the half-
Troop, or Squadron is affembled, and formed, it
muft be ordered to go to the right-about by fours,
and march out of the garrifon to take its exercife ;
on which occafion it muft be attended, both morn
ing and afternoon, either by the Captain, a Lieu-
, tenant, or Cornet ; who is not to march conllantly
in one place, but to continue moving about upon
the front, flanks, or rear, in order to correct the
men, as often as he finds it necefiary, and to fee
that they keep their proper diftances, and fit upright
on their horfes. When they have been out about
an hour, they are to march back into the gar
rifon by fours, and draw up at the Captain's
quarters again, where they muft receive the word
of command to go to the right about by fours,
and then march to their quarters. This is to be
pra&ifed •
 for the,C a y a, l-.r Y.~ 331
praftifed .every day, in rainy weather as well as in
fair; and during the frofts or fnows of the win
ter, the Captain muft find out fame piece of ground,
commodious, and free from ice. for that purpofe.
In fummer time, the horfes are likewise to be
ridden oat on Sundays, after the performance of
divine ferv ice in the afternoon; becaufe' it is his
Majefty's opinion, that nothing is fo beneficial to"
them, as their being moderately exercifed every
day, as it keeps them in wind, and prevents their
growing ftiff in their joints, as well as too full of
flefh, which he has himfelf experienced in hil
own horfes: his Majefty does not fo much re
quire them to be fat, as to be found, and in condi
tion to endure fatigue ; it is therefore his ftricT:
command, that thefe directions fhall be at all times
punctually complied with, for which the Colonels,
and Commandants of Regiments, together with
the field- Officers, and Captains, are to be re-
fponfible.
N. B. In marching out of the garrifon, and back again,
one non-commiflioned Officer muft be pofted in the
front, and one in the rear. *
1■ »

■ ' » -
PART.
332 Reg ulations

PART VII.

CHAP. I.

Of the Mareh of a Troop, Squadron,

or Regiment.
Article i.
WHEN a Regiment marches by Troops,
and is to pafs through any fortrefs, or large
town, whether it be garrifoned or not, the Troops
are to drefs themfelves in a proper manner in the
morning, and, when they arrive before the gate,
are to draw up on fome commodious piece of
ground, and form in Squadrons.
Art. 2. The Regiment being formed in Squa
drons, is to march off without found of Trum
pet, or beat of Drum, till it arrives near the gate,
where the fignal is to be given for the men to
draw their fwords. All the Officers are to remain
at their refpective pofts, while the Regiment is
paffing through the town ; and the General, or
Colonel, is "likewife to draw his fword, and to
march at the head of it.
N. B. The Officers, and non-commiflioned Officers,
mull take care that no man, during the Regiment's
march
 for the Cavalry; 333
march through the town, and likewife on its march
by troops through villages, leaves his divifion to go
into any houfe.
No woman muft be fuffered to appear with the
Regiment on its march through the town, but, du
ring the tjme that it is forming in Squadrons before
the gate, the women and the baggage are to make
the beft of their way forwards.

Art. 3. When a Troop, Squadron, or Regi

ment, marches through any head-quarters, or vil
lage, where a General Officer is, fwords muft be
drawn, and trumpets founded, or drums beaten.
Art. 4. All Officers fhall be prefent with their
men, both at their marching out of, and into
quarters ; they are, therefore, neither to ftay be
hind, nor to ride on before, and every Officer
who prefumes to do it, or on any account to ab-
fent hinVelf from his Troop, or Squadron, fhall
be cafhiered.
N. B. No man fhall quit his divifion, without per-
miffion, during the whole march ; and when any
one has occafion to ftay behind, the Officer com
manding the divifion to which he belongs, muft
leave a non-commiffioned Officer to take care of,
and bring him up again.

Art. 5. When a Regiment is to march, a quar-

ter-mafter muft be detached the evening before,
to provide a lupply of beer at the rendezvous ap
pointed for a general halt, that the men may be
prevented from' leaving their horfes, and running
into any adjacent village.

CHAP.

/
224 Regulations

CHAP. II.
Of the March-Routes of Troops,
Squadrons, or Regiments.
Article i.
TROOPS, Squadrons, or Regiments, when
they afiemble in the months of exercife, or
march to a general review, aie always to take the
moift direft route to the appointed rendezvous.
N. B. During the whole march, a guard muft be ap
pointed over the kettle-drums, confifting of a Cor
poral and 10 men, who are to march before them.

Art. %. Regiments, Squadrons, and Troops,

on a march, muft always take up their night-
quarters as much as poflible in towns, whether
they be garriibned, or not ; if, therefore, a town
happens to be fituated from half a * mile to a mile
wide of their direcl: route, they are, notwithftand-
ing, to march to it, for the. fake of having their
night- quarters therein.
Art. 3. When there is no town either in the
direct road, or adjacent to it, for the reception of
a Regiment, at the end of the day's march, it
muft be cantoned in villages, one, two, or three
Troops to each, and lie in barns.
Art.
* A German mile is equal to two leagues, or fix miles
Englifh.
 f»r the C a v al r y. :. 335
Art. 4. What is already faid .concerning
march-routes, is only to be underftood as relative
to Regiments when they are afiembling to exercife
in the fpring, or marching to a general review,
becaufe at that time the foldiers receive their full
pay, and have no right to demand any thing ut'
their night quarters, except houfe-room : They
are to be cantoned in towns and villages, and lie
in houfes and barns by Regiments, or by one;
two, three, four, or more Troops or Squadrons,
according as fuch towns or villages happen to be
large o; fmall ; but when they are on a march
out of one province into another, they are to con
duct themfelves and to be fubfifted according to
the directions given in the March-Regulations.
N. B. When Soldiers are cantoned in villages or
towns, the Officers and noncommiffioned Officers
mud take great care, that they are cautious of fire ;
and when they lie in barns, that they dojj't fmolce
tobacco, to prevent which, fentries muft be pofted
every where round about.

CHAP. III.
Of fubfifting Horfe, or Dragoons, on
a March.
Article 1.
WHEN a Regiment, Squadron, or Troop,
is on a march, and takes its route in the
above mentioned manner, the juftices prefiding
I * over
336 Regulations
over the feveral diftrids through which it is to
march, are to receive advice thereof in time, to
gether with a return, fpecifying the number of
Officers, non-commiffioned Officers, Trumpeters,
or Drummers, private Men, and Horfes.

Art. 2. The Sheriff, or Collector in every dif-

trict, and the Magiftrates alfo in towns, muft take
care that beer, bread, meat, hay, ftraw, oats, and
all other the like neceflaries be provided in fuffi-
cient quantities.

Art. 3. The Officers and private men muft

pay for every thing in towns on a march, in the
fame manner as in garrifon, nor fhall any one pre-
fume to require from his landlord a bed, light, or
make any other the leaft demand whatfoever, for
which every Officer fhall be anfwerable upon his
honour. The Colonel, or commanding Officer
of the Regiment, Squadron, or Troop, is like-
wife to purchafe the hay and oats. If a private
man demands any thing but houfe room from his
landlord, he fhall run the gantlope ; and if the
Colonel, or commanding Officer does not pay
for the hay and oats, according to the rate in gar
rifon, the Sheriff, or Collector, muft immediately
report hirri to the chamber of war and demefnes-, up
on which the money fhall be deducted from the
Regiment, and his Majefty will moreover feverely
reprimand fuch Officer ; but this is to be under-
ftood, as relating only to Regiments, when they
are afTembHng in the months of exercife, for at
other times they are to conduct themfelves on a
march, according to the Regulations made for that
purpofe.
N. B.
 for the C a v a l r y. 337
N/B. In night- quarters in a village likewife, the
Officers and Soldiers muft pay ready money, accord
ing to the rate eftablifhed in Garrifon, for every
thing they buy from the countrymen, or from the
people who biing goods out of the town, becaufe
they*eceive their full pay at that time; and fentries
muft be pofled on the provifion-carts, to prevent all
irregularities.

Art. 4. In towns, landlords fhall furnifh ftraw

gratis for the men quartered upon them, who are to
lodge in the lofts when their landlords cannot pro
vide otherwife for them ; but the horles are to be
taken into their barns and ftables, and accommoda
ted in the bell manner. In order to render the incon
venience as fmall as poffible to the inhabitants from
the quartering of foldiers, they fhall lodge in the
court-houfe, and in other public houfes, and be
fupplied with the neceflary quantities of ftraw for
their bedding out of the diftrict,
N. B." In villages, the Sheriff is to buy or provide a
fufficiency of hay and oats for the horfes, and of
ftraw and wood for the men, who are to lodge in the
barns.
The Officers of every Troop, or Squadron, may
take a houfe together in a village, but the fpare houfes
muft firft be difpofed of in favour of ths lick ; and
if, after they are taken care of, there ftill remain any,
they mult be equally divided amongft the Regiment.

Art. 5. The Sheriffs, Collectors, or Magif-

t-rates, mall be anfwerable that the bread, beer,
and flefh-meat be quite good, and above all things,
that the price be as realbnable as poffible : when
any body of men is quartered for a night in vil
lages, the Sheriffs muft fend out futlers from the
Y towns,
338 Regulations
towns, taking care likewife that their provifions
be fold at the cheapeft rates.
Ar.. 6. When Regiments are aflembling in
their garrifons, or marching to a general review,
two waggons above the regulation fhall be allow
ed to every Troop of Horfe, and four to every
Squadron of Dragoons, to carry the new clothing,
and the hats.
Art. 7. When a Regiment marches through
Foreign territories, they are to conduct themfelves
altogether, according to the inftructions given in
the March. Regulations.

CHAP. IV.

Of preventing Irregularities in Night-

Quarters, and on the March.
Article 1.
STRICT order and difcipline mull be always
preferved amongft the foldiers, and all irre
gularities prohibited, but efpecially on a march,
and in night- quarters.
N. B. From thirty to forty men are to lodge in one
houfe, under the care of a proportionable number
of non-commiffioned Officers, who mall be anfwer-
able for all diibrders.

Art
 for the C A v a L R Y. 339

Art. 2. Should any dillurbances* notwithftand-

ing all orders to the contrary, be committed, the
Colonel, or commanding Officer muft make exa
mination into, and accommodate them, befo e he
marches out of the charters : he muft, at the
fame time confine the ioldiers fo offending, and,
at the end of the march, make them run the
gantlope, that, by fuch exemplary punifhments,
the like offences may be prevented for the future :
and as the Colonel, or commanding Officer, fhall
be anfwerable for all mifdemeanors committed by
the troops under his command, fo he is to pro
cure from every place wherein they are quartered
for a night, a certificate of their good behaviour.

Art. 3. When a non-commiffioned Officer on

a march is found guilty of having, under any
pretence whatfoever, beaten a boor, he fhall be
immediately taken prifoner, and, at the end of
the march, be punifhed according to the nature
of his offence : the foldiers, in like manner, when
ever they beat or abufe the country people, fhall
run the gantlope.

Art. 4. His Majefty has that favourable Opi

nion of his Officers, as not to believe them capa
ble of abufing or beating the poor boors, and
fubjects, without extraordinary provocation ; but
if, notwithftanding, any Officer fhall be guilty of
fuch injurious behaviour, and complaint thereof
is made, fuch Officer will, by fo doing, but ill
recommend himfelf to him : Should any horfes
like wife be fo hard drove, as fo die on the fpot,
or foon after, the lofs fhall be made good by the
commanding Officer of the Regiment, who isaf-
Y 2 / terwards
34o Regulations
terwards to reimburfe himfelf from thofe who oe-
cafioned it.

Art. 5. Such further orders as are omitted

in thefe Regulations, are ftrictly to be obferved as
exprefled in the March-Regulations^ for the due
performance of which the Colonels, and command
ing Officers of Regiments mall be anfwerable.

PART.
 for the Cavalry. 341

PART VIII.
FURTHER

Orders relating to the Conduit

of Officers in general.

chap. 1.
Of Subordination.
Article 1.
HIS Majefty is highly difpleafed to underftand,
that a right harmony and (agreement does
not fubflft in fome Regiments, from whence fac
tions and animofities have been produced, which
are quite repugnant to fubordination, and preju
dicial to the fervice in general, as well as to the
particular good of thofe Regiments.
His Majefty is likewife informed, that the or
ders given by fuperior Officers to their inferiors,
are not executed with that refpect, alacrity, and
application which is required ; nay, that fome
Officers have even prefumed to difpute the orders
of their Commanders, and to argue, fiift of all,
whether they were right or wrong, according to
Y 3 their
342 Regulations
their own opinions : he has, therefore, found it
very neceflary to forbid the like unmilitary beha
viour, on pain of incur ing his higheft difpleafure,
and to give his commands in the moft urgent
manner, tha,t fubordination be kept up amongft
the Officers of every Regiment, trom the Gene
ral down to the youngeft Cornet, with the utraoft
fti ictnefs.

Art. 2. The Field- Officers *are to keep the

Subalterns to a ftrict performance of their duty,
particularly the young ones, in order to initiate
them properly, and to g.ound them in the funda
mentals of the fervice. The non-commiflioned
Officers and private Men, are to be kept under
fuch fubordination, that the Officers can depend
upon their being perfectly filent and fubmiffive on
the day of action ; of their executing their orders
without the leaft murmuring, and of their being
as implicitly obedient in the face of the enemy,
as they are in garrifon.

Art. 3. When a General Officer thinks proper

to give any orders relating to his Regiment, and
to his Majefty's fervice, and the Colonel-Com
mandant is of Opinion that fuch orders are con
trary to his Majefty's gracious will and intention,
the Commandant may then ftate his exceptions to
the General, in a decent and fubmiffive manner ;
but if the General, notwithftanding, infifts on their
being performed, it becomes his duty to comply,
without further contradiction : neverthelefs, he is
afterwards at liberty to make a reprefentation there
of to his Majefty, who, in cafe it be founded on
juftice, will render the General refponfible.
N. B,
 for the C a v a l r. y. 343
N. B. All orders given to a Regiment while under
arms, are to be immediately executed, and no ob
jections made till afterwards ; becaufe it would de
rogate from the refpecl: and obedience which is due
to every commanding Officer, and might be alfo at
tended with bad confequences to the fervice in ge
nera], to difpute his orders in the prefence of all the
Officers, and in the face of the whole Regiment.

Art. 4. As the Colonel-Commandant of a Re

giment is thus to pay a paffive obedience to the
orders of his General, fo muft he, in like man
ner, require the fame from his inferior Field-Offi-
cers ; and fo down thro' all the fucceeding ranks
in the Regiment, every Officer paying the like
deference to the commands of his fuperior.

Art. 5. His Majefty's difpleafure is, in a par

ticular manner, highly incurred, in being inform
ed that the fubaltern Officers do not behave with
due fubordination to their Captains ; but that they
are even offended when their Captains have re-
courfe to their authority, to keep them to the per
formance of their duty : it is his command, there
fore, that the Captains do exact more refpedl from
their fubalterns ; and, as often as any one mall
prefume to controvert their orders, put him im
mediately under arreft, and report him to the com
manding Officer on the fpot, who is afterwards to
report the fame to the Commandant of the Re
giment, and the Officer fo offending, muft, in the
mean time, remain under arreft till further orders.

Art. 6. When a fubaltern Officer has been guilty

of acting in oppofition to the orders of his Cap
tain to any violent degree, the commanding Offi-
Y 3 cer
344 Regulations
cer muft have him * examined, and tried by a
Court martial, and report it to his Majefty : ne-
verthelefs, if his offence will admit of an accom
modation, the Colonel muft order him to be
brought prifoner to the head quarters of the Re
giment, and confined for the fpace of a fortnight,
a month, or longer, according to the nature of
his crime, and to be accountable for his duty be-
fides.
i

Art. 7. When a Captain does not, without

any connivance, keep his fubalterns under due
fubordination, and to a conftant performance of
their duty, as far as relates to his Majefty's fer-
vice, and the care of his Troop, or Squadron ;
or does not order them prifoners to the main-
guard, as often as they are guilty of any neglect
or difobedience, fuch Captain muft be ignorant
of his own duty ; the commanding Officer there
fore of the Regiment, as foon as he is informed
of it, muft reprimand him feverely for his want
of conduct, and report him to his Majefty.

Art. 8. In fhort, the fubaltern Officers fhall

pay the fame obedience and refpect to their Cap
tains, in every thing relative to his Majefty's fer-
vice, as they do to the commanding Officer of the
Regiment.

Art. 9. Although his Majefty is moft graci-

oufly difpofed to hope, that the Field Officers and
Captains will not be fo unmindful of their duty,
as at any time to oppofe the authority of a fupc-
rior Officer ; neverthelefs, if it fhould happen o-
t herwife,
* See the following Chapte*
 for the C a v a l r y^ 34J
thcrwife, a Lieutenant-Colonel, in the abfence of
the Colonel, may put a Major fo offending under
arreft; and a Major, in the abfence of the Lieu
tenant Colonel, has the fame power over a Cap
tain; but a report thereof muft be afterwards
made to the General, or commanding Officer of
the Regiment, who will give further orders rela
tive to the arreft of luch Field-Officer, or Cap
tain, without which, no Officer under confine
ment can be releafed.
N. B. When a Captain oppofcs the authority of a
Field-Officer, or a fuhaltern Officer that of a Cap
tain, the Field-Qfficer has a power to put the Cap
tain fo offending under arreft ; and the Captain like-
wile fuch Subaltern, without an order from the Com
mandant of the Regiment, efpecially if fuch offence
be committed under arms ; and a report thereof
muft be afterwards made to the commanding; 6 Officer.

Art. 10. "When a Field-Officer makes ufe of

any indecent expreffions to an Officer under his
command, his Majefty will, by no means approve
of it ; neverthelefs, if fuch a thing be done under
arms, and in a heat of fervice, the Officer is not
to take immediate notice thereof, nor attempt to
juftify himfelf upon the fpot, provided fuch ex
preffions are not injurious to his honour, but is
afterwards to make complaint, and application for
redrefs, to the commanding Officer.

Art. 11. When a Captain puts an inferior Of

ficer under an arreft for breach of fubordination,
and fuch Officer, \ after his releafe, prefumes to call
the Captain to an account for fo doing, the Cap
tain, inftead of coming to any explanation with
him.
346 Regulation

him, muft immediately put him again under ar

reft.

Art. 12. It is hoped that every Officer is fo

much mafter of his duty, as to know in what
manner the fubordination of non-commiflioned
Officers to Officers, and of private foldiers to non-
commiffioned Officers, is to be kept up : and it is
his Majefty's moft ftricT: command, that it be in
violably conformed to in all Regiments, otherwife
the Generals and commanding Officers will be
made refponfible.

CHAP. II.

Of Examinations and Courts-Martial.

Article 1.
WHEN a Field-Officer is put under arreft,
he muft keep fuch arreft in his own quar
ters ; and if his crime is capital, a guard, con
fiding of a non-commiflioned Officer and three
men, is to mount over his perfon ; one fentry is
to be pofted at his door, and the non-commiflion
ed Officer to remain in his apartment.
N. B. When a Field-Officer is guilty of high treafon,
or other capital crime, a fufficient guard, to prevent
his efcape, muft be appointed.
The General, or commanding Officer of the Re»
giment, is to keep his fword.

Art.
 fir the C^val? y, 347
Art. 2. When a Field-Officer is to be exa
mined, he muft have previous notice thereof from
the Adjutant, and the Examination fhall be made
by the Commandant of the Regiment, and one
Field Officer, in the Commandant's quarters, to
which place he muft be conducted by the Ad-
ju ant: the Examination muft be afterwards lent
to the Solicitor-General ; and it he is thereupon
to be tried by a Court martial, the Members to
compofe it, muft be a General Officer as Prefi-
dent, two Lieutenant- Colonels, two Majors, and
two Captains.
Art. 3. In a garrifon wherein a Regiment lies,
the Captains when they are put under arreft, fhall
be fent to the main-guard ; but in other garrifons,
they are to keep their arrefts in their own quarters,
till the General, or Commandant of the Regiment
gives his orders, whether they fhall be releafed or
brought prifoners to the head quarters •, if a Cap
tain is to be brought to the head- quarters, an Of
ficer muft conduct him to the main-guard there,
and deliver his fword to the Commandant of the
Regiment.
-o'

N. B. When a Captain, or any other Officer is put

under arreft, on account of a capital crime, he muft
be conducted to the head- quarters of the Regiment,
by a guard fuffieient to prevent all poflibility of hij
eicape.

Art. 4. When a Captain is to undergo an ex

amination, one Field-Officer, and one Captain
muft be ordered upon it, and he is to be brought
to the place by anon commiffioned Officer of the
main-*
 <
348 Regulations
main- guard : when a Captain is to be tried by a
Court-martial, the members to compofe it fhall
be a Lieutenant-Colonel for the prefident, two
Majors, two Captains, two Lieutenants, and two
Corners ; but if his crime be capital., his Court-
martial fhall confift of a Colonel as Prefident, two
Lieutenant-Colonels, two Majors, two Captains,
three Lieutenants, and three Cornets.

• Art. 5. "When a fubaltern Officer is put under

arreft in a garrifon, he fhall always be ordered to
the main-guard, provided it is commanded by an
Officer; but if by a non-commiffioned Officer, he
is to keep his arreft in his own quarters : and if
he is to be fent to the head quarters of the Regi
ment, a non-commiffioned Officer and two Men
are to guard him thither.

Art. 6. When a fubaltern Officer is to be ex

amined, and tried by a Court-martial, he fhall be
brought from the main guard to the place of trial,
by a non-commiffioned Officer and two men ; and
one Captain, and one Subaltern, fhall be ordered
for the examination ; but the members who are
to compofe the Court-martial fhall be a Field Of
ficer as prefident, two Captains, two Lieutenants,
and two Cornets : if his crime is capital, the
Court-martial fhall confift of a Lieutenant-Colo
nel as prefident, two Majors, three Captains, three
Lieutenants, and three Cornets,

Art. 7. When a non-commiffioned Officer is

to be examined, and tried by a Court martial,
one Lieutenant, and one Cornet fhall be ordered
for his examination, and for his Court-martial,
one
 for the Cavalry." 34^
one Captain as prefident, two Lieutenants, two
Cornets, two Quarter- mailers, and two Corporals:
if his crime be capital, his Court-Martial fhall
confift of a Field-Officer as prefident, three Cap
tains, three Lieutenants, three Cornets, three
Quarter-mafters, and three Corporals.

Art. 8. When a private foldier is to be exa

mined, and tried by a Court-martial, an old firft:
Lieutenant fhall be ordered for his examination ;
and for his Court martial a Captain as prefident,
two Lieutenants, two Cornets, two Quarter-maf
ters, two Corporals, and two private Men ; if his
crime is capital, the Court-martial fhall confift of
a Field-Officer as prefident, three Captains, three
Lieutenants, three Cornets, three Quarter-mafters,
three Corporals, and three private Men.
N. B. When a non-commiffioried Officer, or private
Soldier, undergoes an examination on account of a
capital offence, a Captain, and one Subaltern, shall
be ordered for it, efpecially if he has accomplices in
his crime.

Art. 9. A Field-Officer, when he is condemned

o a rortrefs, fhall be conducted into it by a Cap
tain ; a Captain under the fame fentence, by a
fubaltern Officer ; and a fubaltern Officer by a
non-commiflioned Officer and two Men.

CHAP.
£50, ' Regulations

CHAP. III.
Directions for the preferving of good
DifcipKne amongft the Soldiers.
Article i.
S'lfafCE, dfter Subordination, nothihg Is more
efTentially hecefTary, thari ftri<5t difcipliiie a-
mongft the foidierS, To it is his Majefty;s com
mand that the Generals, or corfirridhding dfficers,
mail keep their refpefitjve Regiments, dnd like-
wife the Captains their Troops, br Squadrons, un
der fevere difcipline, and connive at ho irregula
rities.

Art. 2. The Soldiers fhall be conftrained to a

regular obfervation of all the rites and ceremonies
of the religion which they profefs.

Art. 3. No common whores muft be fuffered

to remain in a garrifon ; but the commanding
Officer, on the contrary, (hall order all fuch to be
ftripped naked, and turned out.

Art. 4. No gaming fhall be permitted amongft

the non-commiflioned Officers, and private Sol
diers ; and every Soldier who is detected at play,
fhall be put prifoner, and without trial run the
gantlope the day following.

Art.
 for the C a V a l r y^ 35I
Art. 5. When a foldier comes drunk upon the
parade, gets drunk when on duty, goes away from
his guard without leave, deeps upon his poft, or
quits it before he is regularly relieved, he (hall be
confined, and the day following run the gantlope,
without trial, ten times through 200 men.

Art. 6. All a£ts of violence, on whomfoever

they are committed by foldiers, fhall be punifhed
with the gantlope : as foon, therefore, as a com
plaint of this kind is made againft any foldier, he
muft be confined, examined, and tried by a Court-
martial, and fentenced to run the gantlope.
N. B. • When any diforders are committed in quar
ters, the offenders muft be the more feverely punifh
ed ; becaufe every Soldier is not only to avoid treat
ing his landlord, or any other perfon not belonging
to the houfe, with abufe, but, on the contrary, to
behave to him even with refpedt and civility ; and if
any foldier is ill-treated, he muft make complaint
to his Officer.

Art. 7. All Soldiers prefuming to argue with

Officers, or non-commiffioned Officers, either on
or off duty, under arms, or otherwife, fhall be
feverely punifhed with the gantlope; but more
efpecially when they are guilty of fuch infolence
under arms ; at which time, a foldier fo offending
fhall be immediately confined, and the day fol
lowing run the gantlope ten times through 200
men : but if a foldier contradicts, or threatens any
Officer, or non-commiffioned Officer, by word or
action, he fhall be fhot.
Art.
552 Regulations
Art. 8. Whereas till now various irregularities
and outrages have been at different times com
mitted by Soldiers on furlough ; whenever there
fore any foldier is guilty of the like behaviour
for the future, and complaint thereof is made, he
fhall be taken prifoner by the neareft garrifon, and
an examination made concerning his crime, after
which, he fhall be conveyed prifoner from one
garrifon to another, till he arrives at the Regi
ment to which he belongs, where he fhall be pu-
nifhed with the gantlope, according to the nature
of his offence, in a fevere and exemplary manner,
and never obtain a furlough afterwards.
N. B. When a foldier on furlough is guilty of any
irregularities in a garrifon, he muft be immediately
confined, and proceeded againft in the manner above
directed.

Art. 9. His Majefty is alfo informed, that in

fome Regiments the Soldiers are very much con
nived at in ftealing provifions, when they are on
command, or furlough, in the country ; but fuch
practices fhall be ftrictly prohibited for the fu
ture ; and whenever complaints of that nature are
made againft any foldiers, and fuch foldiers are
not feverely punifhed, the commanding Officers
of the Regiments to which they belong, fhall be
anfwerable.

Art. 10. When burghers, countrymen, or any

other perfons whatfoever, have complaints to make
againft Officers, non-commiffioned Officers, or
Soldiers, they mull have recourfe to the General,
©r, in his abfence, to the commanding Officer of
the
 jor the Cavalry. 353
the Regiment, who is on all fuch occafions, the
firft perfon to be applied to for redrefs : but if the
General, or commanding Officer fhould not do im
mediate juftice to the complainants, they muft ap
peal to the Chamber of war aud demefnes ; and if
they fail of redrefs there likewife, they are then per
mitted to reprefent their grievances to his Majefty,
by a memorial prefented to his facred perfon : ne-
verthelefs, it is his Majefty's ftridr, command, that
all complaints of this kind fhall be examined by
the Generals and commanding Officers of Regi
ments, or by the Chamber of war and demefnes, and
that immediate juftice be done to the perfons injured,
that he may confequently not be troubled on unne-
ceffary occafions : if notwithllanding any complaints
fhould come before him from perfons, who have
firft made a regular application, and have not been
redrefTed, the Generals, or commanding Officers,
and the Chamber of war and demefnes, will be made
refponfible : at the fame time, his Majefty declares,
that if any burgher, or countryman proceeds irregu
larly in his application, and prefumes to make his
firft complaint to him, it fhall be rejected though
ever fo equitable, and himfelf moreover punifhed :
all Officers likewife, non-commiffioned Officers, and
private Soldiers, when they have injuries to redrefs,
or demands to make, are to purfue the fame regu
lar courfe of obtaining fatisfaclion •, and the Gene-
tal, or Colonel of a Regiment, who is at any time
applied to on fuch occafions, is immediately to in
quire into, and, as much as poffible, accommodate
matters : the Generals and Colonels of Regiments,
therefore, and the Chamber, of war and demefnes*
fliall be anfwerable in general, that no complaints
Z of

/
354 Regulations
of any kind are brought before his Majefty, on pain
of incurring his higheft difpleafure.

Art. n. Punifhments for petty crimes may be

allotted, and put in execution at the difcretion of
the Colonel, or commanding Officer of a Regi
ment; but when Officers are brought before Courts-
martial, and Soldiers are tried for life, their exami
nations, and the proceedings of the Courts- martial
fhall be tranfmitted to the Solicitor General.

Art. 12. Non-commiffioned Officers fhall be

feverely punifhed for committing irregularities, and,
according to the nature of their offences, muff, be
either reduced to private centinels for a certain time,
or during life ; or be condemned to the f Karre.

Art. 13. All other kinds of irregularities are

already prohibited in the articles of war, and will
therefore not be repeated in thefe Regulations ; but
Regiments are to have recourfe to them for direc
tions concerning the punifhment of Soldiers for the
breach of fuch articles as are therein contained.

CHAP,

•J- This punifliment is working at the public workswith a

wheel-barrow, the prifoner haying one fetter on.
 for the C av alry. 355

C H A P. IV.
How the Vacancies of Officers, and
non-commiffioned Officers are to be
fupplied.
Article 1.
WHEN an Officer's com million becomes va
cant in a Regiment, the Colonel, or com
manding Officer thereof frail recommend fuch gen
tleman from amongft the non-commiffioned Officers
to his Majefty, whofe fuperior merit alone intitles
him to the i'ucceffion ; and fhall be anfwerable, if
the non-commiffioned Officer fo recommended, is
not pofTefTed of every qualification required to com-
pofe an Officer.

Art. 2. No non-commiffioned Officer fhall be

recommended to his Majefty for preferment in any
Regiment, till he has ferved in it for the fpace of
three years at leaft.
N. B. When a non commiffioned Officer, although no
gentleman, has great merit ; has la good underftand-
ing, a graceful perfon, and has at leaft been twelve
years in the fervice, he fhall be recommended to his
Majefty for a fecond Lieutenancy.

Art. 3. No commiffion fhall remain vacant longer

than a fortnight, or at molt three weeks, and the
Z 2 Offi
356 Regulation!
Officer who fucceeds fhall be intitled to all the va
cant pay.
Art. 4. When a non-commiflioned Officer, be
ing a Gentleman, is wanting in a Troop of Horfe,
or Squadron of Dragoons, the Captain thereof muft
endeavour to provide another to fupply his place.
Art. 5. When a Gentleman who has not been
a Cadet, is appointed a non-commiflioned Officer,
he fhall firft do private foldier's duty for three
months, in order to learn the exercife, and to ren
der himfelf maller of his duty, before he acts as
non-commiflioned Officer ; neverthelefs, he is to
wear non-commiflioned Officer's clothing from the
firft day of his appointment.
Art. 6. When a non-commiflioned Officer, and
not a Gentleman, is wanting in a Troop, or Squa
dron, the Captain thereof fhall recommend three
capable Soldiers to the Colonel, or commanding
Officer of the Regiment, one of which he is to fe-
ledr, to fupply the vacancy.
Art. 7. No Soldier fhall be appointed a non-
commiflioned Officer in a Regiment, till he has
fcrved in it for the fpace of four years ; and the
Captains, when non-commiflioned Officers are want
ing, muft take particular care to recommend no
foldiers to be appointed fuch, but thofe who excel
in bravery, difcretion, and good conduct ; none,
therefore, fhall for the future be made non-commif-
fioned Officers, merely becaufe they can write a"
good hand, as has hitherto been the cuftom, (that
being a qualification rather to be accounted cafual,
than
 w the Cavalry. _ 357
than either meritorious or effential) in confequence
,of which reftri&ion, the non-commiflloned Officers X
will be complete foldiers, and not fimple fcriblers.
N. B. Such Soldiers as are infpired with fome ambition,
are principally to be felecled for non-commiflioned
Officers.
It being highly neceffary, that a non-commiflioned
Officer fhould have fome fkill in horfemanfhip, par
ticular care therefore muft be taken, that no private
men are made non-commiflioned Officers, but fiich
as are properly qualified.

Art. 8. When a private man has performed fome

brave exploit in an engagement, or has fignalized
himfelf in any confpicuous manner, in the face of
the enemy, he fhall be promoted before all others,
and not only appointed a Quarter-mafter, but recom
mended to be an Officer. 1
Art: 9. When a non-commiffioned Officer is
wanting in a Troop or Squadron, and the Captain
has no private man in it worthy to fupply the va
cancy, the Colonel muft appoint one out of ano
ther, and the Captain muft, in lieu of him, give
back a man to that Troop or Squadron, of equal
fize with the new non-commiflioned Officer, and
proper to be polled in the fame rank and file in
which he was.

Zl .. CHAP,
358 Re g u l at ions

CHAP. V.
Of Recruiting.
Article r.
SINCE Regiments are at liberty to inlift all
fuch men as are young and able to ferve, no
preffing (hall be permitted under any pretence what-
foever, for which the commanding Officers of Regi
ments (hill be anfwerable.

Art. 2. Regiments may inlift men at difcretion,

but no Recruit fhall be fworn to the Standards till
he has received the holy facrament, that the fanfli-
ty of an oath may not be violated.
N. B. His Majefty permits all fuch young men to be
inlifted, as are already fit to ferve, or will become
fo in time ; but thofe who are incapable by reafon
of any infirmity, as alfo the fons of all fuch burgh
ers as are worth ioooo dollars, are exempted, and
no Officer fhall inlift them, on pain of being ca-
fhiered.

Art. 3. No burghers, countrymen, or labour

ers, having fixed habitations, nor any new-eftablifh-
ed fubjects out of foreign countries fettled in PruJJiat
fhall be compelled to ferve, contrary to their own
free-will and inclination : in like manner, when a
burgher, or countryman, has only one fon, who is
obliged to manage the bufmefs of his houfe, he fhall
not be preffed into the fervice, although he be of
, a pro
 for the C A v al r y. 359
a proper fize for it, left the ruin of his family mould
be the conitquence, unle(s he has an extranrdinary
fine perfon indeed.

Art. 4. No Officers fhall take money for the

difcharges of fuch Recruits as prove unfit to ferve,
on pain of being cafhiered ; the commanding Of
ficers, therefore, of Regiments fhall be anfwerable,
that no irregularities of this kind are admitted with
in their feverJ diftri&s, and take care, that all fuch
young men, as are under fize, obtain their difcharges
without paying for them : Captains alfo, and Of
ficers who are recruiting, (hall not difcharge any
man for money, on pain of being cafhiered.
N. B. If a recruiting non-commiffioned Officer fuf-
fers any man to defert for money, he (hall be con
demned to the Karre for three years.

Art. 5. No young Officers addicted to extra

vagancies fhall be employed on the recruiting fer-
vice, but fuch only as are of difcreet and folid
difpofitions.

Art. 6. Regiments muft complete themfelves

with found and able men ; and the Field-Officers
belonging to old Regiments are to accept of none
under five feet fix inches, or above thirty years
of age.

Art. J; Every Regiment is to give three men

annually to the King's Regiment, who are requir
ed to be from five feet nine inches, to fix feet high;
to be extremely well-proportioned, and not more
than from eighteen to twenty-fix years of age ;
Z 4 his
360 Regulations
his Majefty will pay for them, but for the tailed,
no fum exceeding 300 dollars ; for others in pro
portion to their inferior fizes, and the lefs advance-
money is given, the better it is in general for the
fervice.
N. B. The new Regiments are not to give more ad
vance-money for a recruit, than from ten to fifteen
dollars.

Art. 8. The Generals of Regiments fhall take

care, that every Troop of Horfe, or Squadron of
Dragoons, is compofed of two-thirds foreigners,
and but one-third Pruffians ; and that the Cap
tains forbear to inlift thofe, in their feveral diftricts,
whofe perfons they are always fecure of, as a re-
fource in cafes of neceffity.

Art. 9,* His Majefty is informed, that Officers

recruiting in foreign countries, render the duty
difficult by overbidding one another, by which
means a man is fometimes in treaty with Officers
of different Regiments : he therefore ftrictly for
bids all fuch proceedings, and, at the fame time,
commands, that, as foon as a man is firft fpoken
to by an Officer of one Regiment, no Officer, or
non-commiffioned Officer belonging to another,
fhall endeavour to pervert his intentions, either by
offering him more advance-money, or by reflect
ing on other Regiments ; nor fhall they interfere
in his inliftment, or hinder it, while the firft Of
ficer is in agreement with him, by any ftratagem
or means whatfoever, on pain, if an Officer, of
being cafhiered, and, if a non-commiffioned Of-
icer, of being condemned to the Kane.
Art.
 for the C a v alk y. 361
Art. 10. "When an Officer, or non commiffi-
cned Officer, recruiting in foreign countries, treats
with a man, but leaves the place before he can
engage him completely, and fome other Officer
afterwards inlifts him ; then the laft Officer, or
non-commiflioned Officer, muft keep him, and
the firft fhall have no right or title to him, not-
withftanding he might, during the time of his ftay
there, have maintained him feveral days, have ad
vanced him money, and been at other expencet
on his account.

Art. 11. When a Recruit in a foreign country

hath actually inlifted himfelf in any Regiment,
his engagement fhall remain valid : but if he
fhould afterwards become difTatisfied, and unwill
ing to remain in the Regiment in which he has
before inlifted, and fhould offer himfelf to an Of
ficer of another Regiment, the Officer muft en
tertain him as if for himfelf, and void of his for
mer obligation ; but, as foon as he got him into
his Majefty's dominions, he muft fend him to the
Regiment, in which he had firft engaged himfelf.

Art. 12. An Officer, or non-commiffioned

Officer, who gives money to any foreigner, on his
promife to ferve in no other Regiment, and, re
lying thereupon, fuffers him to go away, but the
fame perfon, a year afterwards, inlifts in another
Regiment ; then the laft Regiment is to be unti
tled to him, and the firft fhall have no right to
him, nor be allowed to demand him, under the
pretence of a former engagement, and his having
received money ; becaufe when an Officer, ot
non-commifiioned Officer, engages a young man,
but
362 Regulations
but does not bring him to the Regiment, leaving
him behind till he is grown taller, fuch obligation
fhall not fubfift longer than for a year, at the ex
piration of which time, any other Regiment is at.
liberty to entertain him, and fhall afterwards keep
him likewife, becaufe Regiments have no feparate
diftritts in foreign countries.

Art. 13. When a deferter inlifts in a Regi

ment, without confeffing his defertion, or having
obtained a pardon, he fhall, as foon as he comes
into his Majefty's dominions, and is difcovered
by the Regiment from which he deferred, be re-'
ftored to it again, on reimburfement of charges.

Art. 14. . Officers who inlift handfome fellows,

•without any fort of viol nee or compulfion ; Co
lonels likewife who prefent good Regiments, and
Captains Troops, or Squadrons, with their men
in complete order, will recommend tnemfelves in
the beft manner to his Majefty : on the contrary,
bad Regiments will reflect great difcredit upon
their refpective Colonels and Captains, who will,
by fuch apparent arguments of their neglect, re
commend themfelves in the worft manner to him.
N. B. The Generals, or commanding Officers of
Regiments, (hall take great care, that the Captains
keep their Troops, or Squadrons, always in good
order, that all bad men are difchargei, and their
places fupplied by fuch only as are found and unex
ceptionable.

Art. 15, Colonels and Captains muff. have

every man well fear.ched, and examined, whether
he
 Jor the Cavalry* 363
he is found, and able to ferve, before they enrol
and fwear him.

Art 16. When a man is difcharged out of a

Troop, or Squadron, the Captain mull inlift ano
ther of a fufficient fize to (land in the fame divi-
fion, rank, and file, that the Regiment may, at
leaft, not decline in point of men, of which the
Colonel, as alfo the commanding Officer, muft
take cae, as they fhail be anfwerable for the
contrary.

Art. 17. When Recruits are fent from one

garrifon to another, they muft always be efcorted
by a party on horieback.
N. B. Parties and detachments of all kinds muft be
on horieback, and not on foot.

CHAP. VI.
Of Desertion.
Article 1.
HIS Majefty is highly difpleafed to fee, by
the monthly returns, that men are, from
time to time, defcrting from their Regiments and
Standards, which is matter of more furprife, be-
caufe a foldier can^have no juft reafon to complain,
lince, as his Majefty, is gracioufly pleafed to allure
himfelf, every man receives his full pay, which
is more than is given in moft other fervices ; as
alfo,
364 Regulations
alfo, both large and fmall mounting in entire quan
tities every year ; foreigners moreover inlift them-
felves by voluntary agreement, and for large ad
vance-money, and all their lawful demands are
amply gratified ; his Majefty cannot, therefore, be
perfuaded to impute fuch defertion to any other
caufe, than the want of diftinfUy reading, and
explaining the Articles of Wart to Recruits, when
they are fworn to the Standards, particularly thofe
relating to defertion-, and for thatieafon ispleafed
to give the following orders.
Art. 2. When a Recruit fwears to the Stan
dards, and the Solicitor is prefent, an Officer is
likewife to attend the ceremony, during which
the Standard bearer muft hold the ftandards ; but
in the abfence of the Solicitor, cither the Captain
himfelf, or a Lieutenant of his Troop, or Squa
dron, together with a Quarter-mafter, muft fwear
him.
Art. 3. The violation of an oath, and the di
vine vengeance which will infallibly attend it,
muft be explained to every Recruit, before he
fwears to the Standards ; the Articles of War muft
be alfo diftinctly read over to him ; and if he is
not a German, interpreted, and clearly explained
to him in his own language ; when he himfelf ac
knowledges, that he underftands every particular
well, and afterwards voluntarily offers to be con
formable thereto, he muft take the oath in the
ufual manner, . ......
N. B. The Artielts of War fliall be diftinaiy read
over to every Troop, or Squadron, once a month,
• and

/
 for the C av alry. 365
and at the fame time interpreted to all fuch foldiers
as don't understand the German language.

Art. 4. A foreigner, who voluntarily inlifts for

the advance- money, and has afterwards the info-
lence to defert, when he is apprehended, whether
it be his firft or fecond offence of the kind, he
lhall be hanged without mercy.
Art. 5. A foldier, and a native of PruJJia, who
deferts, whether he was inlifted voluntarily or not,
whether he received advance money, or not ; alfo
whether it be his firft or fecond offence of the kind,
when he is apprehended, he fhall be hanged with
out mercy.•

Art. 6. When a foldier deferts out of a garri-

fon, the commanding Officer muft detach parties
of Horfe and Foot over all the roads, and iffue
out warrants, in order to apprehend him as foon
as poflible.
Art. 7. The Officers and Parties ordered out
for the apprehending of a deferter, are to raife
the hue and cry in every village ; upon which the
boors are to ring the alarm-bell, and to fearch all
the adjacent woods.
Art. 8. When a boor, or burgher, apprehends a
deferter, he fhall receive twelve dollars from the
Captain of the Troop ox Squadron to which he
belongs, for the payment of which the command
ing Officer of the Regiment lhall be anfwerable.
Art.
366 Regulations
Art. 9. No foldiers fhall be permitted to go,
either on party, or furlough, above a quarter of a
mile from his garrifon, without a pafs fealed with
the feal of the Regiment ; and every foldier fhall,
moreover, be obliged to fhew his pafs to every
perfon who requires it ; all country people, there
fore, as often as they meet a foldier, are always to
examine it, before they permit him to pafs.

Art. 10. Every foldier, who is detected with

a counterfeit, or bad pafs, fhall be apprehended
as a deferter, carried to the neareft garrifon, and
from one ga' rifon to another, till he arrives at the
Regiment to which he belongs?

Art. 11. When a foldier deferts, and afterwards

offers to return to his Regiment, if his pardon
will be granted, the Colonel muft tranfmit it to
him.

CHAP. VII. ,
Of Returns and Reports.
Article 1.
CtOLONELS and Commandants of Regiments
j are to fend their monthly returns directly to
his Majefty, and fo as to be always received by the
fourth day after the expiration of the foregoing
month.

Art.
 for the C a v a l r y. 367
Art. 2. The rank-returns of Officers, and the
returns of quarters, are to be tranfmitted every
month to the Secretary at War, and every Colonel
or Commandant of a Regiment, who does not fend
them in regularly, fhall pay 50 ducats to the in
valid-fund.

Art. 3. All returns muft be tranfmitted to his

Majefty upon honour and confcience, and every
Colonel, whofe return is found falle in any parti
cular, fhall be cafhiered ; unlefs he can make it
evidently appear, that it was contrary to his know
ledge, and altogether in confequence of the re
turns of Troops or Squadrons, delivered in to him
by their refpective commanding Officers, in which
cafe the commanding Officer guilty of the offence
fhall be calhiered.

Art. 4. All extraordinaries happening in Re

giments are to be immediately reported to his
Majefty ; but when Colonels and commanding
Officers have matters of no very great importance
to report, they may defer doing it, till they fend
in their monthly returns ; and when they have no
reports to make, they are only to tranfmit the
monthly return inclofed in a cover.

Art. 5. Colonels, or commanding Officers,

naving regimental, or other affairs to report
to his Majefty, are to reprefent the contents
of their letters, by concife fuperlcriptions upon
the back, of them, and to relate the particulars
within.

Art.
368 Regulations
Art. 6. When a gentleman dies in a Regiment
in which he was appointed a non-commiffioned
Officer by his Majefty, the Colonel, or Comman
dant thereof, when he fends in his monthly return,
is to report his death, to mention his name, and
to fpecify the time when he was fent to the
Regiment v as likewife, whether he had ferved a-
mongft the Cadets, or in his Majefty's Regiment,
or from whence he was taken.

Art. 7. Colonels, and Commandants of Re

giments are every year, on the ift of January, to
fend in a return of the Officers Of their refpective
Regiments to his Majefty, minutely defcribing the
conduct of every Officer, whether good or bad,
with the ftri&eft regard paid to reality, and with
out the leaft prejudice, which they are required to
do upon their honour and confeience. They are
to particularife the different habits and abilities of
every Officer, whether he be addi&ed to drink
ing, whether he is poflefled of a ready under-
Handing and good parts, or is weak and fimple.
N. B. In thefe returns the Colonels are likewife to
report the behaviour and merit of their Surgeon-
Majors, and whether they give a general Satisfaction,
or not.

Art. 8. When Commandants of Regiments

make unjuft reports to his Majefty of the good or
bad conduct of their Officers, and he difcovers it,
fuch Commandants will be cafhiered.

Art. 9. When an Officer is guilty of a cow

ardly action, or fufters himfelf to be ill-ufed, and
does
 for the Cavalry. 369
does not refent the injury, the Colonel mull re
port him to his Majefty, who will cafhier him ;
notwithllanding which, the Duel-Editl fhall not
be laid afide, but his Majefty confirms its force
afrefh in thefe new Regulations, and will have the
Articles ef War on that fubject referred to on all
occafions.

CHAP. XVIII.
Of Duelling.
Article 1.
AS it is obfervable that Rencounters, and
Duels happen frequently amongft Officers,
in which many are either killed upon the fpot, or
mortally wounded; and that quarrels generally
arife from trifles when Officers get in liquor ; his
Majefty therefore hereby declares, that although
he will have none but brave Officers in his fervice,
rieverthelefs, the Duel-Edict fhall not lofe its force,
nor fhall any Officer be acceflary to, or begin
quarrels, rencounters, and duels ; on the contrary,
it is his ftrict command, that Officers in general,
fhall agree well together, and that all unneceflary
difputes fhall be avoided : Generals, therefore,
Colonels, and all Commandants of Regiments,
as often as they are informed that any Officers
have quarrelled together, muft immediately order
them under arreft, and make report thereof to
his Majefty, who will either cafhier the aggreflbr,
or both, if they be equally guilty.
.■ A a/ N. B.
370 Regulations
N. B. Any Officer that canes another in a quarrel,
fhall be cafliiered with infamy.

Art. 2. As it appears by daily experience that

moft quarrels happen over liquor, exceffive drink
ing, therefore, muft be altogether prohibited a-
mongft Officers in general ; and the Colonels and
Commandants of Regiments are, in the ftri&eft
manner, to forbid it, and likewife to keep a watch
ful eye over the behaviour of their Officers in this
refpect.
Art. 3. When Officers, notwithftanding all
orders to the contrary, get drunk together, begin
quarrels, rencounters, and duels, either in liquor,
or at play, or are guilty of any other fuch like
pffenfive practices, they muft be put under arreft,
and tried by a Court-martial, which fhall adjudge
a double degree of punifhment for every crime
committed in confequence of drunkennefs ; as for
example, when an Officer, being fober, is guilty
of a crime, for which, according to the Articles of
War, he is condemned to lofe three months pay,
to be confined a year in a fortrefs, to be cafliiered,
to be fhot, or beheaded ; for the fame crime com
mitted when drunk, he fhall lofe fix months pay,
inftead of three; fhall be confined two years in-
ftead of one ; be cafhiered with the addition of
infamy, inftead of a fimple difmiffion ; be be
headed inftead of being (hot ; and inftead of be
ing beheaded, be hanged.
Art. 4. When any perfon is killed, or mortal
ly wounded, in a duel, or rencounter, and the
murderer makes his efcape, the commanding Of
ficer
 fir the C a v a l a Y, 37 1
ficer on the fpot fhall fend out Officers, and non-
commiffioned Officers, on horfeback, upon all the
roads, in order to apprehend him, if poflible.
Art. 5. If the Officers, or non commiflioned
Officers at any time detached in purfuit of fuch
murderer, knowingly permit him to efcape, and
do not apprehend him, when in their power, they
themfelves fhall be reputed principals, and fuffer
the punifhment, which, according to law, Would
have been inflicted on him. All perfons, in like
manner, happening to be prefent, when any Of
ficer, non-commiffioned Officer, or private Sol
dier is killed in a rencounter, who don't imme
diately apprehend the offender, but permit him to
efcape, fhall be deemed guilty of the murder, and
fuffer accordingly.
N. B. All perfons prefent at any murder, without en
deavouring to prevent it, fhall be anfwerable.
The orders above given concerning quarrels, ren
counters, and duels amongft Officers, extend alfo to
the non-commiffioned Officers, and private Soldiers.

Art. 6. If an Officer on duty is infulted by his

Colonel, or Field-Officer, or is even threatened
to be caned, he is not to take notice of the injury
till he is relieved, after which he is at liberty to
demand proper fatisfa&ion : but if any Officer
prefumes, becaufe he has been feverely reprimand
ed, or corrected for fome irregularity by a Colo
nel, or Field- Officer, to challenge him, he fhall
be confined in a fortrefs for eight years ; and du
ring life, if he draws his fword : if he wounds
him, he fhall be fhot without mercy ; and behead
ed, it he does it while on duty.
Aaa CHAP.
372 Regulation

CHAP. IX.

Of Difcharges.
Article i.
i
TW 7 O Colonel fhall grant a difcharge to a non-
_T^ commiffioned Officer, who is a gentleman,
especially if his Majefty fent him to the Regiment,
without having firft applied to him, and obtained
his order for that purpofe ; at the fame time he is
to report the reafon why fuch non-commiffioned
Officer requires his difcharge, and alfo whether
his behaviour has been fuch, as to render him
worthy to be an Officer.

Art. 2. "When a Captain is defirous to dif

charge any man in his Troop, or Squadron, he
muft procure a better to fupply his place, on which
condition the commanding Officer of the Regi
ment may grant his permiffion ; and if, on the
contrary, any Captain does difcharge a foldier,
and not replace him with a better, he fhall be ca-
Jhiered.
Art. 3. When men, by reafon of age or fick-
nefs, become incapable of longer fervice; his
Majefty will on no account permit them to be dif-
charged without his knowledge, but they are to
be reported to him by their refpective Regiments,
that they may be taken proper care of, and not
re-
 for the Cavalry. 373
reduced to the neceffity of begging for a live
lihood.
Art. 4. Every foldier's difcharge fhall be fign-
ed by his Colonel, and fealed with the feal of the
Regiment. When a man is difcharged, he muft
be furnifhed by the Regiment with .an old coat,
waiftcoat, and breeches, and not be difmifled
naked.
•j .

CHAP. X.
Of Leave of Abfence, and Furloughs.
Article. 1.
TH E Colonel, or Commandant of a Regi
ment, may grant leave of abfence for four
days to any Officer who applies for it, but for no
longer a time, without his Majefty's permiflion;
nor fhall any Officer be fuffered to go out of one
province into another; namely, out of Pruffia into
Pomerania ; out of the Eleclorate into Pomerania ;
out of the dutchy of Magdeburg into that of Cleves%
and fo on, without the fame fanction of autho
rity.
Art. 2. When an Officer wants leave of ab
fence, he Is to apply to the Commandant of the
Regiment, who muft inquire whether fuch Officer
has real bufinefs abroad, which requires his pre-
fence, and in what time he will be able to get it
Aa 3 def
 374 R E G U LA T I O N S
defpatched ; after which, the Commandant when
he fends in his monthly return, is, at the fame
time, to write to his Majefty thereupon ; but if
fuch leave is applied for by an Officer only to take
a journey for pleafure, the Commandant fhall not
write to his Majefty concerning it, nor fhall any
Officer be permitted to leave his Regiment on fuch
idle pretences.
Art. 3. Two Officers only per Regiment fhall
be abfent at a time ; and in the fpring of the year,
from the ift of April to the ift of June, no Of
ficer fhall be abfent, not even for four days.

Art. 4. If an Officer ftays a month beyond

his leave, the Colonel muft report him to his Ma
jefty, after which he is to be fummoned to his
Regiment, to be condemned two years to a for-
trefs, and, at the expiration of that time, to be
cafhiered.
Art. 5. From the ift of April to the ift of
^une, no perfon whatfoever fhall be abfent from
is Standards : Throughout the other months of
the year, Captains may grant furloughs to T 12
Men at a time, and to the fix fupernumeraries of
their refpe&ive troops, when they apply for them
on proper occafions.
Art. 6. No private men fhall be fuffered to
have furloughs to go to places, from whence they
will not be able to join their Regiment in twelve
days,
•f — To twenty-four men at a time, and to the twelve
fupernumeraries of their refpeftive Squadrons, &c. Drtg.
Rtgul.
 for the Cavalry. 37:$
days, till their Colonel has applied to his Majefty,
and obtained his permiflion.
Art. 7. One non-commiffioned Officer per
Troop, and two per Squadron, may be allowed
to have furloughs at a time, provided they will
be able to join their Regiment in 12 days, and
not otherwise, till application has firft been made
to his Majefty, and his leave obtained : but to
non-commiflioned Officers, who are gentlemen, as
alfo to Trumpeters and Drummers, furloughs are
never to be granted.
N. B. polonels are not to apply to his Majefty for
his permiflion to grant furloughs to non-commiffion-
ed Officers and private men, who will not be able
to join their Regiment in twelve days, unlefs bufinefs
of the utmoft confequence to fuch non-commiflioned
Officers, or men, fliall require it.

Art. 8. No furlough fhall exceed the fpace of

nine months, and every non-commiflioned Officer
and Soldier fhall return to his duty, at the expi
ration of his appointed time, left he fhould be
converted into a burgher, or boor again, and by
too long a practice of other profeflions, forget his
own: .no Captain, therefore, fhall prefume to
grant furloughs of longer duration, for which the.
commanding Officers of Regiments, and all Field-
Officers, fhall be anfwerable.
Art. 9. Soldiers are to have their complete
clothing when rhey go on party, or furlough ;
and when they are at work in the country are to
wear it ; every one, therefore, who is difcovered
working in a boor's or burgher's habit, fhall, for
Aa 4 / the
376 Regulation
the firft offence of the kind, run the gantlope 1 2
times through 200 men ; for the fecond, 20 times,
and for the third, 30 times ; and for the fourth,
fhall be condemned a year to the Karre : all men,
moreover, on furlough, are to wear their fide-
arms, and full clothing, when they go to church
on Sundays, or Faft-days ; and to appear as clean
and well drefled as the foldiers in garrifon are re
quired to be, of which the Field-Officers, who
may happen to be prefent, are to take good care.

CHAP. XI.
Of the Marriage of Officers, non-com-
miffioncd Officers, and private Sol-

Article 1.
WHEN a Field-Officer, or Captain, having
a Troop, or Squadron, is defirous to mar
ry, he mull write to his Majefty for his permiffi-
on, who, provided the match be fuitable to his
rank, and that he will be able to advantage him-
felf by it, will not refufe it ; neverthelefs, he
would be much better pleafed, if fuch Officer
would remain unmarried.

Art. 2. Subaltern Officers will not be permit

ted to marry, they are therefore not to make ap
plication on that account, unlefs fome one in low
circumftances has an opportunity to make his for
tune
 for the Caval r<y;* 577
tune by fo doing, in which cafe the Colonel, or
Commandant of the Regiment muft write to his
Majefty, giving a particular and juft account of the
circumftances which will attend fuch marriage,
whereupon he will referve to himfelf, whether to
grant, or refufe permiflion.

Art. 3. No non-commiflioned Officer fhall mar

ry without leave obtained from the Colonel of the
Regiment, who fhall not grant it to any non-com
miflioned Officer applying for it, unlefs he can
make his fortune by a marriage, efpecially if he
is but young. •k .

Art. 4. When a foldier, being a foreigner, is

delirous to marry, and has a Capitulation, which
he is willing to refign for permiflion fo to do,
Jiis Captain may agree to it, and the Colonel can
grant him a licence ; neverthelefs, the Captain
muft take care that fuch foreigner does not make
an imprudent match, and that his wife is not too
poor, or that, at leall, fhe will be able to main
tain herfelf by her own work, otherwife he will
be ruined : the Colonel, therefore, muft make
inquiry of the Captain concerning the circumftances
of the marriage, before he grants the licence.
Art. 5. Soldiers, being natives, muft not be
fuffered to marry, unlefs it be confiderably to their
advantage ; but marriage muft be in general rather
difcouraged in the fervice, than otherwife ; be-
caufe the fewer there are in that ftate, and the bet
ter pleafed his Majesty will be, on which account
every Captain muft take care never to have above
one
378 Regulations
one third of his reactive troop, or fquadron mar
ried, at moft.

. ii ii

CHAP. XII.
Of reviewing Troops, or Squadrons.
Article i.
WHEN a Regiment is quartered by fingle
Troops, or Squadrons, in fmall towns, a
Field-Officer is to review them every month, to
exercife all fuch men as are not on furlough or
command, and ftri&ly to obferve whether every
thing is preferved in good order.
Aft. 2. "When a Field-Officer finds any defi
ciency in a Troop, or Squadron, he muft mention
them to the Captain, and give orders for their be
ing repaired ; for the Troop, or Squadron to be
attended with more care and application, and to
be brought into better order by the next review ;
the reviewing Field- Officer, therefore, of one
month, is to deliver an account of all the irre
gularities he obferved, and the remarks he made,
to the Field-Officer for the month following ; af
ter which, if any deficiencies before complained
of in a Troop, or Squadron, are found unredi-
fied at the fecond review, the Field-Officer is to
report the Captain commanding it to the Colonel,
who muft feverely reprimand him.

KB.
 for the CavalicTi 379
N. B. The Lieutenant-Colonel is to review the Troop«
or Squadrons firft, and then the Majors, making af
terwards a report of every thing to the Colonel : the
Colonel, or Commandant of the Regiment (hall alio
review them every three months, and thoroughly rec
tify all deficiencies,
His Majefty is defirous, that the Officers mould
not only know every man in the Troops, or Squa
drons, to which they are feverally appointed, but
even in the whole Regiment ; and likewife, that
the men mould know perfonally all the Officers of
the Regiment, and be able to repeat their names, of
which the Field -Officers are required to take care.

Art. 3. When a Captain is on command, abfent

with leave, or recruiting, or is confined by any
lingering diforder, the General, or Commandant
of the Regiment, muft appoint a good Officer to
his Troop, or Squadron, that it may be kept in
proper order.

CHAP. XIII.

Of the Regulation of Prices, Weights,

and Meafures.
Article 1.
TH E Governor and Commandant, together
with two Field-Officers belonging to the
garrifon, the Commiflary of the place, and two
Magistrates, fhall fix the price of bread, beer, and
flefh-meat every month.
Art.
380 Regulations
Art. 2. Rates fhall be fettled according as corn
and cattle happen to be cheap or dear, and agree
ably to the mutual fatisfaction of the foldiers and
burghers ; fo that the burghers may be able £0
pay their taxes to his Majefty, and the foldiers not
be obliged to give more for bread, beer, and fiefh-
meat, than is reafonable.
Art. 3. When the commanding Officer cannot
agree with the Commiflary, and the Magillrates,
about the price of commodities, he muft report it
to his Colonel, and the Colonel to his Majefty,
explaining their difference, and afterwards waiting
for his decifive orders thereupon.
N. B. The Commiflary fhall likcwife make his re
port to the grand chamber of finances, war, and de-
mefnes, and ftate his fide of the queftion, that a re
gulation may be determined accordingly.
No foldier fhall prefume to exercife the trade of a
burgher, particularly that of a butcher.

Art. 4. It is frequently the cuftom, when

Troops, or Squadrons, march into garrifon in fmall
towns, for the CommirTaries and Magiftrates to
advance the price of bread, beer, and flefh-meat,
in order to pay the duty out of it ; but this prac
tice fhall not be permitted for the future, and the
Field -Officers when they make their reviews, muft
fettle the rates in every garrifon, in the prefence
of the Captains, the CommhTary of the place, and
the Magiftrates.
o

Art. 5. The reviewing Field-Officers are ftriift-

ly to examine, whether the weights and meafures
are juft, and whether the foldiers have complaints
to
 for the C a v a l R vl j8r;
to prefer againft any burgher on account of them;
in which cafe, fuch burgher, provided he is ac-
cufed 'with reafon, muft be made refponfible.
N. B. In garrifons wherein whole Regiments lie, the
Solicitors fhall take care concerning the equity of
the weights and meafures.

CHAP. XIV.
Of the Ammunition.
Article I.
HIS Majefty will order ioo weight of powder
to be given out of the Magazine annually in
the fpring to every Troop of Horfe, and 200 to
every Squadron of Dragoons, which the Colonels
are to fend for from the neareft fortrefs, giving re
ceipts for the fame to the artillery.

Art. 2. Every Troop, or Squadron, fhall al

ways have in readinefs for every foldier 12 car
tridges loaded with ball for his piftols, and 18 for
his carbine, which are to be carefully laid up,
while the Regiment remains in garrifon ; but when
it is to take the field, the cartridges are to be given
out to every man, the firfb day on which the army
is affembled > after which, every foldier muft keep
his own, and take great care, that the powder
does not get wetted, nor the cartridges torn.

PART.
"38* Regulations

AS his Majefty is informed, that the Captains

and fubaltern Officers contract large debts,
which they are afterwards unable to pay ; it is,
therefore, his moll ftricT: command, that no Cap
tain, much lefs any Subaltern, (hall prefume to
borrow money, without the knowledge of the
commanding Officer of the Regiment ; nor, un
der any pretence whatfoever, take up goods on
credit. When a Captain wants to take up money
for the ufe of his Troop, or Squadron, he is to
make a report thereof to the Commandant of the
Regiment, who, provided he finds fuch money is
abfolutely necefiary, muft pafs his word to the
perlbn that lends it, for the repayment of the prin
cipal ; at the fame time, he muft demand a fatis-
factory account concerning the manner how, and
the time in which the Captain propofes to repay
it ; after, which, if he fuffers the appointed time
to elapfe, without having paid his creditor, and »
the commanding Officer perceives that he does
not make any preparation for it, he muft then
make a monthly deduction out of the alignment:
But fubaltern Officers are more efpecially enjoined
not to contract a debt exceeding eight dollars, nor
fhall a commanding Officer give his fecurity for
the advance of money to any one, unlefs it be for
a new Officer, and the fum required is to be dif-
i
pofed of in the purchafe of his regimentals, which
muft be repaid afterwards either by deductions out
of his pay, or remittances from home: Subaltern
Officers who have no:hing but their pay to fublift
upon, muft have recourfe to frugality, and regu

i
late
 ■a.

32.]

( As Field Officer 69K

Douceur - 128*8
12 Rations, at 3 Dollars each 3b o
As Captain -
Col. of Horfe. Douceur -
4 Rations, at 3 Dollars each 12
For the Arms - 8'(8
For repairs of clothing and accoutrements ic__o o
For Medicines for the Horfes

Total _312'~8
f As Field- Officer - - - 69
Douceur -
9 Rations, at 3 Dollars each 27_
As Captain -
"aA. of Dra
Douceur -
3?°
2C_
goons.
4 Rations, at 3 Dollars each
For the Arms ...
For repairs of clothing and accoutrements
I
 for the Cavau y. 383
late their expences fo as to live within the bound*
thereof; fuch, on the contrary, as have other de
pendencies, are confequently not expofed to the
neceflity of running in debt, as they can fend for
s Neverthelefs,tohisdefray
remittances all would
Majefty extraordinary.
be muchcharges.
better
pleafed, if fubaltcrn Officers will altogether fup-
port themfelves upon their pay, that by having,
(n fuch a ftation, abftained from thofe extravagan
cies, which have hitherto been too cuftomary a-
mongft them, they may never be in, want of mo
ney, when they are preferred to the command of
Troops, or Squadrons, but always be able to ad
vance any fum, which may be neceffary to repair
deficiencies, and to keep them conllantly, in com
plete order. If, notwithstanding, the Captains and
Subalterns do contract debts, unknown to their
commanding Officers, they fhall be put under ar-
reft, whether they are able to difcharge them or
not, and reported to his Majefty, who wilL order
every Captain fo offending to be puoifhed, as
having difobeyed his commands, and afterwards
put under ftoppages ; but the Subalterns fhall be
lent to the main-guard, there to remain under ar-
reft till the amount of their pay becomes fufficienc
to difcharge the debt, and fhall do their duty be
sides ; after which, the fum fo deducted, fhall not
be paid to their creditors, but laid out for the be
nefit of the Invalids, and the creditors, moreover,
punifhed ; becaufe no one whatsoever fhall be al
lowed to lend money, or to part with goods upon
credit, to any Captain or Subaltern, without the
knowledge and confent of the Commandant of the
Regiment j and, to the end that no perfon, either
in
384 Regulations
in towns or the country, may attempt to juftify
himfclf on thefe occafions by a pretence of igno
rance, this is his Majefty's order, fhall be pub-
lifhed every half year in all garrifons ; the grand
chamber of finances, war, and demefnes, muft like-
wife iflue out an ordinance to the fame effect,
which fhall be polled up in every town, and pub-
lifhed from the pulpits.
N: B. The non-commiflioned Officers and
private men fhall not borrow a fingle grofh
from any perfon, on pain, if non-commif-
fioned Officers, of being reduced to private
centinels, and, if foldiers, of running the
gantlope ; the creditors likewife fhall not
only never be repayed, but moreover be pu-
nifhed ; all which muft be exprefled in the
publication of his Majefty's order, concern
ing the debts of Officers, and inferted alfo
in that which fhall be iffued out of the grand
chamber of finances, war, and demefnes.

CHAP.
 for the C a v A l R yI '385

CHA P. I.

Of Small Mounting.
D. G. P.
THE monthly dedu&ion of four
Grofhes, fix Phenings, which is
to be made from every private man of
the Horfe, or Dragoons, amounts yearly
to - - - - - -260
Every man who remains conftantly with his
Troop, or Squadron, fhall receive yearly

D. G. P.
One Pair of Shoes - -100
One Pair of Shoe-foles - 050
One upper Shirt - -070
Two under Shirts, at 12 Gr. each 100
Two Hair-bands, at 2 Gr. each 040
Two Stocks, at 1 Gr. 3 Ph. each 026
One Pair of Gaiters - -040
One Pair of Linnen Breeches o 70

Total 356
f. —
There remains then due to the Captain 0236

A private man on furlough is to receive

i
**. t B b One
386 Regulations
D. G. P
One Pair of Shoes - I O 0
One Hair- band - O 2 0
One Stock O 1 3

Total 3 3
There remains then good 129

A monthly ftoppage of 11 Grofhes, fixPhenings,

mull be made from the non-commilfioned Officers
for fmall mounting.
The overplus of money which will remain in
the Captains' hands, from this deduction for fmall
mounting from the non-commiflioned Officers,
and the private men on furlough, mufl: be laid out
in furnifhing the duty-men with fuch extraordi-
naries as may become neceflary.
Four Grolhes muft be monthly dedufted for
fmall mounting, from every non-commiflioned
Officer, Trumpeter, Surgeon's Mate, and private
Man of the Huflars, for which, amounting in two
years to four Dollars, he is to receive occafionally
within that fpace of time the following articles ;
D. G. P.
Four Shirts, at 10 Grofhes 1 16 o
Two Pair of Boot- foles, at6Gr. o 12 o
The Boots are to be vamped in %
the 2d Year, the expenee ofii 2 o
which amounts to 3
The iron heels - - -040
Total 3 10 o
- » - .1:.

For
 for the C A v a l r y. 387
For the remaining 14 Groflies, either an extra
ordinary fhirt, or pair of boot-foles, may be al
lowed every year, to a few fuch men as fhall hap
pen to have the moft occafion for them.

1. 1. .

CHAP. II.
Of paying the private Men.
Article r.
1

A Private Man fhalj receive 10 Grofhes every

five days, which are to be paid after guard-
mounting in the morning, Sundays and Faft-days
excepted, on which, not till after the performance
of divine fervice in the evening.
Art. 2. For the benefit of the Captains, and
in order to prevent their being obliged to advance
fums extraordinary, the ballance due to men on
furlough, from the account of the monthly de
duction of eight Grofhes, fhall not be paid to
them, but muft be flopped to fupply the deficiency
arifing from thofe, who become indebted for fmall
mounting.
Art. 3. When the Regiments affemble to ex-
ercife in the Spring, the foldiers fhall be examin
ed concerning their accounts before -a Field -Offi
cer ; whether they are completely flocked in fmall
mounting, or not ; and alfo, whether their Cap
tains have obliged them to provide any pare there-
b b %y *f
388 Regulations
of themfelves ; but this is not to be underftood of
thofe men who have always furloughs, becaufe
they only receive one pair of fhoes, one hair-
band, and one ftock ; gaiters, upper and under
fhirts, and linnen breeches, they are to bring with
them from home : thofe, on the contrary, who
do their duty, and conftantly remain with their
Troops, or Squadrons, the Captains are to fur-
nifh with frefti neceflaries, as often as they be
come wanting, without obliging them to fupply
themfelves with any thing.
N. B. No foldiers fhall be charged for any thing more
than what is particularly fpecified in the account of
fmall mounting.
-

... • </ 1

CHAP. III.
Of the Arms.
Article 1.
A S every Captain has a monthly allowance for
/\. repairing the arms of his Troop, or Squa
dron, they muft, therefore, be conftantly kept in
complete order ; of which the Field-Officers in
general are to take care, as they fhall be anfwera-
ble for the contrary.
Art. 2. If, during the firings, a foldier's piece
mifles fire, the pan cover is either not well fteel-
ed, the lock not in good order, or the flint is bad ;
as often therefore as this happens in any Troop,
or
 for the Cavalry. 389:
or Squadron, the commanding Officer of the Re
giment fhall put the Captain thereof under arreft,
unlefs it appears that the piece was not properly
primed, or the cartridge not clean emptied into
the barrel.
N. B. The rammers muft be made to fix well, and
to as not to fall out during the exercife.

Art. 3. His Majefty expects that the arms, to

gether with both piftols and fwords, fhall not only
be preferved in fufficient repair for ordinary du
ties, but further orders, that they fhall be con-
ftantly kept in as good condition, .as when they
were at firft delivered ouc new ; which can be
done without difficulty, provided that, as often as
the flock of a firelock breaks, it is replaced with-
a new one, made of walnut-tree; when a barrel
is worn our, or a fcrcw broken, a new one is pro
vided, and particular care taken upon all occafi-
ons, that every defect is completely repaired, and
a broken piece rendered as ftrong and perfect a-
gain, as it was at firft.
N. B. Every foldier fhall always have one good flint
in his firelock, and another, together with a worm,
in his pouch.

Art. 4. Every foldier, on all parades, and

whenever he is on duty, either on horfeback or on
foot, muft always have his arms as bright as pof-
fible, particularly the barrel and brafs work ; muft
have the ftock well rubbed, the infide of the lock
oiled, the cock and flint fcrewed faft, and every
part of the firelock in the completeft order ; on
parades, therefore, and in vifiting the quarters,
Bb 3 the
290 Regulations
the Captains, and all other Officers, are to make
a ftricT: review of the arms, and to take care, that
every young foldier is firft taught the proper me
thod of cleaning them.
N. B. The hammer flails fhall be always made of
red Ruflia leather, and never taken off but when the
firings are to be performed ; the flints are alfo to be
cafed with the fame.
When a foldier breaks his firelock on duty, his
Captain fhall make it good ; and although a foldier
off duty fhould do the fame, even on purpofe, ftill
the Captain is to be at the expence of repairing it,
but the foldier lb offending fhall be feverely punifh-
ed with the gantlope.

Art. 5. No Captain fhall, under any pretence

whatfoever, make a deduction out of a foldier's
pay, on pain of being cafhiered, of which the
Commandants of Regiments, and all Field-Offi-
cers are required to take good care ; whereby it
is to be underllood, that a foldier muft not be
obliged to make up, or pay for any clothes or ne-
ceflaries out of his fubfiftence money ; but if he
abufes his Regimentals, fells, pawns, or games
away any part of them, he fhall be punilhed ac
cording as the Articles of War for fuch offences
direct, and his Captain muft fupply him afreth.
Art. 6. When a Captain quits his Troop, or
Squadron, whether the arms are old, or new, he
fhall receive 1000 dollars from the Captain who
fucceeds him ; but then he is to pay for all fuch
new carbines, piftols, and fwords as are wanting,
after which he is at liberty to difpofe of the old,
as he pleafes.
Art.'
 for the Cavalry. 391
Art. 7. The Captains muft nave their fwords
always in good order, and the blades of equal
fizes; taking care that they are kept fharp, bright,
in the proper form, and free from notches ; and
Jikewife that none of the fcabbards, hooks, or
chapes are either broken or wanting.
N. B. When Regiments take the Field, every Cap
tain is to furnifh himfelf with fome ("pare blades,
which are to be carefully packed up in the baggage-
waggons.

CHAP. IV.
Of the Officers' Clothing.
Article 1.
JT is his Majefty's order, that all Officers, both
upon duty and off, (hall always have their Re
gimentals on, and never make up, or wear any
thing eKe.
Art. 2. Officers mail make up new Regimen
tals, according to the pattern fuit every year, the
price of which fhall amount to neither more nor
efs, than the fum limited in the (economical Regu-
ations.
N. B. Every five years the Officers fhall have new
fafhes, which they are conftantly to wear round their
bodies.
The Officers fwords are to be made in Pot/dam.
The Officers are always to wear their regimental
B b 4 /" hats,
392 Regulations
hats,. and to have new ones every year, made ac
cording to the pattern.

Art. 3. The Coats are to have capes, facings,

and cuffs, with plate-buttons ; and to be made
with three plaits on each fide, and tight fleeves,
exactly according to the pattern.

Art. 4. The great-coats are to be made of

white cloth, with white ftuff linings, and with
facings and cuffs of the fame colour of the regi
mental coats, which all Officers are to wear in-
ftead of cloaks, when on horfeback at the head of
their refpective Troops, or Squadrons ; they muft,
therefore be made long and wide for that purpofe.

Art. 5. The buff-coloured cloth waiftcoats,

are to be lined with unbleached linnen, and the
leathern breeches to be made to fit tight upon the
thigh, and in the feat. • • . ■■■%■■

- Art. 6. The Officers muft be always dreffed

in their uniforms, the fleeves of which are to be
Jaced with gold or filver, together with the velvet
capes, which muft be of the fame colour as the
waiftcoats.
N. B. The' waiftcoats are to be made of cloth, of
the fame colour as the facings of the coats, laced
with gold, or filver, according to the pattern, and
lined with unbleached linnen. ■

Art. 7. Officers muft always have good regi

mental fword-knots, whichevery one, without ex-
cepiion, is to wear, whenever he appears with a
fword
 for the Cavalry.• . $9^
fword on, they muft therefore at leaft buy one
new fword- knot every year.
N. B. Quarter-mafters and Solicitors, not being actual
Officers, are not to wear regimental fword knots,
nor to clothe themfelves like the Officers.

Art. 8. Officers, when they mount guard in

garrifon, are always to wear their boots.
Art. 9. Officers are always to have their hair,
or wigs, queued with a ribbon j but no Officer
fhall be fuffered to have a wig, unlefs he cannot
poflibly wear his hair, in which cafe, the wig muft
be made very thin, and (hort.
Art. jo. The Officers' Horfe-furniture muft
be made of cloth, of the fame colour as that of
the private men ; and is to be embroidered with
gold, or filver, the expence of which is not to
exceed 50 dollars.

CHAP. V.
Of the Clothing of non-commiflioned
Officers , Trumpeters , Hautboys,
Drummers, and private Men.
Article 1. ...
'HE clothing of the non-commiflioned Offi
cers, Trumpeters, Hautboys, Drummers,
and
394 Regulations
and private Men, fhall neither coft more, nor
lefs, than the fum limited in the (economical Re
gulations.
Art. 2. The Regiments are to be clothed eve
ry year, according to the pattern given, and the
clothing be delivered out on the firft of May :
but if it be his Majefty's pleafure to review them
on that day, it muft be given out the day be
fore.
Art. 3: Buff-coloured kerfey coats, blue cloth
waiftcoats, and leathern breeches, are to be made
according to the pattern, and given out every
three years, in time of peace, and every two, in
time of war.
N. B. The facings and capes of the coats, are to be
of the fame colour as the waift-coats, thofe of the
non-commiffioned Officers, being laced with gold,
or filver, and thofe of the private Men, with woollen
laces, according to the pattern.
The Kettle-drummers, Trumpeters , Hautboys , and
Drummers, are to have their clothing, and alfo the
flings of the drums, bound with a livery lace.

Art. 4. White great-coats, with facings and

capes of the fame colour as the waiftcoats, muft
be made every five years, in time of peace, and
every three, in time of war ; but they are only to
be worn upon a march, or on duty in garrifon,
when the weather is very fevere.
N. B. The great-coats muft be made as large in all
refpe&s , as the pattern coat , fent to the Regi
ment.
Art.
 for the C a v a iry. 395
Art. 5. The buff- coloured kerfey for coats,
the blue cloth for waiftcoats, and the white, for
great coats, are to be fupplied out of the King's
magazine in Berlin.
N. B. The Colonels fhall Furriifh their Regiments,
with all the articles in the fmall- mounting account,
in his Majefty's dominions, and in towns which
pay excife.
When the men are fuffered to wear their new clothing,
they muft make breaft-cloths, night-caps, and gloves
out of the old.

Art. 6. The Captains are to fupply the non-

commiffioned Officers, Trumpeters , Drummers,
and private men of their refpecttve Troops, or
Squadrons, with a pair of white linnen breeches
every year ; and with a new black flock, and a
hair-band every Spring and Autumn, out of the
fmall- mounting money, allowing the length of
four f ells to every hair- band.
N. B. The hair-bands mall be bought in Potfdam,
paying at the rate of fix phennings per ell.
The men are to wear their linnen breeches in the fix
Summer-months, both on duty and off, when en
foot.

Art. 7. In time of peace, the men are to have

new hats, with cockades in them, every two years,
and every year in time of war ; which are to be
laced with half-lace : they muft be alfo made of a
proper fize, be cocked according to the pattern,
and made to fit the head tight.
N. B. Re-
■f A German Ell is about two feet Englim meafure.
596 Regulations
N. B. Regiments are always to have a colle&ion of
fpare-hats in their ftore-rooms.
The new hats are to be delivered to the men, on
the firft of May, unlefs when it happens , that hit
Majefty will review them on that day, in which
cafe, they muft be given out the day before.
In the Spring of the year , when Regiments af-
femble to exercife, the old hats are to be cocked
a-frefh, and the laces to be cleaned.

Art. 8. The Supernumeraries muft be clothed,

according to the economical Regulations, out of the
clothing fund ; and are to have coats, waiftcoats,
breeches, great-coats, hats , fword-knots , waift-
belts, and boots.

Art. 9. The leathern breeches, pouches, flings,

waift- belts, and gloves, muft always be clean,
and well coloured.
N. B. The flings are to be bound with new woollen
lace every third year, in time of peace ; and every
fecond, in time of war.
All Captains, and fubaltern Officers are required
to fee , that their men take great care of their
clothing.

Art. 10. New horfe - furniture, with mohair

lace upon it, muft be made every fix years, in
time of peace ; and every three, in time of war.

Art. 11. Every five years , waift-belts, and

fword-knots are to be made of red Ruffia leather :
that one Troopj or Squadron, may be diftinguifhed
from another, the fringe of the fword-knots muft
be
 for ^Cavalry." 397
be of different colours ; and that of the General's,
or Colonel's, is always to be white.

Art. 12. The Men muft be furnifhed with one

pair of new ftockings every three years, in time
of peace ; and every year, in time of war : but
as they are fuffered to fell their old hat-laces, and
clothing, they muft be obliged to provide them-
felves with two pairs, every three years, in time
of peace.
N. B. The boot-ftockings are only to be made half
as long as the others, and to coft four grofhes.

Art. 13. So many pairs of boots muft be

made yearly, that the men may be fupplied with
one pair, every third year, in time of peace ; and
every fecond, in time of war : they are more
over, to be made in fuch a manner, as to be
drawn off, and on, with eafe.
N. B. No falfe calves muft be worn in boots.
The boots arc to be foled every year ; and to be
Vamped every third, in time of peace, and every
fecond, in time of war.

Art. 14. The pouches muft be made of hog's

leather, with tin pipes for 30 cartridges, and the
devifes in brafs.

Art. 15. According to the (economical Regula

tions, 10 coats, 10 great coats, 10 waift-coats,
10 pairs of breeches, and 10 hats, are allowed to
every Regiment out of the clothing-fund, in time
of peace, on account of the deficiencies to arife
by

i
i
398 Regulations
by defertion ; all which the Quarter-mafter is to
take care of, and occafionally to fupply thofe
Troops, or Squadrons, having fuch deficiencies,
either with clothing articles, which they want, of
the value of them in ready money. In cafe a
Regiment does not lofe ten men by defertion
■within the year, the fupernumerary clothing muft
ftill Be either left in the Quarter-mafter's cuftody,
or the money remain in the clothing-fund.
N. B. To a Regiment, compofed of ten Squadrons,
double the above number of coats , waift-coats,
breeches, and hats, are to be yearly allowed, for
the deficiencies occafioned by defertion.

Art. 16. The quantity of cloth, allowed by

ell-meafure, according to the economical Regula
tions, is quite lufficient ; the regimentals therefore,
muft be made full, and fo as to button in the
Winter-time.
Art. 17- Regiments are never to make up new
ftandards, or kettle-drums, till they become ab
solutely necefiary, a report of which muft firft be
made to his Majefty.

Art. 18. In time of peace, the entire camp-

equipage muft be carefully depofited in the ftore-
rooms ; fuch as tents, camp- colours, kettles, with
the cafes, cantines, hatchets, fhovels, fithes, ma
chines for chopping ftraw, pickets, and cords, ;
and any of thefe articles, which become wanting
in time of war, muft be paid for extraordinary.

Art.
 for the Cavalry. 399
Art. 19. The Commandants of Regiments,
and the Field- Officers, and Captains in general,
fhall be anfwerable that every part of the clothing
is made conformably to the pattern, and that the
men are well fitted.

Art. 20. The Commandants'of Regiments mail

provide all the clothing-articles at the price li
mited in the (economical Regulations, and take care
that every particular is made, and delivered in
the beft manner, and exactly according to the
pattern given ; in default of which, his Majefty
will render the Commandants refponfible, and
cafhier them.
Art. 21. That the cloth for the Officers, non-
com miflioned Officers, and private Men, may be
made good, and properly delivered to the Regi
ments, his Majefty has appointed his Privy Coun
cilor A. B. to take the care and direction of it ;
they are therefore to correfpond with him upon
the fubject, when necefiary.

Art. 22. The overplus which may remain, out

of the annual allowance for clothing and horfes,
after they have been paid for according to the
^economical Regulations, muft be left in the general
fund, and not afligned to the Regiments.
Art. 23. In time of peace, Regiments are to
manage their clothing in fuch manner, that the
limited quantity may be altogether fufficient to
anfwer, according to the directions given in the
^economical Regulations ; unlefs it fhould happen, by
any

.. ■
r
400 Regulations
any accident, to be burnt, or loft, in which cafe,
it muft be made good again out of the general
fund.
N. B. No extraordinaries fliall he provided out of the
clothing-fund, without hisMajefty's exprefs orders ;
for otherwife the commanding Officers fliall pay for
them out of their own pockets.
The Lieutenant-Colonel, and Major are to keep
the money, which is annually affigned to every Re
giment for clothing and recruit - horfes, in their
cuftody.

Art. 24. The Privy Counfellor A. B. is to re

ceive all the clothing, which is manufadure'd in
Berlin, and the. neighbouring towns, from the
contractors, to take care of the packing and car
riage of it, and to fend it to the Regiments.
Art. 25. The Privy Counfellor, in confedera
tion of his own trouble, is to receive the money
allotted to defray the expences of the packing and
carriage of the clothing to the refpective Regi
ments, without being obliged, at the delivery
of it, to give any account of the charges at
tending it.

Art. 26. All alignments from Regiments to

the general fund, muft be figned by their re-
fpective Generals, or Commandants, otherwife they
will not be paid.
Art. 27. The moft minute alteration fhall not
be made in the clothing of the Officers, non-
commiffioned Officers, Trumpeters, Drummers,
or
 for /^Cavalry. 40 i
or private Men ; but all Regiments are, without
any manner of inquiry or hefitation, to clothe
themfelves exactly according to the pattern fent
for that purpofe.

CHAP. VI.
Of cafting, and recruiting Horfes.
Article 1.
AS it has frequently been the practice for
Field- Officers, as well as Captains, to em
ploy the horfes of their Troops, or Squadrons,
upon their own fervice ; it is his Majefty's com
mand therefore, that no Officer fhall prefume to
do it for the future, upon any pretence whatfo-
ever, but that every one (hall conftantly keep up
his complement. If, neverthelefs , any Field-
Officer, or Captain, is guilty of a breach of this
order, and his Majefty fhall get intelligence of it,
fuch Officer will be tried by a Court martial, and
not only cafhiered, but rendered incapable of ever
ferving again ., Generals therefore , and com
manding Officers of Regiments , muft be very
attentive to prevent this abufe of the horfes, for
which they are to be refponfible, on pain of in
curring his Majefty's higheft difpleafure.

Art. 1. Regiments are not to purchafe more

recruit-horfes within the year, than the 70, that
are allowed by his Majefty ; notwithftandig which,
C c they

/
402 Regulations
they muft never have any, that are unfit for fer-
vice : Whenever it happens, that a Regiment
has been unavoidably obliged to exceed that
number, a return of extraordinaries muft be fent
to his Majefty, in the beginning of January.

Art. 3. Every Captain is to keep four coach-

horfes ; and thofe moreover, belonging to the
Trumpeters, or Drummers, muft be equally as
good as any others in the Regiment ; that if, at
any time, a fudden order for a march fhould
come, and when the annual number is to be caft,
the four coach-horfes, and thofe likewife of the
Trumpeters, or Drummers, may be taken into
the ranks.
N. B. The Trumpeters, or Drummers muft be af
terwards fupplied with fuch horfes as can be met
with ; yet they are not to be of any other colour,
than black.

Art. 4. All fuch horfes as are no longer fit

for fervice, are to be caft every year after the re
view, or time of exercife, that the vacant rations,
and the money for recruit-horfes, may accumulate
in the ftock-purfe.
Art. 5. The price to be given for horfes, is
directed in the clothing Regulations ; and his
Majefty expects them to be provided found, and
of the proper fize, without any further charges
than what are allowed, for which the Colonels
and Commandants of Regiments fhall be anfwer-
able.

C HAP.
 for the Cavalr y. 403

CHAP. vu.
Of preferving Cleanlinefs and Decency
amongft Soldiers.
Article 1.
REGIMENTS are conftantly to be kept in
the fame good order, the whole year through
out, in which they are at their Review ; it is his
Majefty's ftridfe command, that the Generals and
Commandants of Regiments, the Field-Officers
and Captains, and alfo Officers of all other de
grees, fhall take care that the Soldiers, efpecially
on duty, and the parade, are dreffed in the ncateft
manner ; have clean and good linnen on, gaiters,
black flocks, hair queued, and buff- accoutre-
ments well coloured ; that either on parades, or
in the ftreets, they never do appear otherwife,
than as Soldiers, who are ambitious to look like
rhemfelves, and not like boors : On the other
hand, when they are fuffered to go abroad in a
flovcnly, irregular manner, and are not always
completely dreffed in their Regimentals, their re-
fpective commanding Officers fhall be anfwerable.
N. B. The linnen breeches muft be always clean,
and in proper order, when the men appear in them,
either on duty, or upon the parade.
The flocks are to be bound tight about the men's
necks, and all their wafhing-articles to be perfectly
clean. ■ ■ In camp, they are to wafh for them-
felves.
Cc 2/ The

I
404 Regulations
The gaiters are to be buckled tight with knee-
garteis, that they may fit fmooth upon the leg.

Art. 2. The hair is to be cut in fuch a manner,

as juft to cover che ears ; and no non commiffioned
Officer or Soldier ihall be allowed to have a wig,
it he can poflibly wear his hair ; and fuch as are
obliged to wear wigs, Ihall have them made very
thin, and Ihort.

Art. 3. On duty, or the parade, the hair is

to be queued clofe to the head, and the queues
are to reach down to the waift.
N. B. When a Soldier, off duty, untwifis his hair,
he muft double it up, and wear it tied clofe with a
fhort ribbon.

Art. 4. The Soldiers mutt be habituated to

cleanlinefs in general ; muft have their hands and
faces always well wafhed, and their whole bodies
clean, in order to efcape the itch, and all fuch
other cutaneous diforders.

Art. 5. All Soldiers appearing on parades, muft

have their beards fhaved, and their whifkers well
trimmed.

Art. 6. The buff- accoutrements, fuch as

the carbine- and cuirafs-flings, the pouches, fword-
belts, leathern breeches, and gloves, muft be well
coloured, when the men wear them on duty, or
the parade, and afterwards bruftied clean, fo as
not to dirty their clothes. . _ ,

Art.
 jor the Cavalry." 405
Art. 7. The Men are never to appear on du
ty, or the parade, without their regimental hats
on : and whenever they are on horfeback , or
under arms on foot, they muft fix them firm,
and even, upon their heads, and not backwards
"upon their necks.
Art. 8. Every part belonging to the brafs-and
iron-work , muft be always made as bright as
poflible; and all Officers, and non commiflioned
Officers muft take pains to infpire their men with
an ambition to appear always drefled in a grace
ful, and foldier- like manner ; for if a man takes
no delight in his own perfon, he muft confequent-
ly have more of the clown remaining in his com-
pofition, than of the foldier.
Art. 9. As it is neceffary that a Soldier, when
he has acquired a good air, fhould likewife know
how to take off his hat properly ; the Officers there
fore muft teach every man to take it off with his
left hand, and let it hang down behind his fabre ;
in that pofition, to look the Officer, or other per-.
fon whom he is faluting, in the face, taking care,
at the fame time, not to ftoop, or hang down his
head : A Soldier muft alio learn how to addrefs an
Officer, or other perfon of diftinflion ; or, if he
himfelf is, at any time, accofted by fuch, to be
able to affume a graceful, boldnefs, and to give a
reafonable anfwer.
Art. 10. Soldiers are not to fhun their Officers,
and feem induftrious to avoid their fight ; nor run
into their quarters, when they happen to come near
them i but muft ftand faft, take off their hats, and
wait to fee whether they have any orders to give.
CHAP.

r
/
406 Regulations

CHAP. VIII.
Of preferring thefe Regulations with
Care and Secrecy.
Article i.
NO Officer fhall fhew thefe Regulations to any
Officer in foreign fervice, or other perfon
what! ever, to whom they don't immediately per
tain ; much iefs communicate, or lend them ; but
muft always keep them carefully locked up, fo as to
be able, whenever he is required, to produce them
complete and clean.

Art. 2. When any Officer dies, or is killed, the

commanding Officer of the Regiment muft take his
book of Regulations under his own care, and give
it to the Officer who fucceeds him ; and fhall be
anfwerable for every one which is, for ever fo ihort
a time, wanting in the Regiment.

Art. 3. When fubaltern Officers go on party,

or leave the Regiment on any other account, their
refpective Captains muft take care of their books of
Regulations during their abfence ; and thofe belong
ing to the Captains are, on fuch occafions, to be
left in the cuftody of the commanding Officer ; but
when a Regiment is to march into action, all the
Officers fhall leave their books, under lock and key,
behind them.
Since
 for the C a v alry. 407

SINCE the original Publication of thefe Regula

tions in the year 1726, a great many material
alterations have been made in the Exercife, the
Duty, the Clothing, and other parts •, his Majefty
therefore has been gracioufly pleafed to give out
thefe new Regulations for the Cavalry, which arc
dictated, word for word, by himfelf, and compre
hend, in a regular and diftinct courfe , directions
at large, for the performance of the whole Exercife,
on horfeback, and on foot, fhe Duty in Camp, and
in Garrifon, together with fome further inftructions
for the Behaviour of Officers in general upon all
occafions ; fo that no event, of however small im
portance, can at any time happen, in reference to
which, his Majefty has not prescribed a certain rule
of conduct :

His Majefty therefore ftrictly charges the Field-

Marfhals, Generals, Colonels and Commandants of
Regiments, Field Officers, Captains, and Subalterns
in general, to make thefe Regulations the ftandard
of their conduct, and at all times to obferve them
inviolately ; on which account they muft render
themfelves familiar, and well acquainted with every
part of them, and that more fo , than , it appears,
they have hitherto done.

All Officers mall likewife be fupplied with copies

of thefe Regulations, to the end that no one, who is
guilty of the fmalleft breach of any article con
tained in them ; or is, on any occafion, a ftranger
to his duty, may be able to plead ignorance, as any
excufe
'408 Regulations, &c.
excufe of his crime ; but that, when his Majefty
cafhiers him, or orders him any other punifhmenc
more fuitable to his offence, he may impute his
difgrace to his own indifcretion. And his Majefty
has fo favourable an opinion of his commanding.
Officers in general, as to believe that they are am
bitious to excel one another in the merit of their re-
fpe&ive Regiments, in order to make the beft, and
moft fatisfactory appearance before him at their
Reviews.

All Regiments are therefore to be governed by

thefe Regulations with due fubmiftlon and obedience ;
and his Majefty is gracioufly pleafed to affure him-
felf, that none of his Officers will neglect, and
much lefs difobey any orders therein given, but, on
the contrary, that they will attend to their duty
with alacrity and diligence, by doing which, every
Officer will recommend himftlf highly to him, and
may depend upon his peculiar favour and pro
tection.

FINIS.